Return to the Browser Screen

OPHTHALMIC SURGICAL SYSTEM

SERVICE MANUAL

ALCON SURGICAL
15800 Alton Parkway
Irvine, California 92618-3818 U.S.A.
Telephone: 949/753-1393
800/832-7827
FAX: 949/753-6614

906-2020-501 B, ASSEMBLY ©1998, Alcon Laboratories, Inc.

906-2020-001 B, TEXT ONLY
 ®

ACCURUS® SERVICE MANUAL

MANUAL REVISION RECORD

DATE REVISION ECN NUMBER & REVISED PAGE NUMBERS

04/98 A ECN 33803 - Initial release for -501 console with

software release V1.11 or below.

07/98 B ECN 34169 - Title thru viii, 1-1 thru 1-42, 2-1 thru
2-40, 3-2 thru 3-14, 5-1, 5-3, 5-6 thru 5-9, 5-11 thru
5-46, 6-1 thru 6-70, 7-1 thru 7-68. This ECN
incorportated information for 400 VSE and 600 DS
systems.

CAUTION: Federal (U.S.A.) law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

Intel® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

ii 906-2020-501
 ®

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOPIC PAGE #
Manual Revision Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Section One - General Information

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Description of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Unpacking and Setting Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Glossary of Terms/Abbreviations and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Front Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Rear Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Front Panel Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Posterior Setup and Surgery Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Anterior Setup and Surgery Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Options Screens and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
System Status Screens and Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Handpieces and Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Paks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Section Two - Theory of Operation

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Special I/O PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Sound PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Controller PCB Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Air/Fluid Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Air/Fluid Controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Receiver Mechanism PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Transducer PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
LPA/Illuminator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Illuminator Subframe/Universal Optic Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
LPA/Illuminator Controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
U/S-Diathermy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
U/S-Driver PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Coagulation PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Front Panel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Front Panel Controller PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Seven Segment Display PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Handpiece LED PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Switch Layer Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

906-2020-501 iii
 ®

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOPIC PAGE #
Section Three - Parts Location and Disassembly
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Tools, Spares, Test Supplies, and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Disassembly Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
1 Removal of Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2 Removal of Illuminator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3 Removal of Lower Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
4 Removal of Pneumatic Connector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
5 Removal of Handpiece LED PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
6 Removal of Upper Front Panel (202-1329-501) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
7 Removal of Front Panel Controller PCB (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
8 Removal of LCD Backlight (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
9 Removal of LCD (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
10 Removal of 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
11 Removal of Touch Screen (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
12 Removal of Upper Front Panel (202-1511-501) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
13 Removal of Front Panel Controller PCB (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
14 Removal of LCD, Touch Screen, and Keypad (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . 3-9
15 Removal of LCD Backlight (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
16 Removal of 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
17 Removal of Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
18 Removal of Receiver Mechanism Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
19 Removal of Cassette Release Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
20 Removal of Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly (see step 21 for alternate method) . . . . . . 3-11
21 Removal of Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly Without Removing Receiver Mechanism 3-12
22 Removal of Transducer PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
23 Removal of Main Air Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
24 Removal of Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
25 General Procedure for Removal of Regulators RG2 and RG3 (on Press/Vac Manifold),
R1 and RV1 (on LPAS Manifold), and RV1 (on Main Air Source).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
26 General Procedure for Replacement of EPROMs on Controller PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
27 Removal of System (Host) Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Section Four - Service Test Procedure

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Section Five - Maintenance and Troubleshooting

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Fuse and Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Backup Low Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Replacement of Filter and O-Ring on Main Air Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illuminator Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Illuminator Optics Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
CPC Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Receiver Latch Vacuum Seal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Diathermy Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Adjustment of Regulators RG2 and RG3 on Pressure/Vacuum Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

iv 906-2020-501
 ®

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOPIC PAGE #
Section Six - Schematics
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Section Seven - Parts Lists and Drawings

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Section Eight - Additional information

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

906-2020-501 v
 ®

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
TITLE PAGE #
Figure 1-1. The Accurus® Ophthalmic Surgical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-2. Removal of Accessory Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Figure 1-3. Accurus® Shipping Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-4. Symbols and Icons Used on the Accurus® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-5. Labeling Used on the Accurus® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-6. Diathermy Power Through 75 Ohm Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 1-7. Diathermy Power vs. Load Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 1-8. Safe Operating Area for Irrigation/Aspiration When Using Phaco Handpiece . . . . . . . 1-10
Figure 1-9. Footpedal Operation in Proportional Ultrasonic Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Figure 1-10. The Accurus® Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Figure 1-11. Front Panel Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors, with Connector LED’s . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 1-12. The Accurus® Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Figure 1-13. Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Figure 1-14. Wireless Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Figure 1-15. Power Up Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-16. Procedure Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-17. LCD Display and Touch Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Figure 1-18. Accessory Selections in Modes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Figure 1-19. Surgical Mode Selections in Modes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Figure 1-20. Global Functions Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Figure 1-21. Title Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Figure 1-22. Doctor Memories Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Figure 1-23. Miscellaneous Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Figure 1-24. Primary Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Figure 1-25. Popup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Figure 1-26. Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Figure 1-27. Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Figure 1-28. Vit Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Figure 1-29. Fixed Fragmentation Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Figure 1-30. Proportional Scissors Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Figure 1-31. Multiple Cut Scissors Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Figure 1-32. Scissors Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Figure 1-33. Extrusion Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Figure 1-34. VFC Injection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Figure 1-35. Cataract Surgery Setup Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Figure 1-36. Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Figure 1-37. U/S Linear Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Figure 1-38. I/A Max Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Figure 1-39. Vit Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Figure 1-40. Options Drop Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Figure 1-41. Quick Save Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Figure 1-42. PIN Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Figure 1-43. Common Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Figure 1-44. Posterior Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Figure 1-45. Anterior Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Figure 1-46. PIN Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Figure 1-47. Sound Volumes Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Figure 1-48. Timer Keypad Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Figure 1-49. Posterior Metrics Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Figure 1-50. Anterior Metrics Popup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

vi 906-2020-501
 ®

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
TITLE PAGE #
Figure 1-51. System Fault Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Figure 1-52. System Error Popup Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Figure 1-53. System Advisory Popup Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Figure 1-54. System information Popup Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Figure 1-55. InnoVit® Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-56. Accurus® Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-57. Accurus® Fragmatome® Handpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-58. Intraocular Scissors (IOS) Handpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-59. Single Use Bipolar Coagulation Brush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-60. 4 Inch Nadler Coadaptation Forceps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Figure 1-61. Accurus® Phaco Handpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Figure 1-62. Irrigation/Aspiration Handpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Figure 1-63. Total Plus® Vitrectomy Pak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

Figure 2-1. System Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Figure 2-2. Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-3. Host System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-4. Special I/O PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-5. System Power Control on Special I/O PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-6. Sound PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-7. Controller Kernel Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-8. Air/Fluid Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-9. Vacuum vs. Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-10. Air/Fluid Controller PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Figure 2-11. Receiver Mechanism PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Figure 2-12. Transducer PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Figure 2-13. LPA/Illuminator Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Figure 2-14. U/S-Diathermy Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Figure 2-15. Front Panel Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Figure 3-1. Accurus® Parts Location Diagram of Front Panel and Upper Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3-2. Upper Level Layout of Accurus® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-3. Lower Level Layout of Accurus® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-4. Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly with Tranducer PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-5. Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-6. Captive Screws Securing Front of Upper Level to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-7. Screws Securing Illuminator Cover to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-8. Nylon Screw Restraining Illuminator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-9. Fifth Captive Screw Securing Lower Front Panel to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-10. Exploded View of 202-1329-501 Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-11. View of Front Panel Assembly with Controller PCB Removed
(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-12. Removing the 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-13. Front Panel Controller PCB (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-14. Exploded View of 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-15. Location of LCD Backlights (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-16. Removing 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-17. Captive Screws Securing End Header to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-18. Screws Securing Receiver Mechanism Assembly to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-19. Screws Securing Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly to Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

906-2020-501 vii
 ®

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
TITLE PAGE #
Figure 3-20. Interference Points Encountered When Removing Pressure/Vacuum
Manifold Assembly from Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-21. Grasp Proportional Valve and Lift Rear Manifold Up While Pushing
Low Pressure Pump Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-22. Remove Manifold from System as Shown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-23. Bottom of Transducer PCB Showing Installation of Spacers and O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Figure 5-1. Fuse Module Location and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Figure 5-2. Removal of the Fuse Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-3. Water Filter on Main Air Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 5-4. Bulb Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-5. CPC Connector Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5-6. Removal of Latch Seal from Receiver Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5-7. Erbe Coag PCB Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

LIST OF TABLES
TITLE PAGE #

Table 1-1. Terms/Abbreviations and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Table 1-2. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Table 1-3. Tones and Their Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Table 1-4. Footswitch Functions in Posterior Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Table 1-5. Footswitch Functions in Anterior Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Table 1-6. Posterior Domain Surgery Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Table 1-7. Anterior Domain Surgery Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Table 5-1. Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Table 5-2. Recommended Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-3. Recommended Test Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-4. Recommended Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-5. Fuse and Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Table 5-6. General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Table 5-7. System Information Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Blue) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 5-8. System Information Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Table 5-9. Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Table 5-10. Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Table 5-11. Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Table 5-12. Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Table 5-13. Fault Codes for All Software Versions (Red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Table 5-14. POST Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Table 7-1. Accurus® Console Dash Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Table 7-2. Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

viii 906-2020-501
 ®
SECTION ONE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Alcon Accurus® ophthalmic surgical system is a
sophisticated instrument designed to be durable, reliable,
safe, and easy to operate. This state-of-the-art instrument
has been developed to be user friendly, combining
hardware that is easy to install and maintain along with
computer software that increases the effectivity of the
user.
Interaction is through the console's hard keys, touch
screen, remote control, and footswitch. Information is
provided via digital Light Emitting Diode (LED)
displays, a color Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), lighted
indicators, sound, and tactile feel. All of this, in
combination with a variety of probes and handpieces,
provides the ophthalmic surgeon with the following:
SURGICAL
Figure 1-1. The Accurus® Ophthalmic Surgical System
906-2020-501
• Graphic user interface (GUI) for ease of operation
• Dual aspiration fluid cassette with sealed, detachable
drain bag (posterior only)
• Pulsed air pressure to drive vitreous cutter probes
and scissors
• Proportional air pressure to drive scissors and
Viscous Fluid Control (VFC) syringe
• Infusion/Irrigation pressure to maintain intraocular
eye pressure
• Low pressure air for Fluid/Air Exchange (F/AX),
Vented Gas Forced Infusion "VGFI®", and optional
Anterior Vented Gas Forced Irrigation "Anterior
VGFI®"
• Venturi vacuum to aspirate ocular matter from the eye
• Halogen illuminators for fiber optic illumination
• Posterior Vitrectomy
• Fragmentation
• Diathermy
• Phacoemulsification (optional upgrade)
• Irrigation/Aspiration (optional upgrade)
• Anterior Vitrectomy (optional upgrade)
1-1

DESCRIPTION OF THIS MANUAL
The purpose of this manual is to provide the field
engineer with the necessary information to maintain and
repair the Accurus® system. This manual covers all
configurations of the Accurus®, and is divided into eight
sections as follows:
Section One-General Information
This section gives a general description of the Accurus®
features and components. Unpacking and installation
procedures are provided for all configurations of the
system.
Section Two-Theory of Operation
This section gives a detailed description of how the
Accurus® operates starting at the system level and
working down to the PCB (Printed Circuit Board) level.
Section Three-Parts Location and Disassembly
This section contains parts location diagrams along with
field level disassembly procedures for the Accurus®
console. Disassembly procedures for OEM components
are not provided.
Section Four-Service Test Procedure
This section of the service manual is reserved for storage
of the Accurus® Service Test Procedure and checklist.
The Service Test Procedure is used to test the Accurus®
after repair or preventive maintenance to ensure the
system performs within specifications. This procedure is
not included with the manual and is available to trained
personnel only.
Section Five-Maintenance & Troubleshooting
System maintenance procedures and troubleshooting
information are included here. Listings of spares, tools,
and supplies required to repair the system are also
included.
Section Six-Schematics
System interconnect diagrams, pneumatics diagrams, and
PCB and cable schematics are provided in this section.
Section Seven-Parts Lists and Drawings
This section contains parts lists and engineering
documentation for each major assembly.
Section Eight-Additional Information
This section is used to store any additional information
pertaining to this system.
1-2
®
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Although this manual provides the necessary information
for maintaining optimum performance of the Accurus®, it
does not contain all of the operating procedures or
functional descriptions contained in the Operator's
Manual (PN 905-2020-50X). In addition, the Warnings
and Cautions in the Operator's Manual also apply for this
Service Manual. The Operator's Manual supplements
information provided in this manual and should be
available on-site with the system.
If you have any questions or require additional
information, please contact your local Service
Representative or the Technical Services Department at:
ALCON SURGICAL
15800 Alton Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618-3818
(949) 753-1393
(800) 832-7827
If you are located outside the United States, please
contact your local authorized Alcon Surgical
representative.
EMC Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for medical devices to the IEC 601-1-2:1993,
EN60601-1-2:1994 and Medical Device Directive 93/42/
EEC. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a typical
medical installation.
Underwriter's Laboratories
The Accurus® ophthalmic surgical system is classified by
Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., with respect to Electric
Shock, Fire, Mechanical and other specified hazards only
in accordance with UL 2601-1, CAN/CSA 601.1, IEC
601-2-2, and IEC 601-2-18.
LED Statement
LED's used in this equipment are Class 1 LED products
according to EN60825-1 amendment 11. Oct. 1996.
906-2020-501
 ®

RECEIVING
INSPECTION

The system was inspected mechanically and electrically

prior to shipment. If the shipping container appears
damaged, ask that the carrier’s agent be present when the
system is unpacked. The system should be inspected for
external damage (i.e., scratches, dents, or broken parts).
If damage is discovered or if the system fails any of the
functional tests notify the carrier and an Alcon Surgical
representative. Retain the shipping container and
packing material for the carrier’s inspection. As
necessary, file a claim with the carrier or, if insured
separately, with the insurance company.

UNPACKING AND SETTING UP

THE SYSTEM

1 Cut and remove the binding straps.

2 Open top of outer carton and remove accessory tray

(see Figure 1-2).

3 Remove outer carton. Refer to Figure 1-3 for an

exploded view of the shipping arrangement.

4 Remove front and top foam inserts.

CAUTION
The console weighs approximately 90 pounds when
unpacked. Two people are required to lift the console.

5 Remove console and place on an appropriate table or Figure 1-2. Removal of Accessory Tray
cart.
9 Perform the Accurus® Service Test Procedure as
6 Unwrap the footswitch and plug it into the specified in Section Four of this manual.
appropriate connector on the rear panel.

7 Remove air hose from bottom of carton and connect

to system and air source as necessary.

8 Release the 115 VAC power cord from the Rear

Panel and plug into a functioning 115 VAC
receptacle but do not turn on the AC Power Switch or
the Stand-by Switch until instructed to do so.

NOTE: If system is to be plugged into a voltage

source other than 115 VAC, fuses and voltage
selection changes must be made according to the
procedure in Section Five.

906-2020-501 1-3
 ®

Figure 1-3. Accurus® Shipping Arrangement

1-4 906-2020-501
 ®

GLOSSARY OF TERMS/ABBREVIATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS

Many of the terms/abbreviations used in this manual, and on the Accurus®, are described in Table 1-1 below.
Symbols and icons are identified in Figure 1-4, and system labeling in Figure 1-5.

Table 1-1. Terms/Abbreviations and Descriptions

TERM OR ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Anterior VGFI® Anterior Vented Gas Forced Infusion.

BSS® Plus Balanced Salt Solution enriched with bicarbonate, dextrose, and glutathione.

cmH2O Centimeters of water.

cpm Cuts Per Minute.

Detent A discrete footpedal position at which more force is required to depress the
footpedal to the next position.

Diathermy The production of heat in body tissues by electric current for therapeutic
purposes.

Extrusion A mode where vacuum is available to remove fluid/matter.

F/AX Fluid Air Exchange.

Frag Fragmentation.

Global Function A function whose status and controls are independent of the current footpedal
position and surgery mode.

Highlighted To center attention by video reversing the function key and changing the key
color from gray to blue.

I/A Irrigation/Aspiration.

IEC International Electromechanical Commission.

ISO International Standards Organization.

IV Intravenous.

LCD Liquid Crystal Display.

LED Light Emitting Diode.

mmHg Millimeter of Mercury. A unit of vacuum.

N/A Not Applicable.

PEL Patient Eye Level. A difference in height between the cassette and the patient
eye level.

PIN Personal Identification Number.

psi Pressure per Square Inch. A unit of pressure.

pps Pulses Per Second.

U/S Ultrasound.

VFC Viscous Fluid Control.

VGFI® Vented Gas Forced Infusion.

Vit Vitrectomy. Extraction of the vitreous from the vitreous cavity.

906-2020-501 1-5
 ®

Posterior Surgery Infusion / Irrigation Eject

Fragmentation Fluid Air Exhange Up/Down Adjustments

Vitrectomy Diathermy Standby State

VFC 1 Illuminator 1 or 2 Air Pressure Input

Extrusion Bulb Burned Out Alternating Current

Scissors 0 Footswitch Positions Footswitch

Anterior Surgery System Information I/V Pole

Phacoemulsification SYSTEM System Fault OFF (power)

FAULT

Consult Operator's Manual, or

Caution, or
Anterior Vitrectomy
! System Error (yellow), or
System Advisory (green)
ON (power)

Irrigation/Aspiration Dangerous Voltage Equipotentiality

Test Type BF Equipment Fuse

Clean Type B Equipment Cassette Eject

Infusion / Irrigation Setup PC CARD Flash Card Slot Illuminator Eject

Exit Serial In/Out Hot

Figure 1-4. Symbols and Icons Used on the Accurus®

1-6 906-2020-501
 ®

®
®

SERIAL IN/OUT SURGICAL

ALCON LABORATORIES, INC. MODEL SERIAL NO. PART NO. REV MFR. DATE
FORT WORTH, TX 78134-2099, USA

UPGRADE CONNECTORS LABEL

! LA
100-120V 50/60 Hz 10A
SSIFIE MEDICAL/ELECTRICAL LA
SSIFIE
220V 50/60 Hz 6A
230V-240V 50 Hz 6A

C
D

D
EQUIPMENT
UL UL

202-1465-001 REV. __
CLASSIFIED
© ©
95KJ C 0123
UL2601-1/CAN CSA C22.2 NO. 601.1 !

OUTPUT DIATHERMY
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF USED IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE ANESTHETICS.
TYPE BF CAUTION: GROUNDING RELIABILITY CAN ONLY BE ACHIEVED WHEN EQUIPMENT IS
CONNECTED TO AN EQUIVALENT RECEPTACLE MARKED HOSPITAL GRADE.
POWER
(W) 25
CAUTION: RISK OF BURNS AND FIRE - DO NOT USE NEAR CONDUCTIVE MATERIALS.
PC CARD IMPEDANCE
(‰) 75
RENEW ELECTRODE CABLES UPON EVIDENCE OF DETERIORATION.

WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE COVER.

ALCON WARRANTIES VOID IF COVER IS REMOVED. SAFETY HAZARDS ARE
FLASH CARD INSERTION SLOT LABEL FREQUENCY
340 EMINENT WITH COVER REMOVED. NO USER SERVICABLE COMPONENTS
(KHz) INSIDE.

WARNING: THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A PRESSURE VESSEL, P/N: 202-1339-001, WITH

THE FOLLOWING RATINGS: PS= 6.2 BAR, Tmax= 85¡C, Tmin= 10¡C, V=0.11 L.
MADE IN U.S.A.

ACCURUS NAMEPLATE LABEL (1/2 SCALE)

90 - 120 Psi
!
(620 - 825 kPa)
AIR PRESSURE INPUT LABEL FOOTSWITCH CONNECTOR LABEL I/V POLE CONNECTOR LABEL

® USE ONLY WITH

SURGICAL ACCURUS®

202-1499-001 REV. __
MADE IN U.S.A.

100-120V T10A/250V
220/230-240V T5A/250V

ELECTRICAL INPUT LABEL

ACCURUS® FOOTSWITCH ID LABEL

EQUAL POTENTIALITY LABEL

REPLACEMENT BULB

ALCON CAT # 143-088

ANSI BRL 12V 50W 807-1176-001 REV. __

ILLUMINATOR EJECTOR LABEL BULB SPECIFICATION LABEL CASSETTE EJECTOR LABEL

Figure 1-5. Labeling Used on the Accurus®

906-2020-501 1-7
 ®

Table 1-2. Specifications

CONSOLE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: The console accepts the following

ranges or input commercial power voltages and frequencies and
DIMENSIONS: meets the leakage currents specified in IEC 601-1-1. Protection
against electrical shock is Class I.
Height: 50.8 cm (20.0 inches)
Width: 48.3 cm (19.0 inches) 100-120 Vac 50/60 Hz 10 A max. Fuse: T 10 A / 250 V
Depth: 52.1 cm (20.5 inches) 220 Vac 50/60 Hz 6 A max. Fuse: T 5 A / 250 V
230-240 Vac 50 Hz 6 A max. Fuse: T 5 A / 250 V
WEIGHT:

Unpacked: 40.8 kg (90 pounds) FOOTSWITCH

Packed: 61.4 kg (135 pounds)
DIMENSIONS:
ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS:
Height: 14.0 cm (5.50 inches)
Operating Non-Operating Width: 22.9 cm (9.00 inches)
Depth: 43.2 cm (17.0 inches)
Altitude: 3,048 meters 12,191 meters
(10,000 feet) (40,000 feet) WEIGHT: 4.5 kg (10 pounds)

Temperature: 10° C to 35° C -40° C to 75° C ENVIRONMENTAL: The footswitch construction is water tight in
(50° F to 95° F) (-40° F to 167° F) compliance with IEC 601-1 and IEC 601-2-2, subclause 44.6 aa.

Relative Humidity: 10% to 95% 10% to 95% ELECTRICAL: The footswitch is connected to the console via
without without electrical cable. All power and communications enter/exit the
condensation condensation footswitch from this cable, which is a part of the footswitch assembly.

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS SCISSORS:

Submodes: Proportional and Multi Cut
AIR PRESSURE @ SEA LEVEL: Pressure: 0 to 40 psi
AVGFI, VGFI, F/AX: 0 to 120 mmHg Cut Rate: 1 to 300 cpm in Multi Cut
Flow Rate: 1.2 slpm min. @ 120 mmHg
VISCOUS FLUID:
DIATHERMY: Submodes: Injection and Extraction
25 Watts max., 75 Ohm load Injection Pressure: 0 to 80 psi (0-70 psi @ 5-BAR)
110 Vpp @ 340 ±17 Khz, 75 Ohm load Extraction Vacuum
129 Vpp @ 340 ±17 Khz, no load at Sea Level: 0 to 600 mmHg (0-450 psi @ 5-BAR)

ILLUMINATION: PHACOEMULSIFICATION:
Normal Intensity: 6.0 lumens min. @100% Submodes: Linear and Fixed
High Intensity: 10.5 lumens min. @ highest setting (HI3) Tip Stroke @ 100%: 3.5 ± 0.5 mil
Resonant Frequency: 38.0 ± 1.9 KHz
VACUUM @ SEA LEVEL: @ 5-BAR: Pulse Rate Range: 0-15 pps
Vitrectomy: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-400 mmHg
Fragmentation: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-450 mmHg ANTERIOR VITRECTOMY:
Extrusion: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-450 mmHg Submodes: Wet and Dry
Extraction: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-450 mmHg Vitrector Probe: 100 to 800 cpm
Irrigation/Aspiration: 0 to 600 mmHg 0-450 mmHg
Phacoemulsification: 0 to 300 mmHg DOCTOR MEMORIES:
Prime: 450 mmHg Storage Capacity: 40 Doctors
Memory Cells per Dr: 11 (5 ant., 5 post., 1 common)
REFLUX:
Pulsed Micro Reflux: 20 - 50 microliters TIMER:
Continuous: Dependent on fluid bottle height Range: 0 to 99 hours
Resolution: 1 second
VITRECTOMY:
InnoVit® Probe: 100 to 1200 cpm TONE VOLUMES @ 1 Meter:
Accurus® Probe: 100 to 800 cpm Errors/Faults: 40 to 65 dB
Diathermy: 40 to 65 dB
FRAGMENTATION: Invalid Key: 40 to 65 dB
Submodes: Proportional, Fixed, Momentary Valid Key: Factory set and not adjustable
Tip Stroke @ 100%: 3.1 ± 0.4 mil All Others Tones: 0 to 65 dB
Resonant Frequency: 39.0 ± 1.9 KHz Volume Accuracy: 6 dB
Pulse Rate Range: 0-15 pps
REMOTE CONTROL:
Frequency: 40 KHz
Channels: 4

1-8 906-2020-501
 ®

25.0

DIATHERMY POWER OUTPUT (WATTS) 20.0

15.0

10.0

5.0

0.0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

SET POWER LEVEL

Figure 1-6. Diathermy Power Through 75 Ohm Load

25.0

20% Set Power

40% Set Power
20.0 60% Set Power
DIATHERMY POWER (WATTS)

80% Set Power

100% Set Power

15.0

10.0

5.0

0.0
10 100 1000
LOAD (LOG OHMS)

Figure 1-7. Diathermy Power vs. Load Impedance

906-2020-501 1-9
 ®

350

300

250
ASPIRATION VACUUM LEVEL (mmHg)

200

150

100

SAFE OPERATING AREA USING 0.9 mm TIP

50

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120

IRRIGATION PRESSURE (mmHg)

Figure 1-8. Safe Operating Area for Irrigation/Aspiration When Using Phaco Handpiece - When using
a 0.9 mm tip on the phaco handpiece it is advised to stay within the safe I/A operating area shown in
this graph.

PROPORTIONAL FRAGMENTATION FOOTSWITCH OPERATION PROPORTIONAL PHACO FOOTSWITCH OPERATION

Vacuum Max Limit Vacuum Max Limit

U/S Power Max Limit U/S Power Max Limit

m r m r
cuu we cuu we
Va Po Va Po
s ing U/
S
s ing U/
S
ea sin
g ea sin
g
cr cr
In ea In ea
cr cr
In In
Irrigation ON

Detent Full Depression

Footpedal Footpedal Detent 1 Detent 2 Full Depression
Released Released
Increasing Footpedal Depression Increasing Footpedal Depression

Figure 1-9. Footpedal Operation in Proportional Ultrasonic Modes - The footpedal controls different
system functions as it is depressed in proportional ultrasonic modes of operation.

1-10 906-2020-501
 ®

FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION
The front panel of the Accurus® is a multifunctional user
interface that allows user control of most system functions.
The descriptions of the front panel components are coded to
match the illustration in Figure 1-10.
1. Global Functions
The global functions area of the system is located at
the top-left portion of the front panel. Global
functions can be used any time and in any mode. Its
three major components are described below.
1A. Global Function Selection Keys
These five keys, located within the color LCD
display, are used to select the following functions
(from top to bottom):
1C. Global Function LED Displays
1B. Global Function Up/Down Adjustment Buttons
• Infusion/Irrigation pressure
• Fluid/Air Exchange pressure
• Diathermy power
• Two light sources for fiber optic illumination
1B. Global Function Up/Down Adjustment Buttons
The up/down adjustment buttons are located to the
left of the global function selection keys, and are
used to adjust their associated global function values.
These buttons can be pressed quickly to change
values one digit at a time, or pressed and held to
rapidly change the values.
1C. Global Function LED Displays
The five LED readouts, located to the left of the
adjustment buttons, display current global function
settings.

1. Global Functions 1A. Global Function Selection Keys

SURGICAL

2. Color LCD Display

and Touch Screen
3. Fluid Cassette

Aspiration Port

Irrigation In Port (phaco)

Irrigation Out Port (phaco)

Aspiration Port (vit) ®

4. Cassette Port LED's (2) 7. Illuminator Drawer

! Illuminator Receptacles
5. Eject Button
Illuminator Adaptors

8. Standby Switch
Drain Bag
!

9. Speaker

6. Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors

with Connector LED's

Figure 1-10. The Accurus® Front Panel - The front panel consists of five three-character, seven-segment LED displays;
five sets of membrane up/down arrow keys; a color LCD with touchscreen; a cassette eject button; two cassette
port LED's; twelve handpiece/probe connectors; an illuminator drawer with two illuminator ports; and a power On/
Off standby switch.

906-2020-501 1-11

2. Color LCD Display and Touch Screen
The color LCD display and touch screen is located in
the upper-right section of the front control panel.
This graphic user interface displays icons, keys, and
readouts appropriate to the mode of operation and
system status. The operator presses the icons and
keys on the screen to interact with the system.
3. Fluid Cassette with Aspiration and Irrigation
Ports
The single use cassette converts vacuum generated by
the console into aspiration, and collects the aspirated
fluid into its small, rigid, collection chamber. The
collection chamber is continuously drained into a
sealed drain bag, hanging from the front of the
cassette. The cassette's design allows it to be
removed from the console without spilling the
collected fluids.
Two ports, a male luer on the left and a female luer
on the right, are provided for aspiration in the
posterior modes, allowing connection of two
handpieces/probes at the same time. For
phacoemulsification an irrigation luer port is
provided as a third, center connector for irrigation
fluid input, with irrigation (left port) and aspiration
(right port) lines going to the phaco handpiece.
4. Cassette Port LEDs
One LED is located on each side of the cassette.
During surgery, and while priming, the LED's
illuminate to indicate which cassette port is active.
Innovit or Accurus probe
(pressure)
Innovit probe
(pressure)
Scissors
(pressure)
Viscous Fluid Control
(pressure or vacuum)
Pneumatic Connector
(for future enhancements)
VGFI/AVGFI or F/AX
(pressure)
!
PNEUMATIC
CONNECTORS
Figure 1-11. Front Panel Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors, with Connector LED's
1-12
®
5. Eject Button
Pressing the Eject button, located to the left of the
cassette, releases the latch that secures the cassette
within its receptacle, allowing removal of the
cassette. This button is active when the system is
supplied with air pressure, but is invalid when
vacuum is activated or system power is turned OFF.
6. Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors
The Accurus® contains two vertical columns of
connectors, with six connectors in each, for surgical
handpieces and probes. The left column is for
pneumatic probes, and the right column is for
electrical handpieces. Figure 1-11 identifies each
connector.
WARNING!
Connect only Alcon supplied consumables to
console/cassette connectors. Do not connect
consumables to patient intravenous
connections.
Connector LED's
There are twelve LED's located next to their
respective connectors on the front of the console.
These LED's have dual functions:
• During surgery setup, when the operator selects a
probe, handpiece or accessory, the corresponding
LED illuminates to guide the operator to the correct
connector.
• During surgery these LED's are used to indicate
which connectors are active.
U/S or Frag Handpiece
U/S or Frag Handpiece
Electrical Connector
(for future enhancements)
Electrical Connector
(for future enhancements)
Diathermy Handpiece
Diathermy Handpiece
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
906-2020-501
 ®

7. Illuminator Drawer 8. Standby Switch

The illuminator drawer contains bulbs, mirrors, and
lenses to direct high intensity light to fiber optic
illumination probes. Pushing the illuminator ejector
button on the rear panel ejects the drawer from its
slot (see Figure 1-12). When the illuminator drawer
is ejected, both illuminators turn off, allowing the
user to replace burnt bulbs. The bulbs only illuminate
when the drawer is fully inserted into its slot.
Illuminator Receptacles
Two illuminator receptacles accept Intralux
connectors.
This switch is used to turn internal DC power ON
and OFF, usually between surgeries. When the
Accurus® is out of service for long periods of time,
the power switch on the rear panel should be used
(see Figure 1-12).
9. Speaker
Tones and voice confirmation are emitted from the
speaker, hidden behind a front panel grill, to audibly
alert the operator to system operating status (see
Table 1-3).

Illuminator Adaptors
Two tethered ACMI adaptors are used to adapt Alcon
illumination probes to the illuminator receptacles.

Table 1-3. Tones and Their Descriptions

TONE DESCRIPTION

Diathermy Continuous tone when Diathermy voltage is ON.

Vacuum Continuous tone when Vacuum is ON.

U/S Continuous tone when U/S power is ON.

Fault, Error, Advisory Single tone when system fault, error, or advisory is first displayed.
The advisory tone is unique from the error/fault tone.

Alternate infusion/irrigation Single or double periodic tone, used when alternate irrigation/
pressure enable/disable; infusion pressure is enabled or disabled, and in the posterior domain
Alternate infusion alarm when the infusion pressure is greater than or equal to 50 mmHg.

Function enable/disable Double/single tone when U/S power or Vit cutting is enabled/
disabled at the footswitch (same as the valid key tone).

Valid key Single tone for a valid touchscreen key or membrane button press.

Invalid key Single tone for an invalid touchscreen key or membrane button
press, including attempts to go beyond parameter limits.

Timer expire Single tone when count down timer has expired.

906-2020-501 1-13
 ®

3. Illuminator Ejector Button

REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION Pressing this button ejects the Illuminator drawer
from the front of the console, allowing the user to
The rear panel of the Accurus® contains a variety of change burnt illuminator bulbs. Two bulbs are
components. The descriptions of the rear panel components provided, allowing a backup source should a bulb
are coded to match the illustration in Figure 1-12. burn out during surgery. Upon completion of surgery,
the burnt bulb should be replaced.
1. PC Card Slot
The Accurus® is a computerized machine that NOTE: It is recommended that two good bulbs
operates under software control. A software program are always installed.
is installed at the factory prior to shipment. If and
when software upgrades are required, the new 4. Power Supply with Main Power Switch, Power
program can be installed into the system by inserting Input Connector, Fuse Module, Equal Potentiality
a PC card into this slot and turning system power Lug, and Power Supply Exhaust Grate
ON. The Main Power Switch is used to turn power Off for
overnight storage of the Accurus®. The Power Input
2. Illuminator Exhaust Grate Connector accepts main power input from external
Warm air is expelled from the Accurus® console electrical power source. The Fuse Module contains
through this grate. An internal fan draws air past the the fuse drawer and fuses, as well as the voltage
illuminator components, keeping them cool for selector box (see Section Four of this manual for fuse
longer life. For proper cooling at least two feet of replacement and voltage selection). The Equal
clearance must be provided at the rear of the unit to Potentiality Lug is for Service personnel use, and
ensure unrestricted air flow. also for equipotential equipment connection. Warm
air is expelled from the Power Supply Exhaust Grate.

SERIAL IN/OUT ®
®

SURGICAL
ALCON LABORATORIES, INC. MODEL SERIAL NO. PART NO. REV MFR. DATE
FORT WORTH, TX 78134-2099, USA

! C
LA
100-120V 50/60 Hz 10A
SSIFIE
MEDICAL/ELECTRICAL CLASSIFIE
220V 50/60 Hz 6A
230V-240V 50 Hz 6A
D

EQUIPMENT
UL UL
202-1465-001 REV. __

CLASSIFIED
© ©
95KJ C 0123
UL2601-1/CAN CSA C22.2 NO. 601.1 !

OUTPUT DIATHERMY
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF USED IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE ANESTHETICS.
TYPE BF CAUTION: GROUNDING RELIABILITY CAN ONLY BE ACHIEVED WHEN EQUIPMENT IS
CONNECTED TO AN EQUIVALENT RECEPTACLE MARKED HOSPITAL GRADE.
POWER
(W) 25
CAUTION: RISK OF BURNS AND FIRE - DO NOT USE NEAR CONDUCTIVE MATERIALS.
RENEW ELECTRODE CABLES UPON EVIDENCE OF DETERIORATION.
IMPEDANCE
(‰) 75
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE COVER.
ALCON WARRANTIES VOID IF COVER IS REMOVED. SAFETY HAZARDS ARE
FREQUENCY EMINENT WITH COVER REMOVED. NO USER SERVICABLE COMPONENTS
(KHz) 340
INSIDE.

1. PC Card Slot WARNING: THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A PRESSURE VESSEL, P/N: 202-1339-001, WITH
THE FOLLOWING RATINGS: PS= 6.2 BAR, Tmax= 85¡C, Tmin= 10¡C, V=0.11 L.
MADE IN U.S.A.
PC CARD

2. Illuminator Exhaust Grate

3. Illuminator Ejector Button

100-120V T10A/250V
220/230-240V T5A/250V
4. Power Supply
! 5. Manual Cassette Ejector
Main Power Switch 90 - 120 Psi
(620 - 825 kPa)

Power Input Connector

6. Cool Air Input Grate
Fuse Module

Equal Potentiality Lug

7. Compressed Air Connector
Power Supply Exhaust Grate

8. Footswitch Connector

Figure 1-12. The Accurus® Rear Panel - The rear panel consists of a variety of components for functional use and
connection of accessories. Included are a PC slot, air input and exhaust grates, an illuminator ejector button, a
cassette ejector, a compressed air connector, a footswitch connector, and a power supply.

1-14 906-2020-501
 ®
5. Manual Cassette Ejector
Lifting this latch releases the fluid cassette when air
pressure is not available or in the event of power
outage.
6. Cool Air Input Grate
Cool, filtered air enters the Accurus® console
through this grate. The main system cooling fan is
located directly behind the input filter. For proper
cooling at least two feet of clearance must be
provided at the rear of the unit to ensure unrestricted
air flow.
7. Compressed Air Connector
An air pressure hose from a pressure source is
connected here via a Schraeder connector for input of
compressed air.
8. Footswitch Connector
For connecting the footswitch cable to the Accurus®.
FOOTSWITCH
Input of operator commands to the Accurus® console are
accepted from a footswitch. The footswitch consists of a
footpedal, right and left horizontal/vertical switches, and
a heel switch (see Figure 1-13). Functions controlled by
the footswitch are listed in Table 1-4 (posterior) and
Table 1-5 (anterior).
Generally, the footpedal is used to provide control of a
parameter, such as vacuum, with the footpedal's angle of
depression proportional to the parameter output. In some
Tension Adjustment Knob
Left Horizontal/Vertical Switch
Figure 1-13. Footswitch - The footswitch is used to input operator commands to the Accurus®.
906-2020-501
modes of operation the footpedal is used to provide on/
off control of a function, with any depression resulting in
a fixed output of its parameter.
Right and left switches are used to enable and disable
system functions. The switches are nudged sideways
(horizontal) for some functions, and pressed down
(vertical) for others.
• Footpedal and its Detents - A tension adjustment
knob, located on the front of the footswitch, is used
to regulate the pressure needed to depress the
footpedal. Additionally, the footpedal must be
pressed through detents to enter into new positions.
The detent force levels are programmable in the
Doctor Memory Summary screen.
• Reflux - While operating in modes that utilize
aspiration, the heel switch can be pressed down and
released to generate a micro reflux pulse. After
pressing/releasing 10 consecutive times in posterior
modes, or 20 times in anterior modes, vacuum must
be activated to allow reflux again. Reflux is available
only when the footpedal is released.
Momentary continuous reflux is available in anterior
modes. Pressing and holding the left horizontal switch
activates continous reflux for as long as the switch is
held, then turns off when released.
Footpedal
Right Horizontal/Vertical Switch
Heel Switch
1-15
 ®

Table 1-4. Footswitch Functions in Posterior Domain

Mode Submode Footpedal Left Right Left Right Heel

Depression Horizontal Horizontal Vertical Vertical Switch

Vit InnoVit Cutting & Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Proportional Cutting Cutting Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Vacuum Toggle

Accurus Cutting & Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Proportional Cutting Cutting Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Vacuum Toggle

Frag* Fixed Proportional Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum & U/S Power U/S Power Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Fixed U/S Power Toggle

Proportional Proportional Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum & U/S Power U/S Power Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Prop U/S Power Toggle

Momentary Proportional N/A Momentary Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum Enable Diathermy Infusion Reflux
U/S Power Toggle

Scissor Prop Proportional Select Select Momentary Alternate N/A

Scissor Proportional Multi-Cut Diathermy Infusion
Closure Subfunction Subfunction Toggle

Multi Multi Cut Select Select Momentary Alternate N/A

Proportional Multi-Cut Diathermy Infusion
Subfunction Subfunction Toggle

Calibration N/A Select Select Momentary Alternate N/A

Proportional Multi-cut Diathermy Infusion
Subfunction Subfunction Toggle

Extrude Low Proportional N/A Momentary Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum Diathermy Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Toggle

Medium Proportional N/A Momentary Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum Diathermy Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Toggle

High Proportional N/A Momentary Momentary Alternate Micro

Vacuum Diathermy Diathermy Infusion Reflux
Toggle

Inject Proportional N/A N/A Momentary Alternate N/A

VFC Pressure Diathermy Infusion
Toggle

Extract Proportional N/A N/A Momentary Alternate N/A

Vacuum Diathermy Infusion
Toggle

Surgery Setup, N/A N/A N/A Momentary Alternate N/A

Test, Clean Diathermy Infusion
Toggle

Memory N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

* Pulsed mode is available in all U/S functions

1-16 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 1-5. Footswitch Functions in Anterior Domain

Mode Submode Footpedal Depression Left Right Left Right Heel

1 2 3 Horizontal Horizontal Vertical Vertical Switch

U/S* Linear Irrigation Irrigation Irrigation Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate Micro
Continuous Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Linear Vac Max Vac Reflux Toggle Toggle

Linear U/S

Fixed Irrigation Irrigation Irrigation Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate Micro

Continuous Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Linear Vac Max Vac Reflux Toggle Toggle

Fixed U/S

I/A Maximum Irrigation Irrigation Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate Micro

Continuous Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Linear Vac Reflux Toggle Toggle

Minimum Irrigation Irrigation Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate Micro

Continuous Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Linear Vac Reflux Toggle Toggle

Vit Wet Irrigation Irrigation Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Cut On Cutting Cutting Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Linear Vac Toggle

Dry Cut On Disable Enable Momentary Alternate Micro

Linear Vac Cutting Cutting Diathermy Irrigation Reflux
Toggle

Surgery N/A N/A N/A Momentary Continuous Momentary Alternate N/A

Setup Continuous Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation
Reflux Toggle Toggle

Clean N/A N/A N/A N/A Continuous Momentary Alternate N/A

Irrigation Diathermy Irrigation
Toggle Toggle

Test N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Momentary N/A N/A

Diathermy

Memory N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

* Pulsed mode is available in all U/S functions

906-2020-501 1-17
 ®

NOTE: If necessary for identification, place labels on

REMOTE CONTROL
the remote controls and units to distinguish one from
the other.
A wireless remote control is provided for operator input
(see Figure 1-14). The buttons on the remote control are
NOTE: If battery voltage becomes too low for the
arranged to approximate the respective controls on the
remote to function properly, a pop up message will
console. All controls are backlit by heat actuation; i.e.,
appear on the console display. In that case, replace
illumination in low ambient light is activated when the
with new batteries by following instructions in Section
sensor detects heat from the hand.
Four of this manual.
The remote control is wireless and can be used in one of
two ways: it can be held by hand, or it can be set in the CAUTION
sterile tray and operated through a Remote Control Do not sterilize the remote control as it will damage
Aseptic Transfer Package, allowing the scrub nurse to the unit.
use it in the sterile field. The circulating nurse could also
operate the remote in a non-sterile manner.

The arrow buttons are used to adjust mode parameters,

except for the Messages arrow buttons. The Messages
®
arrow buttons are used to toggle between various user
responses that appear in popup messages.

The round buttons in the middle of the remote control are MESSAGES
MESSAGES VAC/PRESS
used exclusively to access primary surgical functions.
The round buttons at the bottom of the remote control are
used to access global functions and memory, and to
activate the selection.

The Activate button is used to actuate the selection of a POWER PULSE / CPM
global function and/or a highlighted selection on a popup
message. The Activate button has a raised area around it
to make it stand out from the other buttons; this helps
ensure that a selection is not accidentally pressed.

The remote control operates on one-of-four channels (A,

B, C, or D), and is similar for both the Accurus® and
Legacy®. This feature allows four remote controls to be
used on four systems operating in the same area. To AUX
ensure proper remote control operation when two or more
systems are used in the same area, set each to a separate
channel. (Instructions to set the remote control and
Accurus® to another channel are written in Section Four MEMORY

of this manual.)

The Accurus® and its remote control are factory preset to ADJUST

channel D. The Accurus® remote control is intended for

use only with the Accurus® System.
ACTIVATE ®

Figure 1-14. Wireless Remote Control - Most of the

functions of the wireless remote control are the same as those
on the console.

1-18 906-2020-501
 ®
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SCREENS
The operating screens described in this section are
displayed on the front panel color LCD display. The
colors and their intensities are designed for easy viewing
in both light and dark environments.
Power Up Screen
The power-up initialization cycle lasts approximately 60
seconds. After the first 10 seconds of this cycle, the
Power Up Screen is displayed while the system
completes initialization and self-test diagnostics (see
Figure 1-15). All operator inputs are locked out at this
time.
®®
Figure 1-15. Power Up Screen - After the first 10 seconds
of the Power-Up Initialization cycle the Power Up Screen is
displayed while the system completes initialization and self-test
diagnostics. No operator inputs are allowed at this time.
WARNING!
During initialization the drain pump is rotated to
its home position. Therefore, keep hands and
fingers clear of cassette well during power-on
initialization. After initialization, do not manually
turn hub roller. Finger pinch and/or improper
cassette installation can occur.
906-2020-501
If a fault is detected during self-test diagnostics, a System
Fault Screen is displayed and the system becomes non-
operational. Otherwise, one of the following happens
after power-up initialization is completed:
• If no startup preferences are programmed into
memory, the Procedure Selection Screen is displayed
(see Figure 1-16 and the explanation below),
allowing the user to select either the posterior or
anterior surgical domain.
• If preferences have been programmed into memory,
the system advances to the mode/screen selected by
the programmer.
Procedure Selection Screen
The Procedure Selection Screen is displayed after system
initialization or when the Exit key is pressed from either
the Posterior or Anterior Surgery Setup Screen, allowing
entry into either the posterior or anterior domain (see
Figure 1-16). When a new domain is entered, all settings
are reset to their defaults.
Procedure Selection
Anterior
Posterior
REL_X.XX
Figure 1-16. Procedure Selection Screen - The
Procedure Selection Screen is displayed after system initializa-
tion or when the Exit key is pressed from either the Posterior or
Anterior Surgery Setup Screen. Pressing the Anterior or
Posterior key on the touch screen quits this screen and brings
up either the posterior or anterior Surgery Setup Screen.
1-19
 ®

Display Windows and their Functions

The LCD display and touch screen is divided into seven
windows, shown below in Figure 1-17. Descriptions of
the windows and their functions are written on the
following pages.

1. Modes Window
2. Global Functions Window
3. Title Window
4. Doctor Memories Window
5. Miscellaneous Window
6. Primary Display Window
7. Popup window

5. Miscellaneous Window
4. Doctor Memories Window

3. Title Window

Franklin, John Mem 1 00:00:00 Options

mmHg 0
FRAGMENTATION: Fixed
6. Primary Display Window
2. Global Functions Window
Vacuum mmHg

mmHg 0 ! System Error 150

Actual Max Limit
Ultrasonic power and
Diathermy are not available.
Error code 201 Pulse Rate
% volt
OK 8 pps 7. Popup Window
Setting
1

Illum1 Fixed Prop Moment

2
1. Modes Window
Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Figure 1-17. LCD Display and Touch Screen - The color display screen for the Accurus® displays modes of operation
and operating parameters, and also is used for operator input by pressing the touch keys on the screen. This
screen is the operator's main tool to input system commands. Operator input is also received from the remote
control and the footswitch.

1-20 906-2020-501
 ®

1. Modes Window 2. Global Functions Window

This window displays touch keys and their Global functions are available in all setup and
corresponding icons. There are two kinds of keys surgery screens, regardless of system status or
displayed in this window: Accessory keys and Mode footpedal position (see Figure 1-20). Functions are
keys, depending on whether the screen is displaying turned ON and OFF via their icon keys, and their
its Setup Screen or its Surgery Screen. The Mode parameter values are adjusted by pressing the global
keys are animated when selected. Figures 1-18 and function up/down adjustment buttons. When turned
1-19 show the two screens. ON, some global functions can be affected from the
footswitch.

Global LED Readouts

Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
Global Up/Down Adjustment Buttons
mmHg 0
VitreoRetinal Surgery Setup

Select Handpieces for Prime / Test Accessories

Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

mmHg
Vac Vit Vac 0
Diathermy mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
Extrude InnoVit Scissors

% volt Vacuum mmHg

Frag Accurus VFC
mmHg
0 100
1 VGFI - F/AX Max Limit
Actual

Illum1
Cut Rate
% volt
900 cpm
2
1 Setting

Illum2 Test Clean Surgery Setup Exit

Illum1 InnoVit Accurus

Figure 1-18. Accessory Selections in Modes Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Window - This section of the display screen offers either

accessory selections or surgical mode selections in the modes
window. This illustration shows posterior accessory selections;
Figure 1-20. Global Functions Window - Global
the anterior accessory selections are similar.
functions are available at all times. In this illustration infusion
and both illuminators are turned on, indicated by the illuminated
icons and bright blue bases.

Global functions may be used in combination with

Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
other global functions. Selecting or deselecting one
mmHg 0
VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
function does not affect the others (except Infusion
Vacuum mmHg and Fluid/Air Exchange; selecting one deselects the
mmHg
0 100
other).
Actual Max Limit

Cut Rate
% volt

900 cpm Listed below are the distinctions between global

1 Setting
function icons when they are turned ON and OFF,
Illum1
InnoVit Accurus
and what the ON/OFF conditions mean. Descriptions
2
of the global functions follow.
Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

ICON TURNED ON ICON TURNED OFF

Figure 1-19. Surgical Mode Selections in Modes Icon is illuminated Icon is dimmed
Window - This illustration shows posterior surgical mode Base of icon bright blue Base of icon gray
selections in the modes window; the anterior mode selections Actuals are displayed Settings are displayed
are similar. The mode keys are animated when selected—in Up/Down keys adjust settings Up/Down keys adjust settings
this case the system is set in Vit mode for use with the InnoVit®
probe.

906-2020-501 1-21

• Infusion (posterior domain)
Infusion pressure is delivered through one of
two methods: gravity or air pressure.
mmHg Selection of infusion method is provided in
the Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen.
When Gravity infusion is selected in the Infusion
Settings Screen, the infusion icon dims, the LED
display blanks, and the Accurus® does not provide
infusion pressure; pressure is adjusted by raising or
lowering the fluid bottle.
When VGFI® (Vented Gas Forced Infusion) is
selected in the Infusion Settings Screen and activated
by pressing its global icon, the Accurus® delivers
filtered, pressurized air through a tubing set into the
infusion bottle, which in turn pressurizes fluid
through tubing to the eye (F/AX, if in use, is
deselected). The Up/Down arrow buttons are used to
adjust the fluid pressure, displayed in mmHg or
cmH2O. Pressing down on the footswitch's right
vertical switch toggles between regular and alternate
fluid pressure.
• Irrigation (anterior domain)
Irrigation pressure is delivered through one of two
methods: gravity or air pressure. Selection of
irrigation method is provided in the Cataract
Irrigation Settings Screen. In anterior surgeries the
fluid is delivered to the eye via a handpiece
connected by tubing to the cassette. Irrigation ON/
OFF control is maintained by the footpedal;
depressing the footpedal starts irrigation, and
releasing the pedal stops it. (Continuous irrigation is
also available, described below.)
When Gravity irrigation is selected in the Irrigation
Settings Screen, the irrigation LED's dim, and
pressure is adjusted by raising or lowering the fluid
bottle (the Accurus® does not provide irrigation
pressure).
When AVGFI (Anterior Vented Gas Forced
Irrigation) is selected in the Irrigation Settings
Screen and activated by pressing its global icon, the
Accurus® delivers filtered, pressurized air through a
tubing set into the infusion bottle, which in turn
pressurizes fluid through the cassette and handpiece
to the eye. The Up/Down arrow buttons are used to
1-22
®
adjust the fluid pressure, displayed in mmHg or
cmH2O. Pressing down on the footswitch's right
vertical switch toggles between regular and alternate
fluid pressure.
• Continuous Irrigation (anterior domain)
Continuous irrigation, independent of the footpedal,
is turned ON/OFF by pressing either the global
irrigation icon or pressing sideways on the
footswitch's right horizontal switch. Continuous
irrigation is available in both gravity and Anterior
VGFI®.
• Fluid Air Exchange (F/AX)
F/AX provides filtered room air for fluid/air
exchanges in the posterior domain only. The
mmHg air is supplied through tubing to the eye from
a front panel pneumatic connector.
When the F/AX function is selected, fluid infusion, if
in use, is deselected. The Up/Down arrow buttons are
used to adjust the pump pressure, displayed in mmHg
or cmH2O.
• Diathermy
The Diathermy global function provides
fixed diathermy capability through the use of
% volt diathermy probes and handpieces. Diathermy
output is available at all times, and is based
on the percent of voltage output.
When the diathermy function is selected a popup
window is displayed to remind the operator to use the
footswitch to control this function. This popup
window can be removed by pressing the screen's
Continue key or activating the diathermy function.
The diathermy function can be activated in all modes
by pressing the footswitch's left vertical switch.
Additionally, it can be activated in Extrude mode by
pressing the right horizontal switch. In Frag, VFC,
and Scissors modes the footpedal must be released
before you can activate diathermy; in Extrude mode
the footpedal is inconsequential.
Diathermy power is adjusted with the up/down arrow
buttons on the front panel, with the percentage of
diathermy voltage output displayed.
906-2020-501
 ®

• Illuminators (Illum1 & llum2) 3. Title Window

1 2 Two halogen bulbs in the front This window displays the current setup, surgery
panel illuminator drawer functions, and subfunctions.
Illum1 Illum2 provide light to two illuminator
receptacles. Fiber optic light Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

pipes can be plugged into the receptacles. mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit 0

Illuminators can be used individually or concurrently

Vacuum
because each illuminator has its own on/off and mmHg
0
mmHg

100
intensity controls. Light intensity for each illuminator Actual Max Limit

is shown in its LED display, and each is adjustable % volt

Cut Rate

900 cpm
using the Up/Down arrow buttons. 1 Setting

Illum1
InnoVit Accurus

In the event of a burnt bulb, the illuminator icon Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

is replaced by the Bulb Burned Out icon, and an

advisory popup window appears on the screen.
The user should then remove and plug the light Figure 1-21. Title Window - This window shows current
mode of operation.
pipe into the other illuminator receptacle, press OK,
and proceed.
4. Doctor Memories Window
This window is used to display the current selected
NOTE: Upon completion of the procedure it is
doctor name, memory number, and the doctor
recommended that the burnt bulb be replaced.
memory drop down arrow keys.
Two illuminator sources should always be
available. (See Section Five of this manual for
instructions to replace bulb.) Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

0
mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit

Vacuum mmHg
mmHg
0 100
Actual Max Limit

Cut Rate
% volt
900 cpm
1 Setting

Illum1
InnoVit Accurus

Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Figure 1-22. Doctor Memories Window - This window

shows current memory selections, including doctor and his
selected memory number.

906-2020-501 1-23
 ®

5. Miscellaneous Window 6. Primary Display Window

The Timer Display key, Footswitch icon, and The Primary Display window is used to select setup
Options key are all located in this window. These options in the Setup Screens, and to adjust operating
three features are described below. parameters in the Surgery Screens. The operating
parameters in the Vitrectomy Surgery Screen are
Franklin, John Mem 2 00:00:00 Options
shown below.
0
mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit

Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

Vacuum mmHg
0
mmHg
0 100
mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
Actual Max Limit

Vacuum mmHg
% volt
Cut Rate

900 cpm
mmHg
0 100
Actual Max Limit
1 Setting

Cut Rate
Illum1 % volt
InnoVit Accurus
900 cpm
2 1 Setting

Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit Illum1

InnoVit Accurus

Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Figure 1-23. Miscellaneous Window - This window
contains three items: the Timer Display key, Footswitch icon,
and Options key.
Figure 1-24. Primary Display Window - This window is
used to set up and adjust operating parameters, and to view
• Timer Display Key
actuals.
The Timer Display key appears on the upper right
hand corner of the Surgery Screens and Setup 7. Popup Window
Screens whenever the timer is active (see Timer This window is used to indicate system errors,
under the Options Key, below). Pressing the Timer advisories, and other messages to the user. When a
Display key stops the timer and removes it from the popup window appears, only the keys inside the
screen. popup window and the Global Function keys not
related to the popup window are available. For a list
• Footswitch Icon of system messages turn to Section Five of this
When the footswitch is activated this icon changes manual.
color and, for footpedal activation, changes number
in its center to represent the amount of footpedal
Franklin, John
depression. When the footpedal is released, the icon Mem 2 Options

0
VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
displays 0. Upon depression the footpedal icon mmHg

progressively displays 1, 2, and 3. Steps 1 to 2, and 2 Vacuum mmHg

to 3 are accompanied by a slight detent resistance as mmHg

0 100
Actual ! System Advisory Max Limit

the pedal is depressed. Cassette type does not Cut Rate

% volt match surgical mode. Please
insert the correct cassette. 900 cpm
OK
• Options Key 1 Setting

Illum1
Pressing the Options key brings up a menu of InnoVit Accurus

selections, offering the user a variety of helpful tools. 2

The selections are Quick Save, Memory, Volume, Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Timer, and Metrics.

Figure 1-25. Popup Window - Information popups indicate
system messages, typically to confirm a critical operator
request or to provide status. The popup window disappears
when the action is completed, or when the operator presses a
popup key to acknowledge the message.

1-24 906-2020-501
 ®

LED illuminates next to its associated front panel

POSTERIOR SETUP AND SURGERY SCREENS
connector. Selecting a probe or handpiece with a
common connector deselects the other.
Upon pressing the Posterior domain key on the
Procedure Selection Screen, the system enters the
When entering a Surgery Screen from the Surgery Setup
VitreoRetinal Surgery Setup Screen, shown below in
Screen, the mode of the currently tested handpiece is
Figure 1-26.
selected automatically. If more than one probe or
handpiece was tested, priority is given to the Vit mode.
Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

0
Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup
mmHg
• Accessories
Select Handpieces for Prime / Test Accessories
Either Diathermy, Scissors, VFC, or F/AX is selected by
mmHg
Vac Vit Vac Diathermy pressing its corresponding touch key. Selecting one
Extrude InnoVit Scissors
accessory automatically deselects any other accessory.
% volt Frag Accurus VFC
When an accessory is selected, an LED illuminates next
1 VGFI - F/AX
to its associated front panel connector. Only the last
Illum1
selected handpiece or accessory LED illuminates.
2

Illum2 Test Clean Surgery Setup Exit

• Test
When the Test key is pressed, the selected
Figure 1-26. VItreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen - probes and handpieces are primed
Entering the VitreoRetinal Surgery Setup Screen allows the sequentially, and a popup window
user to prepare the Accurus® system for surgery. Six compo- indicates that priming and testing are
nents are offered: two components—the handpiece and Test
accessory selections—are in the Primary Display Window; and active. The selected handpieces are tested
four components—Test, Clean, Surgery, and Setup—are in the sequentially with the popup window
Modes Window. indicating when prime, test, or tune is currently active.
Only the popup window keys (Stop and Skip), global
On this screen the user can prepare the Accurus® system function Illuminator keys, and diathermy are operable
for surgery, then exit to another screen by pressing one of while the Test function is active.
the following keys on the touch screen:
If the Stop key is pressed during priming, the test
• Press Setup to enter Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings function is aborted. If Skip is pressed during priming,
Screen priming is skipped and handpiece testing/tuning begins.
• Press Surgery to enter Posterior Surgery Screens
• Press Exit to return to Procedure Selection Screen An invalid error tone sounds when pressing the Test key
(600DS only) with no probe or handpiece selected. An advisory popup
window appears when the Frag handpiece is selected but
The VitreoRetinal Surgery Setup Screen can also be not connected, when no cassette is inserted, or when
entered by pressing the Exit key from the Vitreoretinal priming/tuning has failed.
Infusion Settings Screen or a Posterior Surgery Screen.
• Clean
Popup windows can appear over these screens to advise Pressing the Clean key transfers fluid from
the user of certain conditions. the cassette into the drain bag. When Clean
is pressed, a popup window indicates
Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen cleaning is in progress. Only the Stop key
There are six Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen Clean in the popup window, and global function
components offered to prepare for surgery. Two Illuminator keys, are operable while the
components - the handpiece and accessory selections - are clean function is active. Pressing the Stop key during
in the Primary Display Window; and four components - cleaning aborts the function.
Test, Clean, Surgery, and Setup - are in the Modes Window.
If fluid is not fully transferred to the drain bag, press the
• Select Handpiece for Prime / Test Clean key a second time. (There will always be some
Probes and handpieces are selected for priming or testing/ residual fluid left in the cassette due to surface tension.)
tuning by pressing their corresponding touch keys (see
Figure 1-26). When a probe or handpiece is selected, an

906-2020-501 1-25
 ®

• Surgery • Alternate Infusion Pressure

When the Surgery key is pressed, the
system exits the Surgery Setup Screen and
enters the selected Surgery Screen. If
Surgery prime/tune is not finished, a popup
reminder appears.
•Setup
When the Setup key is pressed, the system
exits the Surgery Setup Screen and enters
the VitreoRetinal Infusion Settings Screen.
Setup
Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen
The Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen (see Figure
1-27) is entered by pressing the Setup key on the
Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup Screen. Pressing the Exit key
closes this screen and returns to the Vitreoretinal Surgery
Setup Screen.
Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings
The Alternate Infusion Pressure is adjusted using the
touch arrow keys displayed next to the readout. Alternate
Infusion Pressure is applicable only when using VGFI®
infusion; therefore, the arrow keys and the VGFI® key
are greyed out and unavailable if Gravity infusion is
selected. The regular and alternate pressures are toggled
by pressing the footswitch's right vertical switch.
When the alternate infusion pressure is active and the
infusion pressure is adjusted, the new setting will be
saved as the new alternate infusion pressure.
Posterior Surgery Screens
The Accurus® offers five surgery modes in the posterior
domain—depicted as icons in the Modes Window at the
bottom of the touch screen—and each surgery mode has
submodes (see Table 1-6). The active mode and submode
keys are highlighted, and their names are displayed in the
Title Window.
Table 1-6. Posterior Domain Surgery Modes

mmHg
MODE SUBMODE 1 SUBMODE 2 SUBMODE 3
Infusion Type Alternate Infusion Pressure

VGFI
60 mmHg
mmHg
Gravity Vit InnoVit® Accurus® --

% volt Frag Fixed Prop Moment

1

Illum1 Scissor Prop Multi Calib

2

Illum2 Exit Extrude Low Medium High

VFC Inject Extract --

Figure 1-27. Vitreoretinal Infusion Settings Screen -
On this screen the user can select the type of infusion desired.
The alternate infusion pressure is available, and can be
adjusted, only if VGFI is selected.
• Infusion Type
The infusion method selected from this screen determines
how infusion pressure is provided for surgery.
When VGFI® (Vented Gas Forced Infusion) is selected,
infusion pressure is provided by applying air pressure
into the fluid bottle. An internal air pump creates
pressurized air, and the VGFI® tubing set delivers it to
the bottle from a front panel connector. The air pressure
setting is adjusted with the Infusion up/down buttons on
the front panel, and the corresponding LED readout is
immediately to the left of the buttons.
To enter a surgery mode, press its associated icon key on
the touch screen. The previous surgery mode or submode
is deactivated when a new mode or submode is selected,
and front panel LED's illuminate to indicate which
connectors are active. To enter a surgery submode, press
the key above its associated mode key. Pressing a mode
key successively causes the system to cycle through the
available submodes, although the Scissor Calib submode
is not included in the cycle.
NOTE: The footpedal must be released, and none of
the footswitches depressed, to enter or change a
surgery mode.

When Gravity infusion is selected, infusion pressure is

dependent on the fluid bottle height.

1-26 906-2020-501
 ®

When a surgery mode is first entered after power up, the
system enters its factory default settings, or if a doctor
memory has been selected, the doctor's programmed
values are used. If the defaults are then adjusted, re-entry
to that mode will display the new values. Turning system
power OFF resets all values back to the factory default
settings, as does exiting the anterior or posterior domain.
• Vit Mode
The Vitrectomy mode provides vitreous
cutting and vacuum using a pneumatically
powered cutting probe connected by tubing
Vit to a pulsed air pressure source and a
vacuum port.
Franklin, John
switch, and enabled by pressing the right horizontal
switch. (Pressing the Cut Rate key also turns cutting ON/
OFF.)
Accurus® - The Accurus® submode provides vacuum and
cutting to the Accurus® probe. This submode has the
same basic characteristics as the InnoVit® submode with
the exception of the cutting rate range.
• Frag Mode
The Fragmentation mode provides
ultrasonic fragmentation and vacuum using
Alcon's Fragmatome® handpiece. The
Frag handpiece is connected to the Accurus®
console with an electric cable and vacuum
tubing.
Mem 2 Options

0
mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
Franklin, John Mem 5 Options

0
Vacuum mmHg mmHg FRAGMENTATION: Fixed
mmHg
0 100
Actual Max Limit
Vacuum mmHg

% volt
Cut Rate
mmHg
0 150
900 cpm Actual Max Limit

1 Setting
U/S Power Pulse Rate
% volt
Illum1 InnoVit Accurus 60 % 8 pps
1 Setting Setting
2
Illum1 Fixed Prop Moment
Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Figure 1-28. Vit Mode Screen - This screen shows the

InnoVit® submode with VGFI® infusion and Illuminator 1 turned
ON. The Accurus® submode only differs in that the Title Window
says VITREOUS PROBE: Accurus, and the Accurus key is
highlighted instead of the InnoVit key.
The Vit mode is entered when the Vit key is pressed.
Two submodes are available, each with its own default
cut rate and vacuum level. Values are adjusted using
touch arrow keys, even when the footpedal is depressed.
Vacuum is proportional to the footswitch treadle position.
Cutting can be enabled/disabled using the footswitch
Right/Left horizontal switches, and can be changed
regardless of footpedal position. When cutting is
disabled, the Cut Rate Setting is grayed. Micro reflux is
available via the heel switch.
Submode selection represents probe selection:
InnoVit® - The InnoVit® submode provides cutting and
vacuum to the InnoVit® probe. Cutting is started, and
proportional vacuum is begun, when the footpedal is
pressed. As the footpedal is depressed the vacuum
increases, with the actual vacuum displayed in the Actual
box and its linear equivalent reflected in the bar. Cutting
is disabled by pressing the footswitch's left horizontal
Figure 1-29. Fixed Fragmentation Screen - This screen
shows the Fixed Fragmentation default settings. The Momen-
tary Fragmentation screen looks the same as this, but the Title
Window reads FRAGMENTATION: Momentary. The Propor-
tional Fragmentation screen looks like this, but the Title Window
reads FRAGMENTATION: Proportional, and an Actual box is
located to the left of the U/S Power box.
Three submodes are available, each with its own default
U/S power and maximum vacuum limits. Values are
adjustable using touch arrow keys, regardless of
footpedal position. U/S power is enabled and disabled by
pressing the right/left horizontal footswitches (except in
momentary mode), or by pressing the U/S Power touch
key. Micro reflux is available via the heelswitch.
U/S Pulse controls are available in all three submodes,
and can be turned ON by pressing the Pulse Rate touch
key. The pulse rate can be adjusted using the touch arrow
keys, even with the footpedal depressed.
Fixed - When the Fixed Fragmentation submode is
enabled, depressing the footpedal activates the preset U/S
power and provides vacuum proportional to footpedal
depression, up to the maximum limit.

906-2020-501 1-27
 ®

Proportional - Depressing the footpedal in Proportional
Fragmentation submode increases vacuum up to its
maximum limit, which is reached at half of full footpedal
depression. From this detent point maximum vacuum is
maintained while proportional U/S power begins and
increases up to the U/S power maximum limit, reached at
full footpedal depression.
keys must be pressed to activate pressure to the
handpiece. If one pressure is adjusted to equal the other,
the pressures will automatically be adjusted so the closed
pressure is greater than the open pressure. Pressing the
Default key sets the pressures back to the factory
defaults.
Franklin, John Mem 3 Options

Momentary - The Momentary Fragmentation submode mmHg SCISSORS: Proportional 0

allows momentary activation of U/S power while Pressure psi

building vacuum. Depressing the footpedal provides mmHg

0.0 20.0
Actual
vacuum proportional to pedal position, up to the Max Limit

maximum limit. Fixed U/S power is provided when the % volt

footpedal is depressed and the right horizontal switch is 1

enabled. Illum1 Prop Multi Calib

• Scissors Mode Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

The Scissors mode provides cutting

capability using pneumatically powered
scissors controlled by the footswitch. A
Scissor single use microscissors tip is screwed
onto an Alcon IOS handpiece, which is
connected via tubing to an Accurus® front panel
connector.
Figure 1-30. Proportional Scissors Screen - Pressing
down on the footpedal in this mode provides proportional
control of the opening and closing of the scissor blades.
Pressing the Scissors key cycles back and forth between
Proportional and Multiple cut submodes.
Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

0
mmHg SCISSORS: Multiple Cut

Three submodes are available: Proportional (Prop is Cut Rate

default), Multiple Cut (Multi), and Calibration (Calib). mmHg

250
Pressing the Scissors key, or the footswitch's left and Setting

right horizontal switches, cycles back and forth between % volt

Proportional and Multiple cut submodes. To enter the 1

Calibration submode the Calib key must be pressed, Illum1 Prop Multi Calib

allowing the user to calibrate the pneumatic pressure for 2

the open and closed positions. Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Proportional - The Proportional submode (see Figure
1-30) provides proportional control of the opening and
closing of the scissor blades, dependent upon the amount
of footpedal depression. The amount of scissors closure
is indicated in the Pressure window. When the footpedal
Figure 1-31. Multiple Cut Scissors Screen -
Depressing the footpedal in multiple cut mode activates the
scissors at the preset Cut Rate. The Cut Rate Setting can be
adjusted while the footpedal is depressed.
Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

is fully depressed, the Max Limit is reached, and scissors 0

mmHg SCISSORS: Calibration
should be fully closed. Max Limit pressure is adjustable
with the up/down arrow keys. mmHg
Open Pressure

6.0 psi

Multiple Cut - In the Multiple Cut submode (see Figure % volt

Close Pressure

11.0 psi
1-31) depression of the footpedal activates the scissors at 1
Default

the preset Cut Rate. The cut rate is adjustable by pressing Illum1 Prop Multi Calib
the up/down arrow keys next to the Cut Rate Setting,
2
even when the footpedal is depressed. Single cuts are Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

possible by adjusting the cut rate to its minimum value.

Calibration - The Scissors Calibration submode (see
Figure 1-32) allows the user to adjust the scissors open
and closed air pressures with the up/down arrow keys,
whether or not scissors are enabled (footpedal is not
required for calibration). The Open or Close Pressure
1-28
Figure 1-32. Scissors Calibration Screen - To enter
the calibration submode the Calib key must be pressed. This
screen shows the open and closed pressures for scissors
activation; pressing the arrow keys adjusts the pressures.
Pressing the Default key sets the pressures back to the factory
defaults.
906-2020-501
 ®

• Extrude Mode • VFC Mode

This mode provides vacuum from a front
panel connector through tubing to an
extrusion handpiece. Three submode
Extrude vacuum levels are available: Low,
Medium, and High; with Medium as the
default setting.
Depressing the footpedal activates vacuum proportional
to pedal position. The preset maximum vacuum level,
adjustable using the arrow keys, is reached at full treadle
depression, and pressing the heel switch activates pulsed
reflux. The preset maximum vacuum level can be
adjusted with the footpedal in any position.
NOTE: Whenever a vacuum surge is detected, or the
cassette is being drained, or the system runs a VAC
check, the operator must remove his foot from the
footswitch treadle for vacuum to be re-activated.
Franklin, John
The VFC mode provides pressure at the
front panel VFC connector for viscous
fluid injection (i.e., silicone oil), or
VFC vacuum for fluid extraction, through
tubing to a syringe. Pressure and vacuum
levels are adjustable via the arrow keys next to the Max
Limit display box.
CAUTION
Always use Alcon-supplied Viscous Fluid Injector
Paks and follow all Directions for Use. Do not aspirate
fluids directly into the console; this will cause damage
to the console, increase risk of electrical shock, and
void all warranties.
Inject - In this submode the injection pressure is provided
proportional to the footpedal position. The Max Limit
pressure level is reached at full pedal depression.
Mem 4 Options

0
mmHg EXTRUSION: Medium
WARNINGS!
mmHg
0
Vacuum mmHg

150
• Double check the cannula connected to the
Actual Max Limit syringe for a tight connection. It must not be
% volt
allowed to come loose.
1
• Adjust the Max Limit air pressure in accordance
Illum1 Medium
Low High
with the viscosity of fluids to be injected.
2
Excessively high settings may endanger the
Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit
patient.

Figure 1-33. Extrusion Screen - Three extrusion

submodes are offered: Low, Medium, and High. Full depression Extract - In this submode the vacuum for fluid extraction
of the footpedal is required to reach the preset maximum is provided proportional to the footpedal position. The
vacuum.
Max Limit vacuum is reached at full pedal depression.

Franklin, John Mem 4 Options

0
mmHg EXTRUSION: Medium

Vacuum mmHg
mmHg
0 150
Actual Max Limit

% volt

Illum1 Low Medium High

Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Figure 1-34. VFC Injection Screen - The VFC injection

mode shown on this screen indicates the system is prepared to
deliver a maximum of 50 psi to the injection syringe with the
footpedal in the full down position. The screen for the extraction
mode looks similar to this, but the Pressure and psi labels are
Vacuum and mmHg, and the Max Limit is different.

906-2020-501 1-29

ANTERIOR SETUP AND SURGERY SCREENS
Upon pressing the Anterior domain key on the Procedure
Selection Screen, the system enters the Cataract Surgery
Setup Screen, shown below in Figure 1-35. On this
screen the user can prepare the Accurus® system for
surgery, then exit to another screen by pressing one of the
following keys on the touch screen:
• Press Setup to enter Cataract Irrigation Settings
Screen
• Press Surgery to enter Anterior Surgery Screens
• Press Exit to return to Procedure Selection Screen
The Cataract Surgery Setup Screen can also be entered
by pressing the Exit key from the Cataract Irrigation
Settings Screen or an Anterior Surgery Screen.
Franklin, John Mem 1
mmHg Cataract Surgery Setup
Select Handpieces for Prime / Test
Phaco
I/A
% volt Ant Vit
1
Illum1
2
Illum2 Test Clean Surgery Setup
Figure 1-35. Cataract Surgery Setup Screen- Entering
the Cataract Surgery Setup Screen allows the user to prepare
the Accurus® system for surgery. Six components are offered:
two components—the handpiece and accessory selections—
are in the Primary Display Window; and four components—
Test, Clean, Surgery, and Setup—are in the Modes Window.
Cataract Surgery Setup Screen
There are six Cataract Surgery Setup Screen components
offered to prepare for surgery. Two components—the
handpiece and accessory selections—are in the Primary
Display Window; and four components—Test, Clean,
Surgery, and Setup—are in the Modes Window.
• Select Handpiece for Prime / Test
Probes and handpieces are selected for priming or testing/
tuning by pressing their corresponding touch keys (see
Figure 1-35). When a probe or handpiece is selected, an
LED illuminates next to its associated front panel
connector. Selecting a probe or handpiece with a
common connector deselects the other.
1-30
®
When entering a Surgery Screen from the Surgery Setup
Screen, the mode of the currently tested handpiece is
selected automatically. If more than one probe or
handpiece was tested, priority is given to the U/S mode.
• Accessories
Either Diathermy or Anterior VGFI® is selected by
pressing its corresponding touch key. Selecting one
accessory automatically deselects the other accessory.
When an accessory is selected, an LED illuminates next
to its associated front panel connector. Only the last
selected LED illuminates.
• Test
When the Test key is pressed, the selected
probe or handpiece is primed, and a popup
window indicates that priming and testing
Test are active. Only the popup window keys
(Stop and Skip), global function
Illuminator keys, and diathermy are operable while the
Options
Test function is active.
0
Accessories
If the Stop key is pressed during priming, the test
Diathermy function is aborted. If Skip is pressed during priming,
AVGFI
priming is skipped and handpiece testing/tuning begins.
An invalid error tone sounds when pressing the Test key
with no probe or handpiece selected. An advisory popup
window appears when the U/S handpiece is selected but
Exit
not connected, when no cassette is inserted, or when
priming/tuning has failed.
• Clean
Pressing the Clean key transfers fluid from
the cassette into the drain bag. When the
Clean key is pressed, a popup window
Clean indicates cleaning is in progress. Only the
Stop key in the popup window, and global
function Illuminator keys, are operable while the clean
function is active.
Pressing the Stop key during cleaning aborts the clean
function. If fluid is not fully transferred to the drain bag,
press the Clean key a second time.
• Surgery
When the Surgery key is pressed, the
system exits the Surgery Setup Screen and
enters the selected Surgery Screen.
Surgery
906-2020-501
 ®

•Setup irrigation is selected. The regular and alternate pressures

When the Setup key is pressed, the system
exits the Surgery Setup Screen and enters
the Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen
Setup (see Figure 1-36).
Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen
The Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen (see Figure 1-36)
is entered by pressing the Setup key on the Cataract
Surgery Setup Screen. Pressing the Exit key closes this
screen and returns to the Cataract Surgery Setup Screen.
Cataract Irrigation Settings
mmHg
Irrigation Type Alternate Irrigation Pressure
are toggled by pressing the footswitch's right vertical
switch.
When the alternate irrigation pressure is active and the
irrigation pressure is adjusted, the new setting will be
saved as the new alternate irrigation pressure.
Anterior Surgery Screens
The Accurus® offers three surgery modes in the anterior
domain—depicted as icons in the Modes Window at the
bottom of the touch screen—and each surgery mode has
submodes (see Table 1-7). The active mode and submode
keys are highlighted, and their names are displayed in the
Title Window.

AVGFI
80 mmHg
To enter a surgery mode, press its associated icon key on
Gravity
the touch screen. The previous surgery mode or submode
is deactivated when a new mode or submode is selected,
% volt
and front panel LED's illuminate to indicate which
1 connectors are active. To enter a surgery submode, press
Illum1
the key above its associated mode key. Pressing a mode
2 key successively causes the system to cycle through the
Illum2 Exit available submodes.

NOTE: The footpedal must be released, and none of

Figure 1-36. Cataract Irrigation Settings Screen - On
this screen the user can select the type of irrigation desired.
the footswitches depressed, to enter or change a
The alternate irrigation pressure is available, and can be surgery mode.
adjusted, only if AVGFI is selected.
When a surgery mode is first entered after power up, the
• Irrigation Type system enters its factory default settings, or if a doctor
The irrigation method selected from this screen memory has been selected, the doctor's programmed
determines how irrigation pressure is provided for values are used. If the defaults are then adjusted, re-entry
surgery. to that mode will display the new values. Turning system
power OFF resets all values back to the factory default
When AVGFI (Anterior Vented Gas Forced Irrigation) is settings, as does exiting the anterior or posterior domain.
selected, irrigation pressure is provided by applying air
pressure into the fluid bottle. An internal air pump creates Table 1-7. Anterior Domain Surgery Modes
pressurized air, and the Anterior VGFI® tubing set
delivers it to the bottle from a front panel connector. The MODE SUBMODE 1 SUBMODE 2
air pressure setting is adjusted with the Irrigation up/
down buttons on the front panel, and the corresponding U/S Linear Fixed
LED readout is immediately to the left of the buttons.
I/A Max Min
When Gravity irrigation is selected, irrigation pressure is
dependent on the fluid bottle height. Vit Wet Dry

• Alternate Irrigation Pressure

The Alternate Irrigation Pressure is adjusted using the
touch arrow keys displayed next to the readout. Alternate
Irrigation Pressure is applicable only when using
Anterior VGFI® irrigation; therefore, the arrow keys and
the AVGFI key are greyed out and unavailable if Gravity

906-2020-501 1-31
 ®

• U/S Mode • I/A Mode

The U/S function provides vacuum and The I/A mode of operation provides
U/S power to the phaco handpiece. irrigation and vacuum for aspiration to the
Irrigation and aspiration lines must be I/A handpiece. The I/A function consists
U/S plugged into the phaco handpiece, and its I/A of two vacuum submodes: Maximum
electric cable plugged into the illuminated (Max, the factory default) and Minimum
front panel connector. (Min). Each submode has its own default vacuum level,
adjustable using touch arrow keys, even when the
The U/S mode is entered when the U/S key is pressed, footpedal is depressed.
and consists of two submodes: Linear and Fixed, with
Linear being the default. Each submode has its own Irrigation is provided when the footpedal is depressed,
default power level, vacuum level, pulse ON/OFF status, and linear vacuum is provided from detent one to full
and pulse rate. The default values are adjustable using footpedal depression, with the preset maximum at full
touch arrow keys, even when the footpedal is depressed. depression.
Pulse on/off control is available in all U/S submodes by
pressing the Pulse Rate touch key. Brown, Tim Mem 3 Options

0
mmHg I/A: Maximum
Linear - In U/S Linear submode, irrigation is provided
when the footpedal is depressed. Linear vacuum, up to Vacuum mmHg

0 400
the preset maximum, is provided from detent one to Actual Max Limit

detent two, and sustained from detent two to full % volt

footpedal depression. Linear U/S power is provided from 1

detent two to full footpedal depression, with the preset Illum1 Min Max

U/S Power Max Limit reached at full depression. 2

Illum2 U/S I/A Vit Exit

Fixed - In U/S Fixed submode, irrigation is provided

when the footpedal is depressed. Linear vacuum, up to
the preset maximum, is provided from detent one to Figure 1-38. I/A Max Mode Screen - Shown here is the I/
detent two, and sustained from detent two to full A Max mode display screen. This mode provides irrigation and
vacuum to the I/A handpiece.
footpedal depression. The preset U/S Power Setting is
reached immediately upon entry into footpedal detent
two, and is sustained to full depression.

Brown, Tim Mem 2 Options

0
mmHg ULTRASOUND: Linear

Vacuum mmHg

0 75
Actual Max Limit

U/S Power Pulse Rate

% volt

0 70 % 10 pps
1 Actual Max Limit Setting

Illum1 Fixed Linear

Illum2 U/S I/A Vit Exit

Figure 1-37. U/S Linear Mode Screen - Shown here is

the U/S Linear mode display screen with a display box labeled
Actual next to the U/S Power Max Limit box. The other
submode, U/S Fixed, does not contain a U/S power Actual box;
it is not needed because the U/S power setting turns on or off at
the preset maximum setting when the footpedal enters detent
two.

1-32 906-2020-501
 ®

• Vit Mode
OPTIONS SCREENS AND FUNCTIONS
The Anterior Vitrectomy function provides
vacuum and cutting capabilities using a
Option functions are available in all screens with the
pneumatically powered vitreous probe
Vit exception of the Doctor Summary screens, the Cataract
connected to a pulsed pressure source. Wet
Irrigation Settings screen, and the Vitreoretinal Infusion
Vit is the default mode, and is entered
Settings screen. A drop down menu is displayed when the
when the Vit key is first pressed. The preset vacuum and
Options key is pressed (see Figure 1-40). The Options
cut rate values are adjustable using touch arrow keys,
screens available are Quick Save, Memory, Volume,
even when the footpedal is depressed.
Timer, and Metrics; and can be accessed by pressing the
associated key.
Cutting can be enabled/disabled using the footswitch Options
Key
right/left horizontal switches, respectively, or by pressing
the Cut Rate Setting touch key. The footpedal does not Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

Quick Save
have to be released to change the enabled/disabled mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
Memory
Drop
cutting status. Vacuum mmHg
Volume Down
Menu
Timer
mmHg
0 100 Metrics
Actual Max Limit

Wet - Pressing the footpedal into detent 1 initiates Cut Rate

% volt
bimanual or coaxial irrigation. Linear vacuum and 900 cpm
1 Setting
cutting, when enabled, is provided from detent two to full Illum1 InnoVit Accurus

footpedal depression, reaching the preset maximum

2

vacuum at full depression. Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Dry - When cutting is enabled, pressing the footpedal

into detent 1 initiates cutting and linear vacuum, reaching
the preset maximum vacuum at full depression. In this
mode irrigation flow is inhibited.
Figure 1-40. Options Drop Down Menu - Pressing the
Options touch key, located in the upper right corner of the
screen, activates a drop down menu offering five options
choices. Pressing one of the choices activates a screen or
window for the choice selected.

Brown, Tim Mem 4 Options

0
Quick Save
mmHg ANTERIOR VITRECTOMY: Wet
The Quick Save key allows the active system settings to
Vacuum mmHg be saved into a doctor memory. When the Quick Save
0 150
key is pressed a small selection window appears on the
Actual Max Limit

Cut Rate
screen (see Figure1-41). The doctor name and memory
% volt
250 cpm number to be written to can then be selected by pressing
1 Setting
the arrow keys next to the appropriate boxes.
Illum1 Wet Dry

2 Quick Save
Selection Window
Illum2 U/S I/A Vit Exit

Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

0
VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit
Figure 1-39. Vit Mode Screen - Shown here is the Wet mmHg

QUICK SAVE
anterior vitrectomy mode display screen. Anterior vitrectomy
V Franklin, John Mem 5
has two submodes, Wet and Dry, which are selected above the mmHg
0 Save Cancel
Vit key. Actual mit

Cut Rate
% volt
600 cpm
1 Setting

Illum1 InnoVit Accurus

Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Figure 1-41. Quick Save Popup Window - Pressing the

Quick Save key activates a small popup window. Doctor and
memory number to be written to are chosen on this window
before saving.

906-2020-501 1-33
 ®

When Save is pressed another window may appear The user can copy settings from one summary screen
asking for a Personal Identification Number (PIN, see (Retrieve From) and save them to another (Save To).
Memory and Summary Screens on next page) before the When changes are made to a summary screen, a popup
settings are written into the selected doctor memory (see appears when the Exit key is pressed, allowing the user to
Figure 1-42). If there is no PIN, a popup appears asking apply the settings to the active screen.
for confirmation of the new memory settings before they
are saved. Common Selection with
Drop Down Menu

RETRIEVE FROM
PIN Window Doctor Presets Common
Posterior Franklin, John
IRRIGATION/INFUSION UNIT
Anterior SAVE TO
mmHg
Common Brown, Tim Save
Franklin, John Mem 2 Options
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
8 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
0
mmHg VITREOUS P Enter Doctor's PIN.
SOUND VOLUMES CASSETTE TO PEL
0 cm
Off
V Master Override Voice REMOTE CHANNEL
mmHg
0 1 2 3 D
DOCTOR
New
Actual mit STARTUP DOMAIN
4 5 6 Infusion Alarm Vacuum Edit
Select

7 8 9 Delete
% volt SOURCE PRESSURE
Diathermy U/S
pm Select PIN
Cancel 0 Enter
1
Error Auxiliary
Illum1 InnoVit Accurus
Override

Current Defaults Exit

Invalid Key
2

Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

Figure 1-43. Common Summary Screen - One Irriga-

tion/Infusion unit, one Display Brightness, and one set of Sound
Figure 1-42. PIN Popup Window - If the doctor memory -
Volumes is saved per doctor name. One Cassette to PEL,
settings are PIN protected, pressing the Save key in the Quick
Remote Channel, Startup Domain, and Source Pressure
Save window will activate this PIN number popup. Inputting the
selection is saved per system. Pressing the Common key at the
PIN code (shown as asterisks for privacy) and pressing the
top of this screen activates a drop down menu which allows the
Enter key saves the settings.
user to select Posterior or Anterior summary screens.

Memory and Summary Screens

• Anterior, Posterior, and Common Summary Screens
The Memory option allows the doctor to program, store,
When the Memory key is pressed from the Options
and retrieve surgical parameter settings into and out of
menu, a summary screen appears that corresponds to the
Summary Screens. Pressing the Memory key on the
current doctor, memory number, and domain (Anterior or
Options drop down menu activates a Summary Screen, of
Posterior). Pressing the summary drop down key at the
which there are three types: Common, Posterior, and
top of the screen allows switching to another summary
Anterior (see Figures 1-43, 1-44, and 1-45). Summary
screen: Anterior, Posterior, or Common.
screens are provided for up to 40 doctor names, each with
five storage locations for Anterior surgery settings, five
On the Common summary screen one Irrigation/Infusion
for Posterior surgery settings, and one for Common
unit, one Display Brightness, and one set of Sound
surgery settings.
Volumes is saved per doctor name. One Cassette to PEL,
Remote Channel, Startup Domain, and Source Pressure
The name of the currently active doctor name and
selection is saved per system.
memory number are displayed at the top of surgery
screens. Listings of other doctor names and memories
The selected parameter value on a summary screen is
can be viewed by pressing the drop down arrow keys at
adjustable by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys on the
the top of the screen. A name and memory number can
right side of the screen. Any value changed from what is
then be selected by pressing name/memory on the drop
currently stored in memory is displayed in blue.
down menus.
Pressing the Default key resets all values back to factory
A PIN (Personal Identification Number) is a four digit
default settings. Pressing the Current key updates
numeric code used to safeguard individual summary
summary screen values with current system settings.
screens. If a PIN is programmed during new doctor setup,
When Exit is pressed a popup appears asking if the new
it will be required when saving, editing, or deleting a
settings should be applied to the system.
doctor's memory settings. The operator is allowed to
modify, remove, and add a PIN, but the current PIN is
required to do it.

1-34 906-2020-501
 ®

Doctor memory summary screens allow the user to do the Anterior Selection

following: Doctor Presets Anterior RETRIEVE FROM

Franklin, John Mem1
U/S VACUUM U/S POWER
Fixed 75 mmHg 70 % SAVE TO

• Retrieve and Save Doctor Memory. Linear

10 pps

75 mmHg
Pulse Off

70 %
Brown, Tim Mem2 Save

IRRIGATION
• Create New Doctor Name. 10 pps Pulse Off
Type AVGFI

AVGFI 50 mmHg
• Edit Doctor Name. I/A

Minimum
VACUUM

30 mmHg Alternate 80 mmHg

DOCTOR
• Delete Doctor Name. Maximum 400 mmHg
DIATHERMY 44 %
New
Ant. Vit VACUUM CUT RATE
• Manage PIN Password Protection. Wet 150 mmHg 250 cpm
Illum 1

Illum 2
80 %

80 %
Edit

Dry 150 mmHg 250 cpm Delete

Posterior Selection TREADLE
VACUUM RISE TIME
PIN
Detent Normal
Default
Firmness Medium
Posterior RETRIEVE FROM
Doctor Presets
Franklin, John Mem1
VIT VACUUM CUT RATE
InnoVit 100 mmHg 900 cpm SAVE TO Current Defaults Exit
Brown, Tim Mem2 Save
Accurus 150 mmHg 600 cpm

FRAG VACUUM U/S POWER SCISSORS 250 cpm

Fixed 150 mmHg 50 % Open Press

Close Press
6.0 psi
20.0 psi
Figure 1-45. Anterior Summary Screen - Pressing the
8 pps Pulse Off

Proportional 80 mmHg 50 % INFUSION VGFI

RETRIEVE FROM selection, located at the top right corner of
DOCTOR
8 pps Pulse Off VGFI 22 mmHg New this screen, activates a drop down menu offering summary
Momentary 150 mmHg 50 % Alternate 60 mmHg

8 pps Pulse Off F/AX 35 mmHg

Edit screens with memory settings that can be retrieved. Pressing
EXTRUSION DIATHERMY 44 %
Delete
the SAVE TO selection activates another menu to save the
PIN
LOW
50 mmHg
MEDIUM
150 mmHg
HIGH
250 mmHg Illum 1 80 % settings under other names and memory numbers.
Illum 2 80 %
VFC INJECTION EXTRACTION
50 psi 500 mmHg
Current Defaults Exit • Edit Doctor Name
An existing doctor name can be changed by pressing the
Figure 1-44. Posterior Summary Screen - Summary Edit key on a summary screen (a PIN may be required).
screens are provided for up to 40 doctor names, each with five When the Edit key is pressed, the currently selected
storage locations for Posterior surgery settings, and five for doctor name is displayed on a keyboard, from which it
Anterior surgery settings.
can be changed and saved.
• Retrieve and Save Doctor Memory
• Delete Doctor Name
Doctor names and memories are displayed when pressing
A doctor name can be removed from the doctor list. If the
their corresponding drop down keys at the top of a
doctor name does not have PIN protection, a
summary screen. A doctor memory is retrieved when
confirmation popup is displayed before the doctor name
another doctor name or memory cell is selected in the
is deleted. If the doctor name is PIN protected, a popup
RETRIEVE FROM box. The retrieved memory
appears asking the user the enter the PIN before deleting
parameters are displayed in the summary screen, and are
the name.
saved by selecting a doctor and memory number in the
SAVE TO box, then pressing Save.
• Manage PIN Password Protection
When the PIN key on a summary screen is pressed, a
If the doctor memory is protected by a PIN, a popup asks
System Information popup with the following selections
for the PIN before the save operation is completed. If the
is displayed: Add, Remove, Modify, and Cancel.
doctor memory is not protected by a PIN, a confirmation
popup appears to confirm the save operation.
- The Add feature is used to add PIN protection to
an unprotected doctor name.
• Create New Doctor Name
- The Remove feature allows the user to delete
A new doctor name can be created by pressing the New
PIN protection from a doctor name.
key on a summary screen (duplicate doctor names are not
- Modify allows the user to change the existing
permitted). A keyboard appears allowing the user to type
PIN.
a new doctor name. A popup appears when the Enter key
- Cancel stops the procedure and returns to the
is pressed to allow the option to protect the settings with
summary screen.
a four digit numeric PIN. If the operator chooses to
protect the new doctor memory, a keypad appears,
allowing the user to type a PIN. The user is asked to enter
the PIN twice when it is first created.

NOTE: Doctor names are alphabetized in the doctors

list, so it is advisable to place the doctor's last name
first.

906-2020-501 1-35
 ®

When any of these keys is pressed, with the exception of

Franklin, John Options
Cancel, a keypad appears for entering a four digit PIN Mem 2

SOUND VOLUMES 0
mmHg Vitreoretina
(see Figure 1-46). The PIN must be entered twice when Off

Master Override Voice

Select Ha Accessories
the user wants to Modify or create a New PIN. A valid
mmHg

PIN must be entered to Remove a PIN. Vac Infusion Alarm Vacuum Diathermy

Extrude Scissors
Diathermy U/S
PIN Window % volt Frag VFC

Error Auxiliary VGFI - F/AX

1
Posterior RETRIEVE FROM Done
Doctor Presets
Franklin, John Mem1 Illum1
Invalid Key
VIT VACUUM CUT RATE
InnoVit 100 mmHg
Enter PIN for deletion. Mem2 Save 2
Accurus 150 mmHg

Illum2 Test Clean Surgery Setup Exit

FRAG VACUUM 250 cpm

Fixed 150 mmHg 6.0 psi

1 2 3
8 pps 20.0 psi

Proportional 80 mmHg

8 pps
4 5 6
VGFI DOCTOR Figure 1-47. Sound Volumes Popup Window -
22 mmHg New
Momentary 150 mmHg
7 8 9
60 mmHg
Edit
Selecting Volume from the Options menu allows the operator to
8 pps Cancel 0 Enter 35 mmHg
Delete
adjust tone and voice volume levels.
EXTRUSION 44 %
LOW MEDIUM Override PIN
50 mmHg 150 mmHg Illum 1 80 %
250 mmHg

VFC INJECTION EXTRACTION

Illum 2
50 psi 500 mmHg
Current
Figure 1-46. PIN Popup Window - Selecting the Remove
option from the PIN popup (not shown) brings up this keypad
for entering a four digit PIN. The Add and Modify options have a
keypad like this, but they contain a different instruction in the
top box.
The Override key on the PIN popup window is available
to allow the user to bypass the PIN. When the Override
key is pressed a popup appears prompting the user to
insert the Alcon PC card, then press the Continue key to
override the PIN.
Volume
When Volume is pressed on the drop down Options
80 % Timer
Defaults Exit
Pressing the Timer key on the Options drop down menu
allows the operator to use a general purpose timer. When
the timer is active a timer display key appears in the
upper right hand corner of the Surgery and Surgery Setup
screens.
When the Timer key is pressed, a timer keypad appears
(see Figure 1-48). If the Start key is pressed after a value
is entered (hh:mm:ss format), the keypad disappears and
the timer begins counting down from the programmed
time. An audible tone is emitted when the count down
timer reaches zero. Pressing the Start key without
entering a timer value removes the keypad and the timer
begins counting up.
Timer Window
Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

menu, a window appears allowing adjustment of the tone mmHg VITREOUS P Please enter timer value. 0

and voice volumes (see Figure 1-47). Audible volumes V

00:00:00

are also adjustable in in the memory's Common summary mmHg

0 1 2 3

Actual mit
4 5 6
screen. Volume feedback is provided for the tone being
% volt 7 8 9
adjusted. Clear 0 Start
pm
1

Cancel
Illum1 InnoVit Accurus
Voice confirmation is provided when switching between
2
surgical modes, submodes, and when a doctor memory is Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

selected from the drop down memory popup.

The Infusion Alarm, Diathermy, Error, and Invalid Key Figure 1-48. Timer Keypad Popup Window - This
keypad is used to start timer functions. The timer can be set to
tones cannot be lowered below a minimum value. All
count up by pressing Start with 00:00:00 in the display, or to
other adjustable tones can be turned completely off. count down by inputting a timer value and pressing Start.

A Master Override volume control is provided for Pressing the Cancel key removes the popup from the
changing all the tone and voice volumes at once. If the screen without any timer activity. Pressing the Clear key
master override volume level is set below the minimum resets the keypad value to zero. If a new count down or
for a specific tone, that tone remains at its minimum count up timer is started when another is active, the new
value. When master override is disabled its settings are timer value replaces the active one.The timer is stopped
lost; the individual volume levels are restored and by pressing the timer display key at the top of a Surgery
adjusted individually. or Surgery Setup screen.

1-36 906-2020-501
 ®

Metrics
Pressing the Metrics key on the Options drop down menu SYSTEM STATUS SCREENS AND POPUPS
presents a variety of automatic measurements in one
popup window (see Figures 1-49 and 1-50). The Accurus There are four categories of system status conditions.
automatically measures surgical functions, and keeps the Each status condition is described on the display screen,
accumulated values until one of three things happens: and a dedicated color is assigned to each. The colors are
The Reset key on the Metrics window is pressed, the shown below in ranking of severity:
current surgical domain is exited, or system power is
SYSTEM STATUS COLOR
turned OFF. Additionally, in the anterior domain U/S
FAULTS RED
Time and U/S Avg. reset to zero when the U/S handpiece
ERRORS YELLOW
is tuned. Posterior
ADVISORIES GREEN
Metrics Window
SYSTEM INFORMATION BLUE
Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

mmHg VITREOUS P Metrics

0 A system Fault condition is displayed across the whole
0:00:00
InnoVit Time
0 cpm
InnoVit Avg.
screen. Error, Advisory, and System Information
mmHg
0
V 0:00:00
Accurus Time
0 cpm
Accurus Avg.
conditions are displayed in popup windows.
Actual 0:00:00 0% mit
Frag Time Frag Avg.

% volt
0:00:00 0:00:00
VFC Inject Time VFC Extract Time
Faults
pm
1
0:00:00
Scissors Time
0:00:00
Elev. Inf. Time
System faults are the most severe system status
Illum1 InnoVit Accurus
Reset Done conditions. The Accurus® must be shut down completely
2
when a system fault is detected, then turned ON.
Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

NOTE: For troubleshooting purposes, record all

Figure 1-49. Posterior Metrics Popup Window -
information displayed on the fault screen before
Measurements of surgical functions are accumulated automati- recycling power. For a listing of fault conditions, see
cally by the Accurus®, and are available for display in this the Troubleshooting section of this manual.
Metrics popup. Anterior
Metrics Window Each fault is assigned a priority; i.e., if more than one
fault exists, the fault with the highest priority is displayed
Brown, Tim Mem 2 Options

0
first. When a fault is detected the system is put into a safe
mmHg ULTRASOUND Metrics
0:00:00 0% state, and power must be recycled to reset the system.
U/S Time U/S Avg.
Vac

0 0:00:00
Ant. Vit Time
0 cpm
Ant. Vit Avg.
Actual
Reset Done

% volt

0 70 % 10 pps
1 Actual Max Limit Setting

Illum1 Fixed Linear

SYSTEM
2 FAULT
Illum2 U/S I/A Vit Exit

Please Note System Fault 401

Figure 1-50. Anterior Metrics Popup Window - The Call Field Service
anterior Metrics popup contains different measurements from
the posterior window.

Figure 1-51. System Fault Screen - System faults require

that system power be recycled. To help troubleshooting, record
information displayed on the fault screen before recycling
power.

906-2020-501 1-37
 ®

Errors, Advisories, and System Information • Advisories

A popup window appears over the current display screen
to indicate system Error, Advisory, or System
Information messages. The popup remains on the screen
until the operator presses OK to acknowledge the
condition, or until the condition no longer exists.
NOTE: For listings of popup messages, see the
Troubleshooting section of this manual.
When a popup window is active, only the popup window
keys, the illuminator global function keys, and the
cassette Eject button are available. In the anterior
domain, Irrigation ON/OFF is also available.
• Errors
When an Error is detected an error tone is heard and,
simultaneously, an Error popup window is displayed (see
Figure 1-52). The popup window remains displayed until
the operator acknowledges the Error condition (the Error
status remains until the system power is turned OFF/ON).
Advisories relay a message to the user, who can usually
correct the condition by following the instructions printed
in the Advisory popup window (see Figure 1-53).
When the Accurus® detects an Advisory, an Advisory
tone is sounded and its popup window is displayed.
Functions related to the Advisory are not available. The
popup is removed when the condition is corrected or
when the user presses the OK key.
• System Information
When a condition corresponding to System Information
is displayed, an associated message is printed in the
popup window (see Figure 1-54). System Information
messages usually confirm a critical operator request or
provide system status. The popup window is removed
when the requested action is completed, or when the
operator presses a touch key to acknowledge the
message.
Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

Global functions and mode functions related to the Error mmHg VITREOUS PROBE: InnoVit 0

are put in a safe state; keys and icons are faded to

Vacuum mmHg
indicate unavailability. If the Error does not affect the mmHg
0 100
! System Advisory

current active functions, they will remain active. Actual

Cassette is not ready.

Max Limit

Please check cassette for

Cut Rate
% volt
proper installation.
900 cpm
OK
1 Setting

Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

Illum1
InnoVit Accurus
0
mmHg Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup
2

Select Handpieces for Prime / Test Accessories Illum2 Vit Frag Scissor Extrude VFC Exit

mmHg
Vac
! System Error Diathermy

Extrude Ultrasonic power and Scissors

% volt Frag
Diathermy are not available.
Error code 201 VFC
Figure 1-53. System Advisory Popup Messages -
OK System Advisories can usually be corrected by following the
1 VGFI - F/AX
instructions printed in this popup window.
Illum1

Illum2 Test Clean Surgery Setup Exit

Franklin, John Mem 2 Options

0
mmHg Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup

Select Handpieces for Prime / Test Accessories

Figure 1-52. System Error Popup Message - System
mmHg
Errors require user intervention to address popup messages. Vac
i System Information Diathermy

Affected system functions remain unavailable until the popup Extrude Prime was not successfully Scissors
performed. Press Test
message is resolved. % volt Frag to prime. VFC

Continue Test
1 VGFI - F/AX

Illum1

Illum2 Test Clean Surgery Setup Exit

Figure 1-54. System Information Popup Messages -

The popup window with System Information messages usually
confirms a critical operator request or provides system status.

1-38 906-2020-501
 ®

Intraocular Scissors (IOS) Handpiece

HANDPIECES AND PROBES
The Intraocular Scissors Handpiece is used for cutting
vitreous and tissue. Pneumatic power to drive the scissors
Different handpieces and probes are required for each
is provided through tubing which is attached to the
operating mode of the Accurus®. Following is a
barbed shaft. Scissors tips come in a single use
representative selection of handpieces and probes with a
configuration, and are screwed into the IOS handpiece.
general description of each.
The scissors adjustment is used to increase or decrease
the opening of the scissors blades. Additionally, it can be
Vitrectomy Probes
used to manually close the scissors in the event of air
The InnoVit® probe is a high-speed, cross-action (or
pressure and/or electrical power failure.
radial) guillotine vitreous cutter with an ergonomically
designed probe handle. The Accurus® probe is an axial Scissors Tip IOS Handpiece
oscillating guillotine vitreous cutter. Both probes are are
designed for a single use and must be properly disposed
of when the surgery is completed.

Figure 1-58 Intraocular Scissors (IOS) Handpiece

Diathermy/Coagulation Handpieces
®
Figure 1-55. InnoVit Probe Single use Bipolar Coagulation Brushes are available in a
wide variety of configurations: straight, curved, 20-
gauge, 23-gauge, tapered, and widestroke. All single use
bipolar accessories are available with and without cables.
® Also available are reusable and single-use bipolar cables.

Bipolar Coagulation Forceps are lightweight and

Figure 1-56. Accurus® Probe
Accurus® Fragmatome® Handpiece
The Accurus® Fragmatome® handpiece is configured to
provide simultaneous vacuum and fragmentation, or
vacuum only, depending upon the console setup. The
ergonomically designed to reduce hand fatigue, as well as
to provide precise control and safety. They are available
in high-conductive non-stick alloy, titanium, or single-
use configurations. They are also available with a wide
variety of tip styles.
®

handpiece has a stainless steel shell for improved

reliability and durability. Other than attaching and
removing the needle and aspiration line, no assembly or Figure 1-59. Single Use Bipolar Coagulation Brush
disassembly is required.

ALCON

Figure 1-57. Accurus® Fragmatome® Handpiece

Figure 1-60. 4 Inch Nadler Coadaptation Forceps

906-2020-501 1-39
 ®

Accurus® Phaco (U/S) Handpiece

PAKS
The ultrasonic (U/S) handpiece integrates irrigation,
aspiration, and emulsification into one tool. These three
Paks are sterilized single use packages of consumables.
functions of the U/S mode enable the surgeon to
simultaneously irrigate the anterior chamber, emulsify
• Total Plus® Vitrectomy Pak - contains essential
the cataractous lens, and aspirate the lens material from
components for vitrectomy (see Figure 1-63):
the eye. The handpiece is used in conjunction with
tubing, an infusion sleeve, an ultrasonic decoupling
• Viscous Fluid Injection Pak - used in conjunction
sleeve (UDS), and ultrasonic tip.
with the VFC function of the Accurus®. It eases the
task of injecting viscous fluids into the eye. It
CAUTION contains:
Following autoclaving, ensure handpiece is at room - syringe
temperature. Never immerse handpiece in water or - cannula
other fluid to cool it as it will cause serious damage to - pneumatic tubing and ancillary components
the handpiece. Allow it to air cool.
• Pneumatic Scissors Tubing Pak - used to connect
IRRIGATION SLEEVE BUBBLE SUPPRESSION INSERT the pneumatic scissors to the console. It contains:
- a tube
®
- a connector

• Frag Accessory Pak - contains the Frag needle

and other components necessary for lensectomy.
Figure 1-61. Accurus® Phaco Handpiece

Irrigation/Aspiration Handpiece
The Irrigation/Aspiration (I/A) handpiece, connected to
the Accurus with I/A tubing, is used to remove cortical
material via aspiration while maintaining chamber
pressure with irrigation.

IRRIGATION SLEEVE
A

Figure 1-62. Irrigation/Aspiration Handpiece

1-40 906-2020-501
 ®

Instrument Directions
Drape V-Lance For Use

Stopcock

Cassette
with Drain
Bag

Accurus®
Probe with
Vacuum and
Actuation
Lines

20cc Utility Fiber Infusion Infusion Canula, Scleral Plugs,

Syringe Vacuum Optic Line with Cassette Plugs, Handpiece
Line Illuminator Spike Adapters
Probe

Figure 1-63. Total Plus® Vitrectomy Pak

906-2020-501 1-41
 ®

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-42 906-2020-501
 ®

SECTION TWO
THEORY OF OPERATION
INTRODUCTION The Air/Fluid, Front Panel, LPA/Illuminator, and U/S-
Figure 2-1 illustrates the Accurus® system in block Diathermy modules contain their own microcontrollers
diagram form. Each block is covered in detail on the and software that acquire real-time data critical to
page indicated within the block. system operation (see Controller PCB Kernel on page
2-11). Each of these modules is a slave to the Host
The Host Module is the system master and is controlled Module.
by real-time, event driven, preemptive, and finite state
system software. Intermodule connections are made
through the Power/Signal Distribution PCB which is
mounted to the top of this module.

Pneumatic
Power
(90-120 psi) Line Input
(110/115/230 VAC)
Power
Cassette Port ID Supply
and Backlight (see page 2-2)
Cassette Vacuum Air/Fluid
Cassette Pinch/Hammer Module
kernal power

P.S. status

P.S. control
LPA pump power (115VAC)
(see page 2-13) System Lamp 1
Cassette Latch/Unload +12V illuminator power (+17V)
LPA/Illum
Cassette Pump Fan P.S. control Module Lamp 2
VFI (pressure/vacuum) (see page 2-24)
Scissors Drive kernal power kernal power
(proportional/pulsed) Low Pressure Air
kernal signal kernal signal
Vit-1,2 (GFX, VGFI)
Auto Stopcock
Drive (future)

LCD signal Host

Graphics Module
LCD power
LCD keyboard
(see page 2-4)
(diagnostics) U/S-diathermy power (+85V)
Diathermy

X,Y-Position kernal power kernal power U/S-Diath U/S-1 Drive

(touch screen) kernal signal kernal signal Module (frag/phaco)
Up/Down Arrows
remote serial (future) (see page 2-31) U/S-2 Drive
(pushbutton) (frag/phaco)

Eject (pushbutton) Sound

Front Panel
Module
(see page 2-37) Stand-By
IV Pole (future)
(Power Switch)
Footswitch (misc.) PCMCIA Interface (future)
"000" - "999" globals (5x)
RS-232/422 (future)
Cassette, Handpiece,
IR Remote and Misc. Indication
(future) (eject, asp, pneu, elec)

Figure 2-1
System Block Diagram

906-2020-501 2-1

POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
The Accurus® Power Supply consists of the AC Entry
Module, a DC Power Supply, and the LPAS/Standby
Power PCB.
The primary purpose of the LPAS/Standby Power PCB is
to provide 115 VAC power output (J4) to the Low
Pressure Air Source (LPAS). The LPAS pump AC line is
protected by AC output fuse (F1).
The LPAS/Standby Power PCB provides 12 VDC
standby power via the AC/DC Converter to re-activate
the DC Power Supply when it is in shutdown mode. It
also provides all interconnections between the DC Power
Supply and Accurus power cable assemblies. All DC
Power Supply voltage outputs become inputs to the
LPAS/Standby Power PCB via terminal lugs soldered
into the PCB. These power supply lines are routed to
output connectors J1, J2, and J3. The DC/DC converter
mounted on the PCB is used to convert the 24 VDC
output from the DC Power Supply to 12 VDC. This
voltage is delivered to the system via J1.
Supply Voltages
115 VAC Nominal: This input voltage is supplied from
the toroidal transformer which is part of the AC Entry
Module Assembly.
AC/DC Converter
The 115 VAC input to the LPAS/Standby Power PCB
connects directly to an Astrodyne MSMA-5002 power
supply which is used to provide a 12 VDC “keep alive”
power source when the DC Power Supply is shut down.
This output does not provide the 12 VDC to the Accurus
solenoids and relays. The 115 VAC also goes directly to
J4 through a 0.5A fuse to supply AC power for the low
pressure air source pump.
The PS_SHDN line (J2-11) comes from the Accurus
Standby switch on the front panel. When the Standby
switch is open, this line is high which turns on Ql and
keeps the PINHIBIT line to the DC Power Supply low.
When the Standby switch is closed, the PINHIBIT output
line goes high and the DC Power Supply is inhibited.
2-2
®
24 VDC to 12 VDC Supply
A 100 watt, 24 VDC to 12 VDC converter (PS2) is used
to generate 12 VDC at 5.5 amps for the Accurus LCD
backlighting and relays. The noise specification for this
output is 120 mV peak-to-peak maximum at 25 MHz
bandwidth. The 24 VDC enters at E9 and E10.
85 VDC Supply
The 85 VDC for the system is created on the LPAS/
Standby Power PCB by electrically adding in series the
57 VDC and the 28 VDC supplies from the DC Power
Supply. Diodes are placed across the 57 VDC and 28
VDC supplies to prevent start-up problems. Extra filter
capacitors (C8 and C9) are placed across the 85 VDC to
help provide the additional 12 amp spike current required
when activating diathermy and tuning of the ultrasonic
handpiece.
Power Fail
The PWRFAIL signal is an input from the DC Power
Supply which is pulled up to 5 VDC and routed to the
system via J2-24. This line will go low if the DC Power
Supply detects an AC line failure.
Five Volts Good
The 5VGOOD signal is an input from the DC Power
Supply at J8-3 that is routed to the system via output
connector J2-12. It remains high as long as the 5 volts is
good.
Five Volts Enable
The 5VENABLE signal is from the DC Power Supply 5
VDC output and fed back to the DC Power Supply to
keep the 5 VDC permanently enabled.
Other DC Voltages
The 5 V, +15 V, -15V, and 24V are inputs at E13, E2,
E3, and E9 respectively. They are routed directly to
output connector J2.
906-2020-501
 ®

POWER SUPPLY

LPAS/Standby
Power PCB

Toroid
AC Entry F1
Module Line
Voltage LPA Pump Power (115VAC)
Select

Main
Power AC/DC
Line Switch Converter
Filter
Line Input 12V
(110/115/230 VAC) PINHIBIT
Misc. Logic, P.S. Control (shutdown)
PWRFAIL Buffers, etc. P.S.Status (line, 5V out)

5V
+5V
±15V
DC Power +24V Kernal
Supply Power

(auto-ranging) DC/DC +12V

Converter
Illuminator Power (+17V)
+28V +
-28V + U/S-Diathermy
+57V Power (+85V)
-57V -

Figure 2-2
Power Supply Block Diagram

906-2020-501 2-3
 ®

HOST COMPUTER

HOST COMPUTER

The Host Computer Module consists of the Host • Software (CPU BIOS and Video driver BIOS)
Computer and the serial Expansion PCB (future). The • Card Cage and ISA Backplane
Host Computer is a PC compatible computer system. It is • CPU PCB
the system command and monitoring center for the • LCD Controller PCB
Accurus Console. • PC Card Controller PCB
• Serial I/O PCB
The Host Computer is based on PC/AT architecture and • Special I/O PCB
supports a 16 bit EXM bus. The Host Computer has the • Sound PCB
following individual PCBs and cables: • Power/Signal Distribution PCB

Air/Fluid U/S Diathermy LPA/Illuminator Front Panel

Module #1 Module #2 Module #3 Module #4

Kernel Power

Kernel Signal

Kernel Power
Kernel Power

Kernel Power

Kernel Signal
Kernel Signal

Kernel Signal

Kernel Power Footswitch

Stand-by (power switch) (misc)
Power/Signal Distribution PCB
P.S. Status IV Pole
P.S. Control POST Code (future)
(00-FF)
PCMCIA Power

Kernel Power
System
P.S. Control
Footswitch
P.S. Status

+12V
SVREQ1:4

MODRX1:4

(+5V, +12V, ±15V, +24V)

MODTX1:4
Stand-by
XRST1:4
PDLUP
IVPole

Fan
Serial
Expansion RS-232/422
PCB (future) (future)

PC Card
PCMCIA
Drive Special I/O PCB Serial I/O
PCB
Keyboard
(diagnostics)
EXM Bus CPU PCB
Remote Serial
(future)

Disk/IDE Sound PCB LCD

Controller (tones, Controller LCD Signal
Mounted outside
PCB phrases) PCB
of Host Module

Figure 2-3
Host System Block Diagram

2-4 906-2020-501
 ®
HOST COMPUTER
POWER/SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION PCB
Power/Signal Distribution PCB (PSDB) is attached to the
top of the Host Computer and provides power and control
signals to modules in the Accurus® Console. The PSDB
accepts DC power from the system power supply and
distributes it to all modules through individual cables.
Signal distribution is accomplished by combining the
specific serial communication lines with the system’s
status/control lines and distributing these signals to the
modules
The PSDB provides the following power and signal
interfaces:
The system power supply output is connected to the
PSDB which distributes power to the Host Computer, the
individual modules, the footswitch, the power IV pole,
and the system fan.
RS422 serial communication signals (from the Host
Computer’s Serial I/O PCBs) and reset & service request
signals (from the Special I/O PCB) are combined with
the footswitch PEDALUP signal and distributed to the
modules and to the Serial Expansion PCB.
Footswitch interface signals are provided to/from the
Footswitch and the Special I/O PCB.
Front power switch interface signals are distributed to the
power supply and the Special I/O PCB. Power Supply
logic monitoring signals are connected to/from the Power
Supply and the Special I/O PCB.
In addition to the connections described above, the PCB
contains a test header, expansion headers, spare power
and signal connectors, power supply indicator LED’s,
and a two digit display indicating Host Computer BIOS
POST codes.
Structure
The PSDB mounts to the top of the Computer System
card cage and is the distribution point of all power and
control signals of the Accurus® system. It is the point
where all grounds are tied together. The PCB is designed
with a solid ground layer and +5v layer.
Software
The CPU BIOS in the host computer allows the
Accurus® system to boot from the on board Flash
memory or a PC Card.
906-2020-501
The CPU BIOS allows the LCD display to show the
ALCON banner at power on before the operating system
is loaded. All normal PC messages displayed during the
boot process are suppressed.
All PCB addressing is controlled in CPU PCB firmware.
Hardware setup locations are defined in firmware such
that they can be revised with Alcon software upgrades.
CPU PCB
The CPU PCB (EPC-26A) is a PC/AT compatible
computer with 50 MHz Intel 486 DX2 on board. It has
the following features:
1 PC/AT compatible keyboard interface, reset button
and run LED
2 One RS232 9-pin serial port (COM1) and one RJ45
serial port (COM2)
3 Flashable Phoenix BIOS with ALCON configuration
4 Watchdog timer
5 512 Kbytes of battery backed-up SRAM
6 4 Mbytes of DRAM expandable to 16 Mbytes
7 4 MB flash memory for executing Accurus system
software
LCD Controller PCB
This PCB provides video signals to the color LCD
Display with 256 colors. The signals include all data and
control signals as well as the +5 volts and the +12 volts
power.
There is a specific power up sequence control circuit on
the PCB to ensure the +5 volts, +12 volts and the data/
control signals meet the LCD power up requirements.
Serial I/O PCB
There are two serial communication PCBs in the Host
Computer Module. Currently only one PCB is used while
the other is for future expansion. The serial ports are
accessed via an 80-pin cable connected to the Power
Signal Distribution PCB. A Serial I/O PCB provides 8
communication channels. All serial channels conform to
the RS-422 specification.
Each port on the Serial PCB is an 16550 Universal
Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) compatible,
and is controlled independently from the others. The data
transfer speed is set at 38.4K baud.
IDE Controller PCB
The system accepts removable storage media in the form
of a PC Card. The IDE Controller PCB provides disk
controller capability for the Accurus System. The
Accurus system supports booting from PC Flash Cards.
2-5
 ®

HOST COMPUTER

All the controls to this PCB are from the Host computer
SPECIAL I/O PCB
(CPU PCB) via the EXM bus. All operations between the
CPU PCB and this Special I/O PCB are accessed by the
The Special I/O PCB provides the following functions:
I/O read and I/O write operation. The Special I/O PCB
generates IRQ signals to request interrupts from the CPU
• Footswitch Control
PCB.
• Power I.V. Pole Control Logic
• System Control Register
FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
• System Status Register
• Module Service Request Control
Address Decoding
• Module Reset Control
• Host Module Voltage Monitoring
The Special I/O PCB occupies 32 bytes in the CPU’s I/O
• Power Supply Monitoring
address space. It uses a flat address scheme where each
• Stand-by Power Control
device has its own distinct I/O address. The address
• Watchdog Timekeeper
decoding is all done by the Main PLD (U18).
• Interface to the Power/Signal Distribution PCB
Voltage Monitoring
The majority of the logic on the PCB is implemented in a
large, one-time Programmable Logic Device (PLD). The
The Special I/O PCB provides the voltage monitoring
watchdog circuit is implemented in a separate device
function for the entire Accurus® console. All system
independent of the main PLD. This device has the ability
power supply voltages are monitored by the Special I/O
to perform all the necessary logic and is not SRAM
PCB except the +85V, +17V and the 115VAC which go
based. All signals going to and from the Power Signal
directly to the specific module from the system power
Distribution PCB go through an 80-pin connector.
supply. The system software can read the values of all
monitored voltages and make operational decisions. The
The one critical signal, footpedal up, is implemented in
Special I/O PCB does not automatically notify the system
separate circuits (i.e. not in the PLD).
when these voltages deviate. Voltage monitoring of these
signals is the responsibility of the software.

Module Revision
Switches
SD0-SD7 Module Resets
Module Reset
Address Decoder

SA0-SA10,15
Module Service Module Service Request
Main PLD

Request
Buffer

Power Signal Distribution PCB

IOR* Voltages
ADC
IOW*
EXM BUS

ATRESET* Footswitch
Control
AEN

EXMID IV Pole
Control

System Power
Control
IOCHK*
Watchdog System Status
IRQ11 POST Code POST Code Display
Display
IRQ12 System Unlock
Control Function
IRQ15

Figure 2-4
Special I/O PCB Block Diagram

2-6 906-2020-501
 ®
HOST COMPUTER
Footswitch Control
The Special I/O PCB controls the footswitch. It registers
the switch status from the footswitch, controls the torque
motor for treadle detent, reads the revision of the
footswitch, and registers the footswitch treadle position.
IV Pole Control (for future use)
The Special I/O PCB supports the I2C bus to control the
IV pole. It also provides a reset signal to the IV pole. The
communication to the IV pole is the I2C bus. The
conversion between the EXM bus and the I2C bus is the
PLD and the I2C controller chip (U7).
Lock/Unlock Function
The Lock function on the Special I/O PCB is activated
upon a system reset. The Lock hardware prevents a NMI
(non-maskable-interrupt) generated by the watchdog
timer or the power supply status. It also holds system
signals in a safe state until initialization is complete. The
Unlock function enables generation of a NMI and allows
all system signals to function normally. The Lock and
Unlock logics are all embedded in the Main PLD. The
lock signal also goes to the watchdog PLD.
Watchdog Timer
The Watchdog Timer on the Special I/O PCB is used to
monitor the system for an unstable state in which case it
will shut down the system. Software must strobe the
Watchdog Timer at least every 200ms during normal
operation. If software fails to do this, the watchdog timer
will expire and generate an NMI (non-maskable-
interrupt). A NMI is not sent when LOCK is active.
The watchdog function is provided by the watchdog PLD
(U19). The design of the watchdog PLD also considers
the initialization of the console system and the validation
of the watchdog function during initial power up.
Module Verification
The Special I/O PCB uses two rotary switches for
module revision control. The value of these two switches
is read by the system software and used to verify that the
software and hardware in the Accurus® system are
compatible.
POST Code Display
During console power up, the CPU BIOS sends out
Power On Self Test (POST) codes to address 80hex. The
Special I/O PCB provides decoding circuit for the POST
codes. It also provides drivers to display the POST
information on the Power Signal Distribution PCB.
906-2020-501
CIRCUIT DESIGNS
PCB Configuration
Configuration of the Special I/O PCB is similar to all
RadiSys EXM products. It communicates to the CPU via
the EXM bus. An 80 pin header on the front panel of the
PCB connects the module signals to and from the Power
Signal Distribution PCB.
Module Reset
There are 16 individual reset signals output from the
Special I/O PCB. These are available to control up to 16
modules. The reset signals are active low, and controlled
by the RESET Control Registers.
All modules will be placed in reset state in the event of
an NMI which is generated by the watchdog timer or
system power failure.
Interrupts
There are 16 interrupt service request lines input to the
Special I/O PCB from console modules via the Power
Signal Distribution PCB. The 16 interrupt signals are
monitored and controlled by U9 and U10. All service
request signals are RC filtered to prevent inadvertent
trigger of IRQ due to noise glitch.
The Non Maskable Interrupt (NMI) signal is issued to the
CPU by way of IOCHK* in the event of a watchdog
timer interrupt, power good fails, or AC fault occurs. All
module reset signals are activated in the event of a NMI.
ADC (Analog-to-Digital Converter)
The Special I/O PCB contains two 8-bit ADCs: the
Footswitch ADC (U17) and the System ADC (U16). The
analog input to the Footswitch ADC represents the
footswitch revision. The analog inputs to the System
ADC are power supply voltage monitoring signals,
footswitch solenoid feedback voltages, and DAC output
monitoring signal.
2-7

HOST COMPUTER
Footswitch Control
All switch signals from the footswitch input are pulled up
with a 1.0K resistor to +5 volt. If a switch signal is
shorted to ground through a 1.0 K resistor, the footswitch
status register will not read that switch as being activated.
The Footswitch Position Counter is a 16-bit quadrature
counter implemented in U13. The two quadrature input
signals to the counter are generated by a Two Channel
Optical Encoder in the footswitch assembly. These two
signals are directly fed to the counter. The footswitch
reset signal will clear the content of the counter.
A digital to analog converter (U12) is used to produce a
voltage from 0 to 2.5 volts. The Special I/O PCB uses
this voltage to control the footswitch detent torque level.
System Power Control
The Power Signal Distribution PCB sends two power
supply status signals to the Special I/O PCB by way of
the front connector. The PWR_GOOD signal indicates
that the system power supply is in the operating range.
The ACFAULT* signal indicates that the AC input to the
system power supply is faulty. If either of these signals
indicate a problem, an NMI signal is sent to the CPU and
all module reset signals become active.
Standby
Relay Power
Energized Shut Down Ack* Switch
(Special I/O
Board)
De-Energized
Power Supply
Shut Down
(to Power Supply)
+5V
Shut Down request
(Special I/O Board)
Figure 2-5
System Power Control on Special I/O PCB
2-8
®
The relay on the Special I/O PCB and the stand-by switch
on the front panel of the Accurus system are in series
with each other. Both must be closed to shut down the
system power supply. If either one is open the system
power supply turns on. When the system power comes up
for the first time, SHDN_ACK* is activated and the relay
is in the de-energized position. If the standby switch is
open, the power supply will be on; if the standby switch
is closed, the power supply will not stay on. After the
software command to energize the relay, SHDN_ACK*
is floating. When the SHDN_REQ* signal is active,
which means the standby switch is closed, and is detected
through the status register, software can shut the system
down by activating the SHDN_ACK* signal.
During power up:
1 If the standby switch is closed, the status of the
system power supply is controlled by the relay.
2 If the relay is energized, the SHUTDOWN is high
impedance and the system power supply will remain
ON.
3 If the relay is not energized, the SHUTDOWN is tied
to ground and the system power supply will remain
OFF.
4 If the standby switch is open, the system power
supply will remain ON.
IV Pole Control
The IV pole is controlled by the Special I/O PCB via the
I2C bus. There is a separate reset line to the IV pole, and
an IV pole service request signal from the IV pole.
POST Code Display
The Special I/O PCB monitors the EXM bus for Power
On Self Test (POST) diagnostic codes. These diagnostic
codes are displayed on two single-digit LED displays on
the Power/Signal Distribution PCB. When the system
fails to boot, the 2-digit display will show which section
of the BIOS failed. The Special I/O PCB also provides
the LED_BLANK signal to the LEDs. When this signal
is activated, the LEDs will be blank. The LEDs are
directly driven by the main PLD.
906-2020-501
 ®

HOST COMPUTER

The Sound PCB has 3 watts amplified audio output, and

SOUND PCB
NOTE: Voice confirmation is not applicable to all
models.
The Sound PCB (EXM-40) is a custom Voice and Tone
Generator designed for the Accurus® system to provide
simultaneous voice and tone capability.
The Sound PCB is configured in and compatible with the
Radisys EXM bus. The Sound PCB has an 8 bit bus
width. All control signals are received from the CPU
PCB via the EXM bus. There are 4 megabytes of flash
memory serving as the voice confirmation memory on
the Sound PCB. The system software can program and
re-program the contents of the voice memory. All
operations between the CPU PCB and the Sound PCB are
accessed by memory reads and writes and I/O read and
write operations. The Sound PCB occupies 16 bytes of
the CPU I/O space and 4 MB CPU memory address
space. All address decoding is done through the PLD
(U19).
is capable of driving an 8 ohm speaker. The console
speaker is located at the lower front panel. A speaker
status monitor bit is provided to the Host software. A
voice phrase buffer allows the software to load several
phrases into a first-in-first-out (FIFO) memory allowing
phrases to be built and executed without the attention of
the Host software.
Doctor's Memory Settings (400VSE and 600DS only)
The doctor’s memory settings are stored on the CPU and
are backed up on the Sound PCB. While the system is
booting up, it looks to the CPU for doctor’s memory
settings. If the CPU does not contain the settings, the
system looks at the back up location on the Sound PCB.
If there are doctor’s memory settings on the Sound PCB,
the system will write them to the CPU. This way the
settings are always stored in two locations.

Address Bus
Memory for Flash Memory
Flash Memory Control
Prerecorded Voice Voltage
Control
Data

Address

Speaker
Address Bus Control Control and
EXM Bus

OKI Voice
FIFO Monitoring
Data Synthesizer
Address
Data Bus Decoder
(PLD)
Voice Control
Control Bus Volume Control
System
Tone Control Data Volume Control Volume Power
(attenuation) Amplifier

Voice
Yamaha
Data Series Tone
Tone
Generator
DAC +

Figure 2-6
Sound PCB Block Diagram

906-2020-501 2-9

HOST COMPUTER
FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
I/O Address Decoding
The EXM-40 occupies 16 bytes in the CPU I/O address
space, as well as 4 megabytes in the CPU memory
address space.
EXM Bus Interface
All EXM bus address lines are buffered before they are
used on the PCB. This is done to keep the signals isolated
from the EXM bus and to keep the signals relatively
clean.
Speech Synthesis
Speech Synthesis on the EXM-40 is controlled by an
OKI Semiconductor MSM6376. This is a 4-bit ADPCM
speech synthesizer. The different phrases of voice are
pre-recorded, digitized, and stored in the onboard flash.
The OKI chip can support up to 111 different phrases,
and has up to 2 megabytes of memory. It can also
generate 7 different beep tones. The Host Computer
System software can request a particular phrase or beep
to be executed. Once the OKI chip receives the request, it
accesses the appropriate memory and executes the
corresponding sound.
2-10
®
Tone Generation
Tone Generation on the EXM-40 is controlled by a
Yamaha YM3812. The YM3812 is capable of
simultaneously producing 9 sounds, or 6 melody and 5
rhythm sounds. The output of this chip is digital and is
sent to the YM3014 Digital to Analog Converter.
Volume Control
The volume of the mixed voice and tone output signal is
controlled by the voltage output of a Digital To Analog
Converter (DAC).
Unlock Function
The Lock hardware on the EXM-40 is activated upon a
system reset. The Lock hardware prevents any sound
output until the Host System software fully initializes the
FM tone generator, Voice Synthesizer, and volume
control registers.
906-2020-501
 ®

CONTROLLER PCB KERNEL

which is combined. Green SMT LEDs are provided for

CONTROLLER PCB KERNEL
visual indication of these signals. As some Controller
PCBs do not utilize all supply voltages, some of the
The Accurus® Controller PCB Kernel consists primarily
detectors/LEDs may be absent.
of the Intel® 80C196KC20 8/16-bit microcontroller and a
collection of 8-bit data bus peripheral devices. Together,
To support the supply voltage window detectors and
these form the core resources required for execution of
other analog functions (such as ADC, DAC, etc.), various
module software and support the common functionality
reference voltages have been developed. In general,
required of the Accurus® modules. These functions
Controller PCBs have at least two independently
include the following:
generated precision references, REF500 and REF100
(5.00 and 10.00V). Other references are generally derived
• Watchdog and related circuitry to disable critical
from one of these sources using op-amps and 1%
hardware on code failure.
resistors (or better). REF500 and REF100 are generated
• Numerous digital inputs and outputs (with read-back),
by separate devices to assist in redundancy checking.
as required.
Both devices are supplied from the analog +15V supply.
• 8 x 8-bit D/A-converted outputs (range 0-5 or 0-10V).
A drop in this supply will be detected by either the +15V
• 8 x 10-bit A/D-converted inputs (range 0-5V).
window detector or comparison between the two
• Monitor/indicator/fault detector to ensure proper supply
references.
voltages.
• Provision for “downloadable” code (future).
Memory and I/O Mapping
• Provision for non-volatile storage of module specific
Consistent with Intel® architecture, I/O is memory-
calibration, data, etc.
mapped in the Kernel. The 16-bit address bus of the
• Flexible, programmable logic (for memory and I/O
80C196KC will access up to 64kB address space, which
mapping also).
currently is partitioned as 54kB EPROM (code, constant
• 38.4 K baud, RS-422 dual-simplex serial
data, etc.), 8KB RAM (variable data, stack, etc.), 1KB
communication to host.
EEPROM (non-volatile data, serial number, calibration,
• Hardwired module-host signal set: PDLUP, XRST,
etc.), 512 bytes of internal microcontroller RAM, and
SVREQ.
512 bytes of I/O.
• Numerous edge/level/priority-selectable interrupts.
The LTC691 microcontroller supervisory IC contains a
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
5V supply monitor, which issues an MRST when this
Figure 2-7 shows a block diagram of the Accurus®
supply falls below 4.65V. To cover for the tolerance of
Controller PCB Kernel. In general, circuitry shown is
this device, voltage drops in the module power cable, and
common to all four Accurus® Controller PCBs. Any
variability in the system power supply, the 5V supply is
“kernel” circuitry or components not on all four PCBs
nominally set to 5.10V.
has been omitted here and will be discussed in the
respective Controller PCB theory of operation.
Other Kernel Features
Exceptions to this are discussed at the end of this section.
Some devices and circuits associated with the kernel may
not be required by all four Controller PCBs, or may not
80C196KC Microcontroller
perform one of the “functions” identified in Figure 2-7.
An Intel® 80C196KC20 20Mhz general purpose 8/16-bit
Examples include: kernel power and signal cable
microcontroller (uC) forms the basis of the Kernel.
connector physical properties, wire gauges and pinout,
use of sockets for various ICs, and override jumpers.
Supply Monitors and Reference Voltages
To ensure proper voltage levels are present on the
Controller PCB, various “window” detector circuitry has
been applied to the +15V, -15V, +12V, and +24V
supplies. In general, each supply is monitored for
compliance within +/-10% of nominal, and status is
provided to the microcontroller for each individual
supply with the exception of +15V and -15V status,

906-2020-501 2-11
 ®

CONTROLLER PCB KERNEL

INTERFACE DESCRIPTION Input and Output Signal Protection

Input Signal Filtering
Signals PDLUP and XRST have been filtered to prevent
inadvertent response to “glitches” picked up in the signal
cable between host and module.
Although the signal cable between host and module does
not pass outside the Accurus® console, all signals in this
cable have been protected against ESD and over/under
voltage (0V/5V). To reduce EMI, each signal has also
been shorted to ground through a 1000pF capacitor,
placed nearest the signal connector on the Controller
PCB.

PDLUP Filter and PDLUPF (a/r)

Override ZRSTnF
XRSTn

AD0:7
SVREQn
A8:15 A0:15 PIO PGMEN
1,2,3
AD0:7 LRST
Address AO:7
5VOK
ALE Latch (green)
Interrupts
(a/r) KEYDTA
Module Watchdog
RD Revision KEYCLK and 5V WDOG
(to all blocks (00-99) (red)
WR on data bus) WDSTB Monitor
ENFLG PIO WDPOR
0 MRST Status
V150K (green)
SRST
V120K
20MHz V240K Status
UCRST (green)
UCRST
150K
80C196KC (green)
Supply 1kB
Micro- +15V 12VOK EEPROM
controller Monitors
-15V (green)
and
+12V Reference 24VOK
+24V Voltages (green) 8kB
RAM
REF500 REF500
(5.00V) (5.00V)

10-bit A/D
Inputs, 0-5V 48kB
+24V Flash PRGV(12V)
(a/r) Flash
PGMEN Vpp Gen

M13:17 64kB
WAIT
A0:15 EPROM
PGSEL0:3
Address
FLSHEN Decoder ROM, RAM enables
PIO enables
other I/0 enables

MODTXn RS-422
MODRXn Buffer

Figure 2-7
Controller Kernel Block Diagram

2-12 906-2020-501
 ®

AIR/FLUID MODULE

Receiver Mechanism Assembly

AIR/FLUID MODULE
The Receiver Mechanism (RM) Assembly consists of a
bezel, air cylinders, latch, pinchers and hammers, roller
The Air/Fluid Module (AFM) generates all high-pressure
pump motor with hub, and RM PCB. Together, these
based pneumatic signals for the Accurus® console, and
components provide the sense and control interface to the
consists of three printed circuit board (PCB) assemblies
cassette. The latch pulls the cassette into the mechanism
and four major mechanical subassemblies, three of which
and holds it in place against the forces exerted by the
contain pneumatic manifolds. Together, these
pinchers and hammers, and with the vacuum grommet
components perform all the functions necessary to
forms the vacuum seal. The roller pump is driven by a
support the generation of proportional vacuum,
stepper motor, which runs at two speeds/torques and in
proportional pressure, pulsed pressure, cassette sensing,
either direction as required to pump or load/unload the
and cassette manipulation as required to control flow,
pump tubing.
generate continuous and pulsed reflux, and move fluid
from the cassette vacuum chamber to the waste bag. A
The Receiver Mechanism PCB interfaces the electrical
brief description of each of the seven AFM components
signals of the Air/Fluid Controller PCB to optical and
follows.
mechanical effects on the RM Assembly, including:
sensing motor home position, sensing extended/retracted
Air/Fluid Controller PCB
position of the irrigation and continuous reflux pinchers,
The Air/Fluid Controller (AFC) PCB contains most of
sensing cassette fluid level, sensing cassette ID tabs, and
the AFM electronics. This includes 80C196KC
providing cassette vacuum chamber backlighting and
microcontroller (µC) kernel, supply voltage switches and
aspiration port indication. For improved noise immunity,
monitors, valve and motor drive, proportional vacuum
all signals in the AFC/RM interface cable are at 0-5V
and pressure analog control, timers and logic for pulsed
logic level.
pressure control, drivers for IR LEDs used for cassette
fluid level sense and cassette ID, and all A/D and D/A
converters as required to support all analog-digital
interfacing requirements.

Pneumatic
Power
Air Source
(90-120psi) Assembly
main valve ctl

85psi supply

Cassette Pinch/Hammer
Cassette Latch/Unload
VFI (pressure/vacuum)
Mfld and RM
Receiver
Scissors Drive Pneumatic VFI (pressure/vacuum) Pressure/Vacuum Valve Mechanism Cassette Pump

(pulsed/proportional) Connector proportional scissors Manifold cylinder drive

Assembly
Cassette Vacuum

Vit-1,2 Drive Assembly 57psi supply Assembly cassette vacuum Cassette, Port ID,
and Backlight
CID/LS LED drive

port ID LED drive

RMV1/7 sense
pulsed valve ctl

bklt LED drive

mfld valve ctl

RM valve ctl

motor home
xdcr signals

motor drive
ref voltages

CID sense
LS sense

Pulsed
PV drive

RMREF

Valve
Status

Kernel Signal
Air/Fluid Controller PCB
Kernel Power

5VOK Reset Watchdog General

12VOK Status Module Revision
15VOK (00-99: future)
24VOK

Figure 2-8
Air/Fluid Module Block Diagram

906-2020-501 2-13

AIR/FLUID MODULE
Air Source Manifold Assembly
The Air Source Manifold Assembly interfaces the
customer air source to the AFM, which is the only
module using the high pressure air. The Low Pressure Air
Source is the only other pneumatic module, and it uses an
electric air pump to generate room air at 7 psi. At the
input to the Air Source Manifold Assembly, a standard
hospital type pneumatic connector provides for
connection of nominal 90-120 psi compressed air or
nitrogen. An initial pop-off valve protects the regulator
from excessive supply pressure, then a second pop-off
valve protects against exceeding the rating of the main
shutoff valve, which is controlled by the AFC to gate the
AFM main air supply ON/OFF.
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly
The Pressure/Vacuum Manifold (PVM) Assembly
consists of a laminated plastic manifold and all other
components necessary to provide proportional vacuum
for aspiration and viscous fluid extraction, and
proportional pressure for scissors drive and viscous fluid
injection. Four solenoid valves are located on this
manifold to direct air flow as required in support of the
functions indicated. A single proportional valve (PV) is
used to provide continuous proportional vacuum or
pressure control (but not both simultaneously). Pressure
regulators provide 57 psi for proportional scissors and
pulsed pressure supply and 30 psi for normally-retracted
Receiver Mechanism pincher drive.
The Transducer PCB is mounted to this manifold. To
facilitate manufacture and service, this manifold
disconnects from its pneumatic interfaces by way of
quick-release pressure fittings and two header “bars”,
which use O-rings to interface to the manifold and barb
fittings to interface to the remainder of the AFM. Three
blue pneumatic test point pressure fittings allow checks
on the 30, 57, and 85 psi supplies, and reseal
automatically when the (6mm) test tubing is removed.
The Transducer PCB contains two vacuum and four
pressure transducers and their amplifiers. The resulting
high-level analog signals allow the AFC to sense four
pneumatic signals in the Pressure/Vacuum Manifold
Assembly: 55 psi and 85 psi regulated supplies,
proportional vacuum, and proportional pressure (the
latter two are sensed redundantly). To eliminate as much
tubing and wiring as possible, the transducers are located
on the PCB, which is directly mounted to the manifold,
with spacers and O-rings used as required to establish the
necessary seals.
2-14
®
Pneumatic Connector Assembly
The Pneumatic Connector Assembly consists of an
aluminum manifold and all other components needed for
the pulsed pressure source (PPS) used to drive the
vitrectomy probes and scissors handpiece. Six pneumatic
connections are presented to the user at the face of this
assembly: two for vit probe, one for scissors, one for
viscous fluid inject/extract, one for low pressure air for
Vented Gas Forced Infusion "VGFI®" or gas/fluid
exchange (GFX), and one spare (provisional - for
automatic stopcock). The primary purpose of the
manifold is to provide a volume of 57 psi regulated air
very near the solenoid valves used for generating pulsed
pressure drive.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Wherever possible, this section describes the operation of
AFM hardware and software by the function that is
evident to the user rather than by component, physical, or
logical location, etc. Some features are either common to
many functions or are best described separately.
SIGNAL NAMES
The following signal names are used within this section.
The meaning of the signal (abbreviated) name and a brief
description of how the signal is used follows:
MODnTX - RS-422 Transmit Pair, from module "n" to host
MODnRX - RS-422 Receive Pair, from host to module "n"
SVREQn - Service Request, from module "n" to host
PDLUP - Footpedal up
XRSTn - External Reset, from host to module "n"
WDOG - Watchdog
LRST- Latch Reset
POWER-UP INITIALIZATION
When the Accurus® console is first powered up, a series
of checks are executed at both host and module level
before any visible activity takes place in the AFM.
Although some of the actions are common to all modules,
this section primarily focuses on what occurs between
host and AFM during the approximately 60-second
initialization sequence.
906-2020-501
 ®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
Accurus® 80C196KC Kernel Signal Set
Communication and control from the host to each
Accurus® module is accomplished via the standardized
set of Accurus® 80C196KC Kernel signals, which are:
MODnTX - RS-422 pair by which the module serially
communicates with the host
MODnRX - the complementary RS-422 pair for
communication from host to module
SVREQn - used by the module to indicate a request to
communicate with the host
PDLUP - a real-time and overriding hardwired indication
that the user has requested zero proportional signal
XRSTn - allows the host to reset the module
Module External Reset During Host Self-Test
Consistent with the standard Accurus® Kernel signal set,
each module is assigned a unique XRSTn signal that
allows the host to reset the module and prepare it for
activation via a properly executed initialization sequence.
When a module detects it has experienced a serious fault
condition, it will lock up in a safe state that can only be
reset via power-on reset (POR) or an XRSTn from the
host. Likewise, should the host detect an erroneous
condition in the module that has not been otherwise
detected, it can assert the respective XRSTn located on
the Special I/O PCB octal latch, to individually reset that
module. Finally, should the host experience a reset, this
same latch is cleared, which resets all modules
simultaneously.
When the console is first powered up, power is applied to
the AFM, but the signal XRST2 holds the AFM in the
reset state until the host has completed its power-up self-
tests. During this time, the green 12OK, 15OK, and
24OK LEDs located on the AFC are lit solid, indicating
these voltages are all within the required range. A
flashing green 5OK LED and solidly lit red WDOG LED
indicate that the watchdog timer has expired. WDOG is
one of several signals that assert LRST, which resets all
secondary peripheral input/output latches in PIO1-PIO3.
Primary output latches, located in PIO0, are reset only by
XRST2 and not LRST. PIO0 does not control any
energy-producing outputs, and is used to control the
analog multiplexer, WDOG strobe, status LED, and other
devices needed early in AFC PCB initialization.
First Release of XRST, Module Watchdog Test, and
Module ID
When the host has successfully completed its self-test, it
writes to the XRST latch to release all modules from the
reset state. Each module then proceeds with its own self-
test, including: ROM checksum, RAM, A/D and D/A
converter checks, reference voltage measurements, etc.
Before arming the watchdog programmable logic device
906-2020-501
(PLD), the AFC attempts to strobe the WDOG and write
to secondary PIOs and confirms no success, then inserts
the proper 14-bit serial watchdog key and a strobe resets
the WDOG, LRST is cleared, and secondary PIOs can be
written. One particular secondary PIO output is
SVREQ2, which is set high at this time.
Finally, an independent timer is set in the µC and one last
strobe is issued to the watchdog PLD, after which the µC
awaits reset by the WDOG. If the WDOG expires before
60 ms or after 70 ms, a flag is set to indicate WDOG test
failure. Normally, the WDOG expires after 65 ms and
asserts LRST, which in turn clears all secondary PIO
outputs, including SVREQ2. The high-low transition of
SVREQ flags an AFM service request to the host.
During this time, LRST locks out a majority of the AFM
hardware, but the µC is still able to perform some
internal functions, including the WDOG check and
communication with the host. Only XRST2 can stop the
µC from executing code.
Responding to this service request, the host polls the
module for status, to which the module responds with its
"module ID", along with the status word to indicate the
state of various signals within the AFM and the success
or failure of the various self-test items, including the
WDOG time-out test. At this time, the host accounts for
each of the four required Accurus® modules. Note that it
is via this approach that the host is able to "find" a
module, independent of which signal connection is made
at the host Signal/Power Distribution PCB.
Host Watchdog Test and Module "Resume Init"
Once all four modules have "reported in", the host tests
its own watchdog by allowing it to expire. The host
recovers from the subsequent watchdog reset with a flag
set to indicate the circumstances of the reset. In this
second pass through initialization, the host does not
repeat its own self-test. Once again, the host releases all
XRSTs, and the AFM and other modules repeat their
initialization and WDOG time-out sequence. In
responding to the subsequent SVREQ2 this time, the host
issues a "resume init" command, which instructs the
AFM to resume its initialization, this time executing into
routines that cause visible activity (e.g., positioning the
roller hub, retracting the RM cylinders and pinchers,
etc.).
Proportional Valve (PV) "Knee" Voltage Check
Also during initialization, the PV "knee" voltage is
determined by issuing a 10 psi proportional scissors
setpoint into the blocked scissors output. This is effected
by turning pulsed scissors control valve PPV4 fully ON
while Pneumatic Connector manifold main valve PPV1 is
2-15
 ®

AIR/FLUID MODULE

OFF (refer to pneumatic schematic diagram). The vacuum must exceed 95% of the vacuum check level
purpose of this check is to establish the level of "bias" after 2 seconds. Figure 2-9 shows these various levels vs.
that is applied to the PV to improve the step response elevation.
from zero setpoint. This check is performed whether a
cassette is inserted or not.
800
CASSETTE LOAD AND VACUUM CHECK Atmospheric Limit

Once initialization and knee check are completed, the 700

Max Vac Level
Vac Chk Level
module is ready to accept a cassette - if one has not Minimum to Pass
600
previously been inserted. The roller hub is rotated as
required to position the drain pump tubing hook at the 2 500
o'clock position or to locate the drain pump tubing into

Max Vac (mmHg)

the hook when the cassette is inserted. If a cassette is not 400

already inserted, the latch is lifted and all pinchers and

300
hammers are retracted.
200
Cassette Insertion and Identification
Cassette insertion is detected optically, via intrusion of 100

the cassette ID tabs into the sensing slot on the RM. 0

When the cassette is approximately 0.1 inch from full 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000

insertion, the tabs are detected by the RM PCB. With Elevation (ft)

some "debounce" and delays applied, the latch drops to

draw in and hold the cassette in position. The cassette
type is identified by the pattern of the 1-3 tabs present
(posterior, anterior, single-use, re-use, etc.). At the high
torque setting and 40 RPM, the pump is turned one
revolution clockwise to load the tubing onto the roller
hub.
Pump-Down of Fluid and Vacuum Check
The pump then continues in the clockwise direction but
at 100 RPM and normal torque. Once fluid is detected at
any of the four level sensing positions, a cassette vacuum
check is initiated. If no air/fluid transitions are detected
within 20 seconds, the cassette is considered empty - the
drain pump times out, and vacuum check is initiated.
This approach ensures against a full cassette getting
vacuum-checked, which would cause ingestion of fluid
into the vacuum generator.
The primary purpose of the vacuum check is to test for
air leaks in the cassette, in its tubing, or in the latch
grommet seal to the cassette. Leaks can create bubbles in
the cassette or impact performance by limiting maximum
vacuum or slowing response time. A secondary benefit
of the vacuum check is to flag problems of the module
itself, such as blocked passageways or leaks in manifolds,
tubing, gaskets, etc.
Vacuum check level depends on geographical elevation,
and is established at 50 mmHg below the maximum
vacuum attainable by the AFM, which is defined as 140
mmHg below local atmospheric pressure but no more
than 600 mmHg. To pass vacuum check, the actual
Figure 2-9
Vacuum vs. Elevation
At sea level, atmospheric pressure is typically 760
mmHg, although pressure at this or any other elevation
typically will vary by up to +/- 20 mmHg, depending on
weather conditions. Continuing at sea level, the
maximum vacuum would be 600 mmHg and vacuum
check would be done at 550 mmHg, with 522 mmHg
minimum required to pass. Similarly at 4000 feet,
atmospheric of 660 mmHg yields 520 mmHg max vac
and 470 vac check, with 446 mmHg to pass.
CASSETTE TUBING MANIPULATION
Both posterior and anterior cassettes have an arrangement
of fluidic tubing leading from the irrigation and/or
aspiration ports to the vacuum chamber. This tubing is
made of relatively soft silicone, and by applying various
forces, it is possible to control fluid flow to gate
aspiration, irrigation, or to generate reflux pulses. To
achieve the level of force needed to pinch off this tubing
while also satisfying the need to apply seven such forces
in a relatively limited space, air cylinder actuation was
the logical choice.
Use of 25/85 psi, Normally Extended/Retracted
The "safe state" must be ensured in the absence of
pressurized air, either due to loss of wall air supply or
following main air shutoff as a result of a fault condition
detected by the AFM. To this end, two basic types of air
cylinders were used: normally extended and normally
retracted. The normally retracted cylinders were selected
with as small a diameter as practical to ease packaging.

2-16 906-2020-501
 ®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
With only frictional forces resisting cylinder plunger
retraction, a fairly light return spring could be applied.
As a result, a relatively low actuation pressure could
likewise be used to extend the normally retracted
cylinders, this was established at 25 psi. The normally
extended cylinders have considerably stronger springs in
order to apply the required force in the absence of air
pressure, and even with their larger diameters and thus,
large cross-sectional area of the internal piston, a much
higher pressure was required, in this case 85 psi.
Single-Acting vs. Double-Acting
With the exception of the cassette latch, all RM air
cylinders are single-acting, i.e., air is applied to only one
side of the piston, and spring force exclusively drives the
plunger the other way.
Pulsed Reflux
A nearly identical "stack" of three plungers has been
allocated to each of the two aspiration ports. With proper
sequencing, these top and bottom pinchers and hammer
in the middle can generate small fluid surges in a primed
aspiration line, ending with the abrupt discharge of a
uniform volume of "reflux" fluid at the vit probe tip.
Although the control signal timing varies due to differing
actuation delays of normally extended vs. normally
retracted upper pinchers, the sequence of plunger
movement is essentially the same.
Continuous Reflux (anterior only)
Similar to irrigation ON/OFF by the upper-left pincher,
continuous reflux is the gating ON/OFF of the continuous
reflux pincher, which is the vertically oriented pincher
just to the right of the cassette latch. Prior to activating
continuous reflux, the top-right pincher is extended and
others in the stack are retracted. The continuous reflux
pincher is retracted to open the path to the BSS+ bottle
and the lower pincher is extended to block flow into the
cassette vacuum chamber. Similar to pulsed reflux for
anterior, a “flush” is effected on the cassette tubing
segment into the cassette prior to extending the lower
pincher and retracting the upper, to ensure no infusion of
air.
906-2020-501
ROLLER HUB PUMP AND TUBING LOAD/
UNLOAD
The stepper motor is capable of rotating the roller hub at
one of two speeds, at one of two power or torque settings,
and in either direction. With cassette loaded, two of the
four hub rollers make contact with the cassette drain
pump tubing at all times. The transfer of fluid between
rollers in this tubing results in a flow of approximately
0.5 cc/rev, or 50 cc/min flow rate at pump speed of 100
RPM. The hub has a double-featured "hook" shape
which together with the "tubing unloader" pneumatic
plunger combine to both load and unload the cassette
drain pump tubing. The motor makes complete
revolutions when in the pump mode. With 200 step/rev
and a motor "home" position sensor, the idle position and
any other angular position is accurately achieved.
Higher Torque with 24V Overdrive
The torque when loading is nearly four times that during
pumping, which is necessary to overcome additional
resistive force accompanying the stretch of silicone drain
pump tubing on and off the roller hub.
Idling with Only One Phase
The stepper motor has two center-tapped windings, and
in normal pump operation half of each winding is
energized with 12V in various combinations of polarities
and in a four-step sequence as appropriate to achieve
rotation in either direction. When driven with 12V, each
motor winding draws 0.68A for a total power dissipation
of approximately 16W, nearly independent of speed or
load.
Motor Home Positioning
With each rotation, a magnet embedded into the
periphery of the roller hub passes a Hall-effect sensor
located on the RM PCB, which communicates the event
via an interrupt to the µC. The magnet material is
Neodymium, which is very strong. The sensor can detect
the magnet from up to 0.5 inch away, and is unaffected
by passing through the aluminum RM bezel. The
interrupt is dynamically programmed to detect both rising
and falling edges of the home position sense signal, to
signal the approach and recession of the roller hub to the
"home" position. By splitting the number of steps
between these two events, the precise position where the
magnet is in exact alignment with the sensor is
determined. An advantage to this centering approach is
that positioning is not affected by variations in the
strength and sensitivity of the magnet and sensor. From
"home" position, "load" and "unload" positions are
reached by the appropriate number of motor steps, per
RM geometries.
2-17

AIR/FLUID MODULE
PROPORTIONAL VACUUM GENERATION
Proportional pressure is generated by the PVM by routing
85 psi regulated air through the PV then into the manifold
mounted venturi. The vacuum from the venturi is routed
past dual-redundant vacuum transducers then out the
PVM and to the Receiver Mechanism for connection to
the cassette. The transducers are located as near to the
PVM output as possible and are arranged symmetrically
to ensure readings are not skewed due to passageway
pressure drops during the relatively high flows occurring
on rapid vacuum step changes. The PV is a 2-way valve,
and acts as the energy source when the venturi is to
create or increase vacuum. When vacuum is to be
reduced, the means to dissipate excess vacuum is via the
venturi exhaust.
Vacuum Transducers and Thermal Drift Cancellation
Absolute transducers with stainless steel sensing surfaces
are used to sense vacuum.
Vacuum Safety Check Valve
A check valve is located near the transducers which is
generally blocking, but when pressure is applied to the
vacuum path it becomes forward biased much like a
diode in an electrical circuit. In this way, the check valve
protects against fault conditions that might otherwise
allow positive pressure to build in the vacuum generator
(e.g., due to blocked venturi exhaust).
2-18
®
PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE GENERATION
A proportional pressure source (PrPS) is provided to
drive either the scissors or VFI handpiece, and in many
ways is very similar to the proportional vacuum
generator. However, some significant differences exist
between pressure and vacuum, as well as between
scissors and VFI.
PULSED PRESSURE GENERATION
The pulsed pressure source (PPS) is used to drive the
Accurus® and InnoVit® vitrectomy probes, and the
scissors handpiece in multicut mode. Although these all
have different drive pulse requirements, they are all
accommodated by the AFM using just one 57 psi supply
pressure and variable timing. The PPS outputs are
located on the Pneumatic Connector Assembly (PCA),
and all three use the same type of solenoid valve for
pulsed pressure generation.
906-2020-501
 ®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
AIR/FLUID CONTROLLER PCB
This PCB interfaces electrical signals between the host
computer, the Receiver Mechanism and Transducer
PCBs, and various solenoid valves on the Receiver
Mechanism Assembly. When complete with the proper
Air/Fluid module code, the following basic functions are
performed by the Air/Fluid Controller PCB:
• Communicate command and status between host and
Air/Fluid Module.
• Drive cassette port indication and backlight LEDs.
• Drive cassette fluid level LEDs and interpret sensor
feedback.
• Drive cassette ID LEDs and interpret sensor feedback.
• Control and actuate latch, pinch, hammer, and tubing
unloader air cylinders.
• Monitor two selected air cylinder position sensor
feedback signals (anterior).
• Control position and provide drive to pump motor.
• Interpret signals SP85/SP55 for 85/57psi regulated-
supply pressure status.
• Configure air/fluid manifold for vacuum/pressure at
cassette/scissors/VFI outputs.
• Control proportional pressure, apply safety checks, and
provide status.
• Control proportional vacuum, apply safety checks, and
provide status.
• Select/control pulsed pressure drive of scissors or
InnoVit/Accurus probes.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The block diagram does not distinguish between signals
that interface to circuitry or components off the PCB vs.
those signals which remain internal.
In general, the discussion of logic signals intentionally
excludes mention of sense (i.e., whether active-high or
active-low). Rather, signals are referred to as “asserted”
(active, true) or “de-asserted” (inactive, false). However,
in areas where sense is part of the discussion, signals
which are active-low are designated by an asterisk, as
“SIGNAL*.”
Accurus® Controller PCB Kernel
This section describes the Air/Fluid Controller design
only in the areas where it differs or supplements the
features contained in the Kernel as previously described.
906-2020-501
Interrupts
The most notable dual-edge interrupt signal is MTHM,
which by +/- edges indicates when the pump motor is
entering and leaving the home position “dwell” angle
(approximately 20 degrees of motor rotation). By setting
up for edge triggering first in one direction then the other,
the precise center of the dwell angle can be determined
with little if any effect from magnet strength or radial
positioning, or from sensitivity of the Hall-effect sensor.
Extension of Address/Data Bus
Address/data bus and read/write control signal routing
outside of the Kernel is generally avoided to control
noise, both for susceptibility and emissions. However,
some bus-interfacing devices beyond the Kernel set have
been utilized in this design, including the 82C54 16-bit
programmable timers used for pulsed pressure timing and
the 12-bit DAC used for pressure and vacuum setpoint.
These devices and the associated signal routing has been
kept close to the Kernel with additional I/O address
decoding provided as required.
Kernel A/D Converter
The A/D Converter is operated in the 10-bit conversion
mode. The Air/Fluid software sets the ADC configuration
register for 1.3µs sample time and 11.2µs conversion
time. Each ADC “read” actually consists of four separate
conversions occurring immediately after each other,
which are then averaged. ADC reads are typically
executed once every 50ms, and action may be taken
based on a single read or after a succession of four reads,
to provide some digital filtering of transient faults (e.g.,
due to EMC, surge loads, overshoots, etc.).
Eight 0-5V analog inputs are supported by the Kernel
microcontroller ADC and internal analog mux. As
indicated in Figure 2-10, these signals are: proportional
valve drive voltage sense PVDRS; Receiver Mechanism
PCB derived voltages REF05B, REF12B, and REF25B;
local reference voltage REF250; and 57/85psi pressure
regulator output sense signals SP55/SP85. Many of these
have been connected solely for possible use in future
diagnostic code.
2-19
 ®

AIR/FLUID MODULE

+12V
+24V Supply VMOT
VMT12 Voltage PV12V BKLT BKLT*
VMT24 Switches VSOL P1IND Misc. P1IND*
VSOLEN P2IND LED Drive P2IND*
LTX0:3 LTX0:3*

RMV1S BKLT
RMV7S P1IND
VLVOK P2IND VMOT Stepper
MT0:3*
LSRX0:3 LTX0:3 MT0:3 Motor Drive
CIDRX0:2 VMT12
VMT24
VSOLEN
VACDET MT0:3 VSOL
MTHM MFV1:5 RMV1:9 Solenoid RMV1:9*
RMV1:9 MFV1:5 Valve Drive MFV1:5*
ZERO Controller PPV1:4 PPV1:4*
PPVMSK and
PPQ3 PCB REF011
VCVMSK Fault
Kernel PRVMSK VCVMSK
MOD2RX PRVMSK Detection
PPVMSK VLVOK
MOD2TX PPVMSK
MCTS0:1
PDLUP MCTEN
DACD8:11
XRST2
PDLOVR
SVREQ2 15.6KHZ
MCTS0:1 PPV2:4
REF100 MCTEN Pulsed (one each)
PVDRS REF500 LRST Pressure
REF05B PPVD2:4
REF12B CTR0:1 Valve PPV2:4
REF25B DAC0:1 CTR0:1
REF250
Control
RD RD
SP55 WR WR
SP85 A0:1 A0:1
AD0:7 PPQ3

PRV2
PRV1 Analog DACDTA, DACCLK,
MXSEL0:2 DACLD, DACCL
VACDTL
VAC2 Mux and
WR
VAC1 Scaler DACD8:11
DAC0:1 VPSET
VPSET (10V-5V) "Trim-DAC" VAGC Vacuum
REF10B PVSUP
(8-bit, 4x5V PVLIM
PVDSEL
and VACDTL
and 4x10V) RMREF PVLIM Pressure VACDET

VAGC Control
VAC1 PVDR
PRV2 PVDRS
Reference REF250
REF125 PDLUPF
Voltages REF011 PDLOVR ZERO

Figure 2-10
Air/Fluid Controller PCB Block Diagram

2-20 906-2020-501
 ®
AIR/FLUID MODULE
RECEIVER MECHANISM PCB
This PCB interfaces electrical signals between the
Controller PCB and the electromechanical and optical
components located on the Receiver Mechanism. Aside
from the roller pump motor these components are
primarily performing sense and indication. The basic
functions performed by the Receiver Mechanism PCB
are as follows:
- Sense cassette tabs.
- Sense cassette chamber fluid level.
- Detect pump motor at “home” position.
- Provide cassette backlight illumination.
- Route stepper motor drive signals.
- Provide aspiration port indication.
- Detect pincher actuation.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 2-11 shows a block diagram of the Accurus®
Receiver Mechanism PCB circuitry. This circuitry is
essentially comprised of five basic blocks: backlight and
port ID indication, motor home position sensing, cassette
ID sensing, fluid level sensing, and pincher position
sensing (for anterior). Inset boxes show optics in
schematic form. Routing of signals to the stepper motor
is not shown since no active circuitry is involved in this
function.
Backlight and Port Indication
The backlight consists of a single 0.4 inch square green
LED element positioned to light outward from the
cassette fluid chamber area. Each aspiration port
indication (left or right) is provided by a single “T-1”
round green LED positioned just below and in line with
the cassette chamber terminus of each aspiration path.
Simple ON/OFF control is provided.
Motor Home Position Sensing
To determine position of the pump stepper motor and
provide for run-time diagnostics, a magnet has been
embedded in the pump hub and a digital hall-effect
sensor is located on the PCB. Once any predetermined
position is known, other positions may be established by
counting steps. Variations in hall-effect sensitivity and
magnet strength are rendered insignificant by a dwell-
midpoint calculation performed by the module software.
Cassette ID Tab Sensing
Signals CIDRX0:2 convey the presence of the three clear
cassette ID tabs. Up to seven cassette ID types may be
assigned using the 3-bit binary code of these tabs (at least
one tab must be present to detect cassette insertion). LED
906-2020-501
drive signals LTX0:2 are driven one at a time to avoid
crosstalk, and are shared with fluid level sense to reduce
interface signal count.
Fluid Level Sensing
Signals LSRX0:3 indicate one of four distinct levels in
the cassette fluid chamber by applying the physical
property of total internal reflection, which occurs when
light strikes the fluid/air interface from below and at an
angle from normal in excess of the critical angle of
approximately 50 degrees. At the BSS+ level indicated in
the inset, light from LTX1 is interrupted by the fluid/air
interface, while the other light passes through and is
detected by LSRX0, LSRX2, and LSRX3.
Each level sensor is capable of detecting fluid over some
vertical range. There is no assurance against sensor
signals overlapping nor is there necessarily coverage over
the full range of fluid level in the cassette chamber. This
is due to the wide range of conditions that may be present
in the chamber, including fluid splashing and high or low
meniscus effects. Module software algorithms resolve
this by applying filters and detecting level sense signal
transitions. As with cassette ID, LTX0:3 are driven one at
a time to avoid crosstalk.
Pincher Position Sensing
For anterior, the two select Receiver Mechanism pinchers
RMV1 and RMV7 are monitored for proper actuation.
An opaque “flag” is attached to the shafts of RMV1 and
RMV7 pinchers, and a standard photo-interrupter (slotted
LED/phototransistor pair) detects the motion of this flag.
A delay of approximately 100ms exists between
activation of one of these pinchers and the eventual
actuation detection. Module software continually checks
for pincher state at appropriate intervals, and applies the
appropriate delay following pincher state transitions.
Cassette ID Tabs
Mechanical alignment of cassette tabs to the Receiver
Mechanism PCB is not critical. The tab is typically
sensed when approximately 50% of the beam is
deflected, which is essentially when the tab edge is in
line with IR path centerline. The tab must be sensed
before the cassette is fully inserted, but not before the
cassette is within reach of the latch.
2-21
 ®

AIR/FLUID MODULE

BKLT* Backlight
LED Motor
Backlight Pinchers
and Roller Hub Home
and MTHM*
Port ID Port 1 Magnet Position
P1IND* Sensors
Indication LED Sensing
Port 2
P2IND*
LED
Pincher RMV1S
Position RMREF
RMREF Sensing RMV7S

LTX0* LSRX0
LTX0* CIDRX0 Fluid
Cassette LTX1* LSRX1
Level
LTX1* ID CIDRX1 LTX2* LSRX2
Sensing
Sensing
LTX2* CIDRX2 LTX3* LSRX3

TAB1 LSRX3
LTX0* CIDRX0 LSRX2
Cassette LTX3*
Cassette
TAB2 LSRX1 Chamber
Tabs LTX1* CIDRX1
LSRX0
LTX2*
BSS+ LTX1*
TAB3
LTX2* CIDRX2 LTX0*

Figure 2-11
Receiver Mechanism PCB Block Diagram

2-22 906-2020-501
 ®

AIR/FLUID MODULE

Dual-Redundant Vacuum Monitor

TRANSDUCER PCB
Signals VAC1 and VAC2 are generated from a 15psi
pressure (vacuum) transducer and amplifier circuit. Two
This PCB interfaces pneumatic and electrical signals
identical circuits are used for bridge excitation and output
between the controller PCB and the pressure-vacuum
signal amplification/offset, resulting in independent dual
manifold. The pressure-vacuum manifold contains the
redundancy (only supply and reference voltages are
pneumatic components needed for operation of the
common). Although VAC1 is “primary” and VAC2
vacuum generator, proportional pressure, and pulsed
“secondary”, the same vacuum signal is sensed by each
pressure functions in the Accurus® (regulators, solenoid
transducer.
and proportional valves, pressure transducers, etc.). The
following basic functions are performed:
Typically, at sea level and no vacuum generated, VAC1
and VAC2 are near 2.40V. From this “zero vac” level,
- Route solenoid and proportional valve drive signals.
these signals are scaled at 1.00V/100mmHg, for a level
- Provide dual-redundant vacuum level monitoring.
of approximately 8.40V at 600mmHg (max vac).
- Provide dual-redundant proportional valve output
Although the presence of positive pressure is abnormal,
monitoring.
measurement of up to approximately 4psi (200mmHg)
- Provide monitoring of 57psi and 85psi pressure
provides for adequate fault detection.
regulator outputs.
Pressure Monitors
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Pressure level monitoring is divided into two types:
Figure 2-12 shows a block diagram of the Transducer
source and proportional. Signals SP55 and SP85 reflect
PCB circuitry, which is essentially comprised of three
the level of the two regulated source pressures of
basic blocks: reference voltage generators, dual-
approximately 57psi and 85psi (respectively).
redundant vacuum monitor, and pressure monitors.
Proportional pressure level (for VFI and scissors) is
Routing of various valve drive signals through the PCB
reflected in signals PRV1 and PRV2, which are not
does not show up in the block diagram since no active
located identically in the Air/Fluid manifold pneumatic
circuitry is involved in this function.
circuit; PRV1 is “secondary” and at the proportional
valve output, and PRV2 is “primary” and nearer the
Reference Voltage Generators
console port (PRV1/PRV2 typically differ by less than
The reference voltage generators buffer the input
1psi).
reference voltage signals REF100 (10.0V) and REF250
(2.50V) to form REF10B and REF25B, respectively.
All four pressure signals are based on the same 100psi
Two additional reference voltage signals REF12B
transducer. Identical circuitry is used for bridge
(1.25V) and REF05B (0.49V) are generated for proper
excitation and output amplification except for scaling,
transducer bridge excitation and output signal offset. The
which for PRV1 and PRV2 is 1.00V/10psi, for SP55 is
input references are low-pass filtered to reduce any noise.
1.00V/20psi, and for SP85 is 1.00V/30psi. A 0.5V offset
All references are sourced by a voltage follower op-amp
covers for 0.1V zero pressure offset and allows detection
for additional current drive, and fed back to the controller
of a failed transducer, typically revealed by an amplifier
PCB for check.
output swing to a supply “rail”.

primary 85psi SP85

vacuum VAC1
Dual- Reference REF10B (10.0V) 57psi Pressure SP55
REF100
REF10B Redundant (10.0V) Voltage REF25B (2.50V) REF12B Monitors
Vacuum Generators REF05B
REF25B REF250 REF12B (1.25V)
Monitor
(2.50V) PRV1
prv1
secondary REF05B (0.49V)
VAC2 prv2 PRV2
vacuum

Figure 2-12
Transducer PCB Block Diagram

906-2020-501 2-23
 ®

LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE

During normal operation, the Directional Solenoid

LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE switches the chamber pressure to the inlet of the
Proportional Valve. The excessive pressure is vented to
The Low Pressure Air/Illuminator (LPA/Illum) Module atmosphere and the controlled output air passes through
mainly consists of three major sections: The LPA/Illum the Output Solenoid and fed to the output of the
Controller PCB, The Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) manifold.
Manifold assembly, and the Illuminator subframe with
Universal Optic Plate. The LPA/Illum Controller PCB In case of any abnormality during operation, the default
relays information between the Host and the Illuminator state of the manifold sets the Directional Solenoid to the
and LPAS outputs. The Controller also monitors and input of the mechanical regulator, and the output pressure
controls the activities of the LPAS manifold and the is fixed at 30 mmHg.
Illuminator subframe.
Manifold
LPAS MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY The manifold is a clear multilayer plastic manifold with
The LPAS Manifold Assembly generates low pressure air four chambers which are linked together by a small
from room air. There are two outputs from this manifold opening. The total volume of all four chambers is
assembly which can operate simultaneously. approximately 25 inch3. The chambers are pressure air
1) The LPAS (Low Pressure Air Source) output is reservoirs and small openings act as filters for air ripple
used for GFI or FA/X. This output from the generated by the air pump.
manifold is well regulated pressure with high flow
capability and is controlled by the LPA/Illum The manifold also provides air channels for pneumatic
Controller PCB. component interconnection.
2) The ASC (Automatic Stop Cock (not available in
all models)) output drives the ACS to change the
setting of the stopcock. This output supplies the
stopcock with 3.5 PSI at 1 lpm flow rate.

Low Pressure
LPAS Manifold Air (GFX, VGFI)
Auto Stopcock
Assembly Drive (future)
xducer signals
mfld valve ctl
pump drive

PV drive

Module Revision
Pump Mfld Valve
(00:99; future) Enable Enable (3x)

LPA Pump
Power OK
LPA Pump Power Drawer
(110VAC)
Shutdown Thermal
Illuminator LPA/Illuminator
Power (17V) Controller PCB Drawer/Thermal Sense Illuminator Lamp 1
Illuminator Lamp Drive Subframe
Power OK Assembly Lamp 2
Lamp 1,2
Kernel Power
Enable
Kernal Signal

5VOK Reset Watchdog General

12VOK Status
15VOK
24VOK

Figure 2-13
LPA/Illuminator Module Block Diagram

2-24 906-2020-501
 ®
LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE
Air Pump
The air pump used in the manifold assembly is a AC
piston pump. The air pump generates very low acoustic
noise and high flow capability. There is an input filter
built in the air pump. The air pump is capable of
outputting 7 psi at a no flow condition. The output of the
air pump goes through a silicon tube and into the first
chamber of the manifold.
Bleed Off Valve
The mechanical bleed off valve sets the maximum air
pressure in the manifold to 3.5 ± 0.5 PSI. Any pressure
applied to the chamber greater than this valve's
specifications is bled off to atmosphere. This provides a
safety guard for the LPAS output and the ASC output.
The input to the bleed off valve is from the same
chamber that is connected to the air pump. The output of
the bleed off valve is to atmosphere.
Mechanical Regulator
A preset mechanical regulator is used as a back up
pressure regulator to the proportional valve. In case there
is a power failure or controller failure, the mechanical
regulator will set the LPAS output of the manifold
assembly to 30 mmHg, and capable of supplying 25 cc/
min flow. The pressure setting of the regulator is factory
preset.
The input of the mechanical regulator is from the default
output port of the directional solenoid. When the
directional solenoid is in the de-energized condition, the
air to the mechanical regulator is from the manifold air
chamber. The output of the regulator goes through a
check valve and to the LPAS output port.
Solenoids
There are three identical 3-way solenoids mounted on top
of the manifold: the Directional Solenoid, Output
Solenoid and the Automatic Stopcock Solenoid. They are
24VDC, 2 watt, three way (center, side and top)
solenoids. When the solenoid is energized, the center and
side ports are connected; when the solenoid is de-
energized, the top and the sides are connected. These
solenoids have a relatively large air pathway which
minimizes the pressure loss due to flow.
906-2020-501
These solenoids are energized and de-energized in
different combinations to set the output to a different
configuration. When the ASC solenoid is energized, the
pressured air is connected to the ASC output port on the
manifold. When the Output solenoid is energized, the
output of the LPAS port is connected to the output port of
the proportional valve. LPAS output pressure is
controlled by the controller PCB. When the Output
solenoid is de-energized, the output of the LPAS port is
connected to the output of the mechanical regulator. If
the Directional solenoid is energized, the air from the
pressured chamber goes to the input of the proportional
valve. When the Directional solenoid is de-energized, the
pressured air from the chamber goes to the input of the
mechanical regulator.
Proportional Valve
The proportional valve controls the output pressure level.
This is a single stage servo valve. The electromechanical
transducer is proportional to its input current, which
means the output pressure is proportional to its input
control current. The characteristic of the transfer function
of this proportional valve is very linear, and has relatively
small hysteresis. The vent port of the proportional valve
is directed to atmosphere.
Mufflers
The purpose of the mufflers is to reduce acoustic noise
generated by the bleed off valve and the vent port of the
proportional valve.
Check Valve
A one way check valve is placed between the output of
the mechanical regulator and the output of the LPAS
port. During normal operation, the output of the LPAS
port is connected to the output of the proportional valve,
and is also connected to the output of the mechanical
regulator. The check valve is used to prevent pressure
leak through the mechanical regulator.
2-25
 ®

LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE

The drawer sense signal comes from a normally open

ILLUMINATOR SUBFRAME/
switch located on the Illuminator subframe. When the
UNIVERSAL OPTIC PLATE
Universal Optic Plate is pulled out, the sensor switch
closes and triggers the circuit on the Controller PCB to
The Illuminator is part of the console frame. It has a fan
set the DRWOUT to active state.
to cool the heat caused by the illuminator lights, a
thermal sensor, and a drawer sensor. If the temperature in
The on/off temperature sensor is also located on the
the subframe raised above 180°F, the thermal sensor is
Illuminator subframe. When the subframe temperature is
activated to inform the console host of the information.
less than 180°F, the sensor is in the open state. When the
The drawer sensor informs the module controller to turn
temperature is above 180°F, the switch closes and sends
off the voltage to the illuminator lights when the drawer
the OVTEMP signal.
is pulled out. The connector in the subframe has a self
latching and blind-mate feature; when the Universal
Both the DRWOUT and OVTEMP signal are fed to the
Optic Plate is inserted, the connector automatically
microcontroller to monitor the status.
latches on.
Thermal Sensor
Due to the high power of the illuminator lights, they
The thermal sensor is located near the middle section of
generate large amount of heat. There is a designated fan
the subframe. This is a ON/OFF thermal switch. When
for the illuminator subframe. Anytime the light is turned
the temperature in the illuminator subframe rises above
on, the fan will be on. The fan directs the air directly to
180°F, the contact of the switch is connected. The
the outside of the console frame.
hysteresis of the thermal switch is approximately ±30°F.
Power Connector
Since the operation of the illuminator fan is not detected,
The power connector used in the illuminator subframe is
the module Controller PCB is relaying the thermal sensor
a blind-mate connector. It can withstand high
status to determine the operation state of the illuminator
temperature, and has very low contact resistance. Two
fan. If the thermal sensor is activated (closed), the
contacts are used for each light output voltage to further
module controller thinks the illuminator fan is not
reduce the power loss on the contact resistance.
operating properly.
Drawer Sensor
Fan
The drawer sensor is a push button switch which is
The fan in the illuminator subframe drives air through the
normally closed. One important feature of the switch is
subframe when the light bulbs are turned on. The air
that the travel of the switch arm is long enough so that
inlets are located on both sides of the subframe. The
when the Universal Optic Plate drawer is pushed into the
output of the fan is connected to a duct which is
subframe, the switch contact will open after the power
connected to the back of the Accurus console. The fan is
connector is properly connected. The switch contact
driven by the module Controller PCB.
should be closed before the power connector is
disconnected to pull out the Optic Plate drawer.
Due to the high temperature in the illuminator subframe,
the fan is turned on whenever one or both lamps are
turned on. The fan is off if no lamp is turned on.

2-26 906-2020-501
 ®

LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE

Ground Construction
LPA/ILLUMINATOR CONTROLLER PCB
There are two different ground planes on the LPA/
Illuminator Controller PCB. One is for the 17 volts lamp
The main function of the LPA/Illum Controller PCB is to
supply voltage return. The other ground is for all other
control the Low Pressure Air Source output pressure and
voltages to return.
to control the Illuminator output light intensity. It
conveys information from the Host Computer and
A 0 ohm resistor connects these two grounds to provide a
controls the servo and LPAS (Low Pressure Air Source)
common reference point.
manifold components to achieve the host commanded
output pressure. It also receives information from the
Precision Voltage Reference.
host computer to control the two PWMs (Pulse Width
Some parts of the Controller circuit need precision
Modulators) which regulate the output voltage to the
voltage reference, particularly the following circuits:
illuminator lights.
80C196KC ADC:
The Kernel is the circuity common to all Controller PCBs
+5V reference
and is described earlier in section.
DAC8800 DAC (two needed):
+2.62V reference and +5V reference
The Low Pressure Air Controller circuit mainly consists
Supply to transducers:
of a pressure sensing circuit, servo control circuit (PID),
+10V reference
solenoids driver and monitoring circuit, pump control and
Reference for +17V monitoring:
monitoring circuit, and other safety monitoring and
+2.5V reference
supporting circuitry.
DC offset for the Instrumentation Amplifiers:
+0.667V reference
The Illuminator Controller Circuit consists of the lamp
Error detection circuit for LPAS servo controller:
voltage selecting circuit, PWM circuit, lamp power driver
+4.00V reference and +2.5V reference
circuit, lamp monitoring circuit, and fan/thermal sensor
circuit.
All precision voltages are generated from the +15V
power supply. The total tolerance of all the precision
DC Voltage Filtering and Test Points
voltages is 2% ± 5 mV of the set point.
Each DC voltage from the Host module is filtered with a
10µF (35V) tantalum and 0.1µF (50V) ceramic capacitor.
All precision voltages are buffered by an LT1014 general
All of these capacitors are placed next to the connector.
purpose op-amp for the purpose of isolation and driving
capability.
Following is a list of all test points and their function:
Reference Designator Function 115VAC Circuit and Control
TP1 +12 volts voltage The 115VAC is supplied from the Accurus System
TP2 +24 volts voltage Power Supply. It is the secondary output of a transformer
TP3 +5 volts voltage which has a large inductance. The load of the 115VAC is
TP4 -15 volts voltage the Pressure/Vacuum Air Pump (MEDO) which also has
TP5 +15 volts voltage a large inductance.
TP6 17 volt ground
TP7 +17 volts voltage
TP8 ground
TP9 lamp2 current
TP10 lamp1 current
TP11 lamp2 set point
TP12 lamp1 set point
TP13 pressure 2 reading
TP14 pressure 1 reading
TP15 ground
TP16 pressure set point
TP17 servo error voltage
TP18 ground

906-2020-501 2-27
 ®

LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE

LEDs Common Communication Interface (J1)

The LEDs on the LPA/Illum Controller PCB give visual The signal on the common communication interface
feedback of the PCB operating status. They can be includes TX±, RX±, PDLUP*, SVREQ*, and XRST*.
mainly divided into two groups: voltage indicator and
signal status. The following list defines the LEDs and Watchdog Circuit
their represented signals: This PCB uses a LT691 watchdog IC. The main function
of this IC is to monitor the software activities and +5V.
DS1 To indicate +12 volts is alive
DS2 To indicate +24 volts is alive Programmable Interface Adapter (PIA)
DS3 To indicate +5 volts is alive Two PIAs are used on this PCB (PIA#1 and PIA#2).
+5V is above 4.65 volts. PIA#1 is the master PIA and configured as follows: Port
DS4 To indicate -15 volts is alive A is output, Port B is output, and Port C is input. During
DS5 To indicate +15 volts is alive power up, MRST generated by the Logic PLD holds
DS6 To indicate +17 volts is alive PIA#1 in the reset mode. When this IC is in the reset
+17 volts is within +15 to +19 volts mode, it inhibits WDSTB1 (watchdog strobe) and
DS7 WDOG indicator activates SRST* (software reset) signal.
Red when WDOG is active
DS8 Latched reset The WDSTB1, SRST*, EXP1_RST, EXP2_RST, and
Red when LRST is active ERR_RST signals are pulled down. During reset or
DS9 Operation status LED power up, these signals are set at a known state.
Blinks at 1Hz rate for normal operation
DS10 ASC solenoid Following is a list of the signal names and their
Voltage supplied to the ASC solenoid connector functions:
DS11 Output solenoid Voltage supplied to the
output solenoid connector PIA#1:
DS12 Directional solenoid Signal Name Input/Output Function
Voltage supplied to the directional WDSTB1 Output to Logic PLD.
solenoid connector STLED Output to Drive Status LED.
DS13 Illuminator Drawer Status CLRFLT Output to Logic PLD.
Red when drawer is out SRST* Output to Logic PLD.
DS14 Red Illuminator Temperature Status when EXP1_RST Output to reset Excessive
temperature exceeds 170°F Pressure 1 bit.
DS15 Lamp 1 enable EXP2_RST Output to reset Excessive
DS16 Lamp 2 enable Pressure 2 bit.
DS17 Air pump enable ERR_RST Output to reset Excessive
DS18 115VAC is alive Servo Error bit.
115VAC is applied to the PCB. KEYCLK Output to Logic PLD.
Clock signal for serial key.
Voltage Monitoring Circuits KEYDATA Output to Logic PLD.
The +15V, -15V, +24V, and +12V LEDs only indicate Data signal for serial key.
the existence of the voltage, not the voltage tolerance. ANA-SEL0 Output to Analog MUX.
Currently, these voltage tolerances are monitored on the Selects one of the four inputs.
Host module. ANA-SEL1 Output to Analog MUX.
Selects one of the four inputs.
+5 volts is monitored by the watchdog IC. +17 volts is +15VOK* Input from +15V monitoring circuit.
monitored by a voltage comparing circuit. If the +17 +24VOK* Input from +24V monitoring circuit.
volts is less than +15 volts or more than +19 volts, the V17LOK Input from +17V monitoring circuit.
V17OK signal is deactivated and fed back to the 115VACOK Input from 115VAC monitoring
microcontroller. If the 115VAC signal is less than 100 circuit.
volts, the 115VACOK signal is deactivated and fed back FAULT Input from Logic PLD; +15/-15
to the microcontroller. volts fault.
WDPOR* Input from Logic PLD.
Watchdog power on reset is activated.

2-28 906-2020-501
 ®
LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE
WDRST Input from Logic PLD.
Watchdog reset is activated.
KEYOK Input from Logic PLD.
Serial key input to PLD is correct.
PIA#2 is configured as follows: PortA is output, PortB is
output, the lower 4 bits of PortC is input, and higher 4
bits of PortC is output.
The PUMP_EN*, OUTPUT_EN, ASC_EN, DIRC_EN,
LMP1ENA, LMP2ENA, DACCL*, ENFLG*, PGMEM,
and SVREQ* signals are pulled down through a 2.2k
resistor. During reset or power up, these signals are set at
a known state.
PIA#2:
Signal NameInput/Output Function
Pump_en* Output to pump control circuit to
turn on the air pump.
Output-en Output to Output Solenoid driver.
Set the LPAS output pressure to the
controlled output port.
ASC-en Output to ASC solenoid driver.
Set the ASC port to 3.5±0.5 PSI
pressure.
DIRC-en Output to Directional solenoid driver.
Set the output of the pressure chamber to
the input of the proportional valve.
LMP1ENA Output to the lamp control circuit to
enable lamp #1.
LMP2ENA Output to the lamp control circuit to
enable lamp #2.
DACCL* Output to serial DAC. Clears all
DAC settings.
ENFLG* Output to microcontroller. (Enable flag)
If the PIA#2 get reset from the LRST
signal, this ENFLG* signal will indicate
to the microcontroller of the status.
OUT-FDBK* Input from the OUTPUT solenoid driver
circuit.
ASC-FDBK* Input from the ASC solenoid driver
circuit.
DIRC-FDBK* Input from the directional solenoid
driver circuit.
LMP1OPN Input from the lamp open monitoring
circuit. Lamp #1 is open.
LMP2OPN Input from the lamp open monitoring
circuit. Lamp #2 is open.
OVTEMP Input from the illuminator subframe
temperature monitoring circuit. Over
temperature condition exists.
DRWOUT Input from the illuminator subframe
drawer in/out detection circuit. Drawer
out condition exists.
906-2020-501
EXCES_PRE1*Input from pressure monitoring circuit.
Pressure sensed by transducer #1 is
higher than 165 mmHg.
EXCES_PRE2*Input from pressure monitoring circuit.
Pressure sensed by transducer #2 is
higher than 165 mmHg.
EXCEX_ERR* Input from servo error monitoring
circuit. Servo error voltage is greater
than 0.25 volts.
PGMEM Output to the Flash memory program
voltage.
SVREQ* Output to host module to request
attention from host.
LOW PRESSURE AIR CONTROLLER
Solenoid Drivers
There are three identical solenoid drivers on this PCB.
Each of the driver is intended to drive a 24VDC, 2 watt
solenoid. The control signal is from PIA #2. The TTL
logic signal controls the gate of the power FET to enable
+24 volts to be applied to the solenoid connector. The
diode connected from the drain of the FET to +24 volts is
to release the voltage peak generated by the coil in the
solenoid when the coil is being energized/de-energized.
All three gates of the FETs are also connected to the
WDPOR* signal. If the WDPOR* is activated at any
time, all three solenoids are de-energized, which is their
default position. Under this situation the ASC solenoid
will not let air pass the ASC port, the output of the LPAS
is from the mechanical regulator which is set at 30
mmHg @ 20 cc/min flow rate, and the directional
solenoid directs air from the pressured chamber to the
input of the mechanical regulator.
DAC
The 8 bit DAC8800 is used as the Digital-to-Analog
Converter which is controlled by the microcontroller. For
the pressure setting, the reference is at +5 volts. For the
lamp setting , the reference is at +2.62 volts.
Pressure Transducer and Instrumentation Amplifier
Two independent pressure transducers and
instrumentation amplifiers are used to create redundancy
for pressure monitoring and controlling. The transducers
are temperature compensated and calibrated silicon
pressure sensors. The transducers are powered by the +10
volts reference voltage. The full scale output of the
sensor is 40 mV for 375 mmHg (0.1066 mv/mmHg). The
differential voltage output from the transducer is sent to
the input of the instrumentation amplifier. The gain of the
amplifier is set at 227.24. The voltage/pressure ratio at
the output of the instrumentation amplifier is 24.2 mV/
2-29

LPA/ILLUMINATOR MODULE
mmHg. Due to the initial output offset of the pressure
transducer, 0.667 volts is added to the output of the
instrumentation amplifier. When the transducer's output
is 0 volts, the output of the instrumentation amplifier
would be 0.667 volts.
ILLUMINATOR CONTROLLER
There are two identical circuits for illuminator control.
Each circuit controls one of the two light bulbs. The
following description applies to both circuits.
Illuminator Set Point Control
During normal operation, the lamp intensity is controlled
by the microcontroller. LMP1SET signal from the 8 bit
DAC. 0 volts sets the lamp to the lowest intensity and
2.62 volts sets the lamp to the highest intensity. There is
a default voltage setting provided to the Illuminator
Controller in case a fault condition occurs. The default
voltage is set at 2.14 volts which will set the lamp to
approximately 80% of maximum intensity. The default
lamp set point voltage is derived from the VREF signal
from the output of the PWM IC. This signal is generated
from +17 volts. Both lamp set point voltages are sent to
the inputs of a MUX. If a fault condition exists
(LMPDFLT* activated), the output of the MUX is the
default setting point; otherwise, the microcontroller set
point is used.
The lamp supply voltage is the output of the PWM
controlled switching DC-DC Buck type converter. The
microcontroller controls the input set point of the PWM
and the output voltage of the switching circuit follows the
set point change.
The ratio of the set point voltage to the output voltage is
1 volt set point voltage sends an output of 5.26 volts to
the lamp.
2-30
®
PWM (Pulse Width Modulator)
The lamp used in the illuminator requires slow turn on/
off. The lamp set point signal is filtered by an RC circuit
to ensure a slow turn on for the lamp. The PWM chip
(SG3527ADW) provides this soft start feature.
The shutdown signal to the PWM chip is a logic
combination of the lamp enable, lamp default, and drawer
out signal. The lamp is shut down when the drawer out
signal is activated.
Switching circuit
Two power FETs are used as power switches. The gate of
the FETs are controlled by the output of the PWM chip.
The zener diode prevents VGS from going beyond 12
volts.
Inductors L1 and L2, and capacitors C19 and C20 store
energy when the switching FETs are turned on. When the
FETs are off, the inductors and capacitors release the
stored energy to the lamp. This LC circuit also filters the
ripples of the switching voltage.
Diode CR7 releases the negative-going voltage generated
by the coil inductor.
Current Sensing
The lamp current information is fed back to the
microcontroller for monitoring purposes. The current of
the lamp is converted to voltage and the voltage turns on/
off a FET. The FET is turned on when the lamp is turned
on. A ferrite material is used in between the current
sensing voltage and the input of the op-amp for noise
isolation.
906-2020-501
 ®

U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE

ground plane which is common to all DC supply voltages.

U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE
The U/S-Diathermy module interfaces electrical signals
between the Host module and U/S handpieces and
diathermy probes through the handpiece connector panel.
The basic functions performed by the U/S-Diathermy
module are as follows:
• Monitors incoming DC power.
• Receives software commands from and sends status to
the Host module.
• Generates electrical energy to drive U/S handpieces
and diathermy probes.
• Measures handpiece ID resistor value.
• Calibrates U/S handpiece power during tuning.
• Detects U/S handpiece ground fault.
• Monitors handpiece output feedback signals.
Figure 2-14 is the block diagram of the Accurus® U/S-
Diathermy Module which is essentially comprised of five
basic blocks: U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB, U/S Driver
PCB, Erbe Coag PCB (Diathermy PCB), Phaco Backplane
PCB, and Handpiece Connector Panel cable assembly.
Phaco Backplane PCB
The Backplane PCB provides the intra-module
communication link and DC power distribution to the
U/S Driver and Erbe Coagulation PCBs. It has a single
The backplane is entirely passive and makes power
available to the cooling fan for the U/S Driver PCB.
Cooling Fan
The U/S-Diathermy module has a cooling fan which is
operated on +12V DC. This fan is mounted on the card
cage closest to the U/S Driver PCB heatsinks to provide
direct air flow to the heat-dissipating components of the
power amplifier circuitry. The fan is on as long as +12V
is available on the Backplane PCB.
Handpiece Connector Cable Assembly
Cable W-43 provides electrical connections for U/S
handpiece output power, handpiece ID, and calibration
data reading. It also provides connection for the
diathermy output power. Each handpiece cable assembly
is bundled together and routed from the U/S-Diathermy
card cage to the lower front panel assembly.
High voltage signals are physically separated from the
low voltage signals with their own jacketed cable. The
redundant chassis grounding is maintained to the panel
connector through the connector case as well as an
internal pin connection to a chassis grounding lug.
The two banana-jack type connectors on the connector
panel are connected to the Coagulation PCB. The two
wires are wrapped around the ferrite core nearest to the
banana jacks to reduce EMI, and then heatshrinked to
meet IEC601 safety requirements.

ENABLE, PU, PD
STATUS
ACH5:6 Diathermy
REV3 Diathermy
PCB
U/S-Diathermy
Kernel Power Watchdog
Controller PCB
Kernel Signal
Reset

BA0:3

Module Revision
BRD, BWR
(00:99; future)

BDEN1
U/S Driver U/S 1 Drive
General 5VOK (frag/phaco)
Status 12VOK TEST, DISABLE, FPUP
PCB
15VOK U/S 2 Drive
FRQ
Fan 24VOK (frag/phaco)
ACH1:4
REV2

U/S Diathermy U/S Diathermy Power (85V)

Power (85V)

Figure 2-14
U/S-Diathermy Module Block Diagram

906-2020-501 2-31

U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE
U/S-DIATHERMY CONTROLLER PCB
The U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB controls the U/S
Driver PCB and the Erbe Coagulation PCB via the
Backplane PCB. All power adjustment and control
functions for the ultrasonic handpieces and the diathermy
probes are communicated to the U/S Driver and Erbe
Coagulation PCBs through the Controller PCB. The
common DC power and communication signal cables are
connected to the backplane PCB. It is the central point of
all communication within the U/S-Diathermy module.
Two way communication is achieved by RS422 serial
communication link.
The U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB is essentially
comprised of the 80C196KC20 kernel, supply voltage
monitors and reference voltage, watchdog timer and 5V
monitor, line decoders, programmable input/output
devices, buffers, analog mux, and filters for incoming
signals to the controller.
Controller PCB Kernel
The Controller kernel circuitry is the common circuitry of
the four Accurus® Controller PCB designs. For detailed
information on the kernel, refer to Controller PCB Kernel
theory of operation discussed previously.
Input DC Power Connector
DC power connector J1 receives system common DC
voltages from the Host Power/Signal Distribution PCB
via cable W-6. These DC voltages are distributed from
the Controller PCB to the Backplane PCB via edge
connector P1 and then to the U/S Driver and Coagulation
PCBs. Test points for each of the DC voltages are located
at the top side of the Controller PCB close to connector
J1. Following is the description of these test points:
TP1,TP7 GND (Common Ground)
TP2 +15 Volt
TP3 -15 Volt
TP4 +5 Volt
TP5 +12 Volt
TP6 +24 Volt
+85V DC power is supplied directly to the Backplane
PCB from the system power supply; the Controller PCB
has no access to this voltage.
Supply Voltage Monitor
Each DC supply voltage is monitored at the input stage
for presence and compliance within ±10% of the nominal
values. Window detection circuitry is provided for ±15V,
+12V, and +24V supplies. +15V and -15V supplies are
2-32
®
checked individually, but the monitor outputs are
combined and only one status signal (V15OK*) is
generated. The supply monitor status is fed back to the
microcontroller for each supply.
The 5V supply is monitored by the watchdog timer IC
(LTC691) for a low 5V condition. When +5V supply
drops below 4.65V, the watchdog timer generates a reset
signal.
Green LEDs are used to provide visual indication of
these voltage OK signals. These LEDs are placed on the
top side of the Controller PCB for easy identification.
The LED assignment for each voltage OK signals is as
follows:
DS1 +5V OK
DS2 +12V OK
DS3 ±15V OK
DS4 +24V OK
Signal Interface Connector
The U/S-Diathermy module interfaces with the Host
module through connector J2 via cable W-5. All signals
going through connector J2 are ESD protected by U8 for
overvoltage and undervoltage conditions. To reduce EMI,
each signal is bypassed to ground through a 0.001µF
capacitor placed near the signal connector on the
Controller PCB.
Input signals PDLUP* and XRST4* are filtered by
10Kohm resistors and 0.1µF capacitors to prevent
inadvertent response to glitches which can be picked up
in the signal cable.
Jumper JP1 is used for simulating the External Reset
(XRST4*) signal when the signal cable is not connected
to connector J2. With the jumper plug on, the signal at
U9-13 is logic high and the reset is not asserted. With the
jumper plug off, the signal is logic low and the reset is
asserted.
Jumper JP2 is used to simulate the Pedal Up (PDLUP*)
signal when the signal cable is not connected to
connector J2. With the jumper plug on, the signal at U9-1
is logic high and the pedal up signal is not detected. With
the jumper plug off, the signal is logic low and the pedal
up signal is detected.
Jumpers are provided for testing and simulation purposes
only. Jumper plugs should be removed after use and
should not be used during normal operation.
906-2020-501
 ®
U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE
Reference Voltage
There is one precision voltage reference IC(AD586) on
the Controller PCB which generates 5V reference. The
5V reference is used for the input voltage window
detection circuitry, revision resistor reading, and
microcontroller's ADC reference input. This reference is
also used for generating a 2.5V reference which is used
for +12V and +24V supply voltage monitor circuitry.
The AD586 is supplied from the analog +15V supply.
Both 5V reference and 2.5V reference voltages are
buffered by LM324 OP-Amp for isolation and driving
capabilities.
Buffered Address, Data, and Offboard Enable
The U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB is capable of
accessing four separate PCBs. This access is being made
by U30, a 3-to-8 line decoder (74HC138) which is
enabled by IO2*. When IO2* is high, every output will
be high. When IO2* is low, one of four Board Enable
lines (BDEN1*-BDEN4*) will be selected according to
the address bits (A4-A6). These enable lines are
connected via connector P1 to the appropriate PCB.
Currently, the U/S Driver PCB is selected through
BDEN1* line.
Within each PCB, the U/S-Diathermy Controller can read
or write data to 16 different devices. Once the PCB is
accessed through a Board Enable line, the particular
device to be communicated with on that PCB is selected
via four Buffered Address lines (BA0-BA3). These
address lines are buffered by U28 (74HCT244) and sent
to the appropriate PCB via connector P1.
All intra-module data is transferred via the 8-bit Buffered
Data bus (BD0-BD7). This data bus is buffered by U29
(74HCT245) and sent to the appropriate PCB. The
direction control of this bidirectional bus interface is
accomplished by the OFFBDRD* signal which is
generated from the Address Decoder PLD. When
OFFBDRD* is low, U29 receives data from an external
PCB. When OFFBDRD* is high, U29 sends data to an
external PCB.
Buffered Read and Write
Read and write control of the selected device on the
accessed PCB is accomplished by the Buffered Read
(BRD*) and Buffered Write (BWR*) lines. These lines
are active low and driven by U28 (74HCT244).
906-2020-501
Onboard Frequency Counter
The U/S-Diathermy module has the ability to measure the
frequency of the applied handpiece signal. The FRQ
signal is a square wave of the exact handpiece frequency
that is generated on the U/S Driver PCB. The Controller
then measures frequency by counting the number of
gated pulses (GFRQ) that exist over a known period of
time. This length of time is controlled by the
FRQGATE* signal.
The ability of the Controller PCB to measure the
frequency of the handpiece signal allows for automatic
calibration of the voltage controlled oscillator on the U/S
Driver PCB.
Ultrasound Test and Disable
Both the TEST* and DISABLE signals are generated
through Port A of the Programmable I/O, U22 on the
Controller PCB. These signals are used by the U/S Driver
PCB to control the U/S handpiece operation.
TEST* is an active low signal and used to override the
FPUP (Foot Pedal Up) signal on the U/S Driver PCB.
The DISABLE signal disables the U/S handpiece output
power when applied.
Diathermy Control and Status Read
Control of the Erbe Coagulation PCB is accomplished
with the active low signals: POWER UP (PU*), POWER
DOWN (PD*), and ENABLE (ENABLE*). These
control lines are generated from Port A of U22 (PIO) and
sent to the Coagulation PCB via the Backplane PCB.
The STATUS* signal is generated on the Coagulation
PCB and is read through Port C of U23 (PIO) on the
Controller PCB. This active low signal is a fault
indication from the IEC601 compliance check circuitry
on the Coagulation PCB.
Analog Channel Input
The analog feedback signals generated from the U/S
Driver and Coagulation PCBs are fed back to the
Controller PCB via the Backplane PCB. These signals
are ESD protected by U26 for overvoltage and
undervoltage conditions. They are also filtered by the
resistor network R64 and capacitor network C62 to
suppress any noise that may be coupled with the signals.
2-33
 ®

U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE

Each handpiece has a certain calibration configuration

U/S-DRIVER PCB
necessary for proper stroke at 100% power. This
calibration is accomplished by three fusible links wired
The U/S Driver PCB performs all electrical processes
within the handpiece connector. Each configuration
necessary to drive a variety of U/S handpieces. Two
provides a low-level digital signal (PROG0, PROG1,
interdependent control loops are used to control the
PROG2, and PGND) recognition to the U/S Driver for
stroke of the U/S handpiece. These are the voltage
increase or decrease of nominal handpiece voltage. These
control loop and the frequency control loop. The voltage
signals provide the percentage variation (-15% to +20%)
control loop monitors and maintains the appropriate
of nominal handpiece drive voltage necessary for
handpiece drive voltage. The frequency control loop
calibrated stroke. The digital signals (PROG0, PROG1,
maintains a continuous tuning of the handpiece to
PROG2) are read through octal buffer U6.
compensate for handpiece loading and drift. These
control loops are only partially contained within the U/S
The low level handpiece input signals are isolated
Driver PCB. The U/S Driver PCB contains circuitry to
through a relay for protection from the high handpiece
detect fault conditions, disable power output, and
voltage. These digital signals are isolated whenever the
communicate the fault to the Controller PCB.
footpedal is depressed for handpiece activation.
Handpiece ID Resistors, Calibration & Input
Dual Digital To Analog Converter
Isolation
During the tuning process, the module determines the
Prior to tuning an ultrasonic handpiece the module must
correct operational frequency and control set point for the
identify which type of handpiece is connected and its
handpiece operation. The frequency is set by two analog
voltage calibration. The U/S-Diathermy module reads
control lines COARSE and FINE. These analog signals
each U/S handpiece port any time the footpedal is in the
are setup by the dual digital-to-analog converter U17.
“up” position. The “up” position is determined by the
The frequency is initially set by the COARSE signal then
FootPedal UP (FPUP) signal which is generated by a
during real time operation all frequency adjustments
microswitch located in the footswitch.
made for load and temperature compensation are done by
the FINE signal. The FINE signal is where control loop
Each ultrasonic handpiece has low level logic and analog
servoing takes place. Although the signal is dynamic in
signals embedded in the handpiece Lemo connector for
nature, it should be a DC level from 2 to 5 volts. The
the purpose of handpiece ID recognition and output
FINE signal is available at testpoint TP6.
power calibration. Recognition of the handpiece is
determined by the value of a resistor inside the Lemo
Voltage Controlled Oscillator and Scale Amp
connector. The value of the resistor informs the module
The COARSE and FINE signals are applied to the
which handpiece is present. The resistor forms a voltage
function generator IC U11 which has been configured as
divider with a 5.11 Kohm resistor on the U/S Driver PCB
a voltage-to-frequency counter. Frequency of the
and is connected between the Buffered 10V Reference
generated sinusoidal waveform is proportional to these
(B10VREF) and the Calibration Resistance (CALR)
signals. The function generator creates a sinusoidal
lines. The reading of the handpiece resistance is done by
voltage with an amplitude of approximately 1.5 Vrms
measuring the voltage across 5.11 Kohm resistors. This is
and a frequency with a minimum span of 25 to 65K Hz.
done with U5, U4, and U9. U5 provides input buffering,
This voltage is then passed through scale amplifier U10
then one of the three signals is selected through analog
with a gain of 2 to create an offset sinusoidal signal of
multiplexor #1 (U4) and finally scaled by U9 with a scale
approximately 3.0 Vrms.
factor of 0.482. The scaled voltage is measured by the U/
S-Diathermy Controller PCB on Analog Channel 3
Multiplying Digital to Analog Converter
(ACH3).
All handpiece voltage adjustments occur through the 12
bit multiplying digital-to-analog converter U1. The
The module has predetermined handpiece parameters
multiplying DAC takes the voltage (USSIG) present at
within its memory such as nominal handpiece voltage
the VREF pin of U1 and multiplies it by the ratio n/4096.
and tuning frequency range. Therefore, once the
The variable n is the 12 bit data written to the multiplying
handpiece type is known, the above parameters are also
DAC from the data bus.
known.

2-34 906-2020-501
 ®
U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE
Analog Switch and Zero Crossing Detector
U/S power is enabled by analog switch U2. This switch is
controlled by the ZEN signal which is created by the zero
crossing detector.
The zero crossing detector is comprised of U13 and U19.
U13 generates a TTL compatible square wave from USSIG.
U19 creates the ZEN signal by clocking the enable signal
present at TP5 with the above square wave. Also at this
point, the square wave is buffered by U16 to create the FRQ
signal used in frequency measurements done by the
Controller PCB.
U/S Enable Logic, Relay Select, and Relay Drivers
The U/S enable logic is created by U16 and U18. The
U/S enable signal present at TP5 is a logical function of the
following signals: TEST*, FPUP, USEN, and DISABLE. In
addition to the above enable logic, U/S power can only be
enabled when there is no ground fault condition.
The USEN and K1-K7 (Relay Enable) signals are created
by 8 bit latch U7. The USEN and K1-K7 signals are
generated by U/S-Diathermy module software to select the
U/S port and enable U/S power. The relays signals are
buffered by U8 prior to activating each of the relays.
Power Amplifier
The power amplifier can provide approximately 45 watts of
power over a frequency range of 25 to 65 KHz. The
amplifier consists of a voltage gain stage (Q4 and Q3)
operating in a class A darlington configuration. The second
stage is the power gain stage (Q1 and Q2) operating in a
class B emitter follower configuration.
Step Up Transformer, Voltage & Output Select Relay
The step up transformer has a two tap primary turn ratio to
raise the AC power amplifier output voltage from 23 Vrms
to a maximum of approximately 340 to 390 Vrms applied to
the handpiece from the high voltage tap. The primary tap is
selected by relay K5.
Following the transformer are two relays which steer the
high voltage (USA, USB) signals to the appropriate U/S
port.
Handpiece Voltage and Current Feedback
The module utilizes two interdependent control loops for
maintaining real time tuning of the handpiece. The
information necessary for these control loops is contained
within the handpiece voltage and current.
906-2020-501
The feedback voltage is measured at the primary side of the
transformer and is related to the actual handpiece voltage by
the turns ratio of the transformer. This primary voltage is
scaled to appropriate levels and then passed to rms/dc
converter U29. The output of the rms/dc converter is
available at TP2.
The handpiece current is detected by resistor R6 present in
the primary side of the transformer. This current is related to
the actual handpiece current by the transformer turns ratio.
The voltage across R6 is scaled by U27 operated in a
differential mode to provide input to the rms/dc converter
U28. The output of the rms/dc converter is available at TP4.
Analog Feedback Signals
The U/S-Diathermy module has the ability to read various
analog signals to provide the means of calibration and real
time diagnostics. These signals are present at multiplexor #2
(U3) which is selected by the MUX2* signal. These signals
include 10VREF, COARSE, FINE, scaled VBIAS (Power
Amp Voltage Bias), scaled +85V, FCOMP (Filtered
Compliance), and HPV9T(Handpiece Voltage x Nine
Tenths). The multiplexor output is scaled by U9 with a scale
factor of 0.482. The scaled voltage is measured by the U/S-
Diathermy Controller PCB on Analog Channel 4 (ACH4).
At system power up the U/S-Diathermy module software
performs a power up test by measuring 10VREF, VBIAS
and +85V for appropriate levels. It also checks the
functionality of the dual DAC by measuring the COARSE
and FINE voltages.
Ground Fault Detection
The ground fault circuitry detects the condition of a broken
earth ground connection between the handpiece and chassis
ground. A ground fault can only exist when both the
SHIELD and GND connections are broken. If this occurs
then a voltage across the stray capacitance between the now
floating handpiece shell and chassis ground is measured.
This voltage GFAULT is indicated at the return side of the
transformer. GFAULT is scaled down by the R/C network
and compared to a 5V dc reference voltage. GFAULT must
exceed approximately 38.5 Vrms for a fault to occur.
2-35

U/S-DIATHERMY MODULE
COAGULATION PCB
The Erbe Coagulation PCB generates the electrical
signals necessary to drive different types of diathermy
handpieces. This PCB contains safety circuitry to detect a
fault condition and communicate the fault to the U/S-
Diathermy Controller PCB.
Level Converter and Up/Down Counter
IC1 converts +5V inputs to +15V outputs and serves as a
linear receiver for the three control signals (PD, PU,
COAGEN*) from the U/S-Diathermy Controller PCB.
The Power Up Counter Control {PU) and Power Down
Counter Control (PD) signals control the directional
count of the cascaded 4 bit counters to either increase or
decrease the output power.
IC3 and IC4 are programmable 4 bit up/down counters
cascaded to create a single 8 bit binary counter. The
program inputs to these IC’s are connected to GND so
that the counter always starts out at 0 count when reset.
PU and PD are gated through IC2 and then connected to
IC3 which controls the lower four bits. The carry over
bits of IC3 are used to control the count up or down of
IC4 which controls the upper four bits.
Digital to Analog Converter
The binary outputs of the up/down counter become the
input data for the 8-bit digital-to-analog converter IC5.
Each single binary bit increase at the input equals
approximately 0.02 volts increase at the output. The
LDAC*, WR*, and CS* controls are tied low so that any
change on the input is immediately registered on the
output voltage. The output from the DAC is used as a
voltage input to the pulse width modulator.
The COAGPWR (Coagulation Output) is an analog
feedback signal that is measured by the U/S-Diathermy
Controller PCB for verification of the set voltage.
Pulse Width Modulator
IC7 is a hybrid Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) that
generates a fixed frequency output with a variable pulse
width (duty cycle). The output of this circuit U-CON is
enabled only if the watchdog timer is adequately
retriggered and the +85V supply does not exceed its rated
voltage tolerance limit.
Part of the power supply voltage U-PS is fed back to the
PWM to adjust the duty cycle of the output voltage control
U-CON at a point coincident with the sawtooth waveform
from the R14/C41 time constant. The current feedback
signal I-PS is used to limit the peak current of Q4.
2-36
®
Oscillator and One-shot
IC8 and the associated passive components comprise a
free running oscillator. R31, TP2 (potentiometer), and
C17 determine the frequency of the oscillator. The output
of the oscillator goes to a one-shot. IC9 converts the 50%
duty cycle oscillator output to a single with a short pulse
width of 327ns. IC10 is a dual power MOSFET driver
that inverts the one-shot output to generate positive
pulses to the output switching transistor Q4.
Watchdog Timer and Overvoltage Protection
One half of IC9 (one-shot) is utilized in the watchdog
timer circuitry. Unless retriggered by the COAGEN*
signal every 300 ms, IC9 will time out and reset the DAC
preventing any power being sent to the diathermy
handpiece. It also resets the other half of IC9 which
prevents IC10 from generating positive pulses to Q4.
This will eventually shut down the PWM (IC7).
Comparator IC6 is used to monitor the power supply
voltage to ensure that it does not exceed a set limit of 60
volts maximum. If U-PS exceeds 60 volts, the
comparator output will turn off transistor Q3, which in
turn will shut down the PWM and open relay RLY1
preventing any power being sent to the diathermy
handpiece. A status signal is sent to the U/S-Diathermy
Controller to continuously monitor the state of this
circuitry. For normal operation, the comparator is set by
CAUTEN. When the comparator is set, it will turn on
Q3, which in turn will close RLY1.
Peak Detector
The peak voltage at primary side of the transformer is
generated from the peak detection circuitry which is
comprised of IC13 and IC12. This signal is used by the
microcontroller ADC for diathermy output integrity
monitoring. The UPRIM signal represents the primary side
voltage of the transformer converted to a DC voltage and is
between 1.11 to 3.62 volts with the 75 ohm ±1% load over
the range of 30% to 100% power setting. If UPRIM exceeds
4.3 volts (which is equivalent to 47.3 Vrms across the 75
ohm load), the system generates an error message and shuts
down diathermy handpiece operation.
Switching Regulator
Q1, Q2, and the associated discrete components function
as a switching regulator supplying the required voltage
relative to the requested output energy. The output of the
PWM (U-CON) is utilized to turn on Q2 and Q1. The
power supply signal U-PS is fed back to the PWM. U-
CON is then generated with the negative going edge
based on the summed value of U-PS and U-DAC. The
voltage generated from the +85V supply is sent to the
primary side of the transformer T1.
906-2020-501
 ®

FRONT PANEL MODULE

• Monitors the up/down arrow keys and reporting key

FRONT PANEL MODULE
codes.
• Monitors the touch screen and reports the X,Y
The Accurus® Front Panel Module interfaces between the
coordinates of point of touch.
Host module and the color Graphics LCD. The module
• Monitors remote control serial bit stream and reports
also receives control information from the user via the
remote key codes.
touch screen, up/down arrow keys, and an infrared
• Illuminates the handpiece/probe in-use indicator
remote control. The Front Panel module consists of the
LEDs.
following major sections: Front Panel Controller PCB,
7-Segment Display PCB, Keypad LED PCB (202-1511-
Figure 2-15 shows a block diagram of the Front Panel
501 only), Handpiece LED PCB, Touch Screen, and
module. The Front Panel Controller receives DC power
Graphics LCD. NOTE: There are two different Front
from the Host Power/Signal Distribution PCB through
Panel Modules used on the Accurus®: PN 202-1329-
the system common power cable. The communication
501(old version) and PN 202-1511-501 (new version).
between the Controller and Host module is done through
Functionally the two modules operate the same and
the system common signal cable. All system level
the following theory covers both except where noted
commands and data are transferred through the RS422
otherwise.
serial communication link. Once a command is received
from the Host, the Controller performs the appropriate
The following basic functions are performed by the
actions to generate control signals for the 7-Segment
module:
Display PCB, Handpiece LED PCB, and other associated
hardware.
• Maintains communication with the host module.
• Provides the front panel color graphics display.
• Displays the LPAS, Diathermy, and Illuminator
setting information.

Eject
Backlight Cassette
Aspiration
Eject (pushbutton) Port (2x)

Keypad LED PCB

Handpiece
(FP Module 202-1511-501 only) "000" - "999" globals (5x) LED PCB Pneumatic
Connection (6x)

Up/Down Arrows Electrical

(pushbutton) Connection (6x)
7-Segment
7-Segment Drive
LED PCB
Up/Down Status
LED Drive

IR Remote
Eject

IR Remote

Touch X,Y Analog Reset

X,Y Position Front Panel
Screen
Controller PCB Service Request

Inverter (FP Module General Status

Kernel Power 202-1511-501 only)
Remote Serial
Kernel Signal
(future)

Module Revision Backlight

(00:99; future) Power
LCD Power
Graphics
LCD Signal LCD
Figure 2-15
Front Panel Module Block Diagram

906-2020-501 2-37

FRONT PANEL MODULE
FRONT PANEL CONTROLLER PCB
The Front Panel Controller PCB consists primarily of the
Kernel circuitry, Touch Screen Interface, Handpiece LED
Driver, 7-segment Display Driver, and LCD Power
Supply. It resides on the back side of the LCD screen and
provides cable interfaces to other front panel module
PCBs and assemblies.
Status LEDs are provided for detecting incoming DC
voltages and displaying software activities. The
Controller provides the LCD power to the Graphics LCD
which receives the LCD video signal directly from host
LCD Driver PCB (EXM-23). It receives X/Y position
data from the Touch Screen, and up/down status and IR
remote signal from the 7-segment Display PCB.
The Controller generates 7-segment drive signals to the
7-segment Display PCB to display the parametric values
of the global functions. It also sends LED drive signals to
the Handpiece LED PCB to indicate the probe/handpiece
connector in-use. The cassette eject signal is sent to the
Controller via the LED PCB.
Controller PCB Kernel
The Controller kernel circuitry is the common circuitry of
the four Accurus® Controller PCB designs. For detailed
information on the kernel, refer to Controller PCB Kernel
theory of operation discussed previously.
Touch Screen Interface
To read the X/Y coordinates of a point of touch, the X
screen is first biased with BIASX and GNDX signals by
switching X+ to VCC (+5V) and X- to GND. With the X
screen biased, the Y screen is floated to become a pickup
contact at any position over the entire screen. When the
screens are touched, a voltage divider is created to raise
the potential of the floating screen to a certain voltage.
This voltage is sent through a low pass filter to the
80C196KC's internal Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
which yields the X coordinate (XCH). To read the Y
coordinate (YCH), the operation repeats itself by biasing
the Y screen with BIASY and GNDY signals and
floating the X screen.
The task of biasing and floating the X/Y screens is
controlled by software through the 82C55 Programmable
I/O, U14. The software accomplishes this task by
alternatively turning a pair of dual (N- and P- Channel)
MOSFETs (U3 and U4) on and off at appropriate times.
The signal interface between the Front Panel Controller
and the touch screen is done through connector J1.
2-38
®
Membrane Key Interface
The up/down arrow keys are arranged in a 4-row by 3-
column matrix. The task of scanning the keys is
performed by software through the Port B of PIO #1
(U14) and PIO #2 (U11). At a rate (multiples of 10 msec)
defined by the Host, the 80C196KC (U20) scans the
keys. Scanning is performed by setting all column lines
high first, and then scrolling a logic zero through the
columns. After each scroll the signals at ROW1, ROW2,
ROW3, and ROW4 are read and stored away.
Upon completion of one scan, software analyzes the
stored row data (5 x 2 = 10 bits). If all bits are high and
the keys are untouched, then the task exists. In order to
detect a valid touch, only one out of 10 bits is allowed to
be low. When a valid key is detected, its associated key
code is stored.
The keys are scanned again in 10 msec. If the same key is
found to be depressed, its code value is placed into a
transmit buffer in the proper format to be transmitted to
the Host.
DC to AC Inverter
U37 is the DC to AC inverter device. Its input terminal is
hardwired to +12V DC and the outputs are connected to
the Graphics LCD screen through connector J8 to drive
two hot cathode fluorescent tubes.
7-Segment Display Drive
The common segment data lines (SEGA-SEGG, SEGDP)
are MOSFET driven signals of the corresponding SA-SG,
SDP logic signals generated from Port A of PIO #1
(U14). These signals are transmitted to the 7-Segment
Display PCB along with other control signals via
connector J3.
BA0, BA1, BA2, BAD0, BRST* are all buffered by the
non-inverting buffer U12 for signal driving capability
and sent to the 7-Segment Display PCB. DRV3CS* and
DRV4CS* signals are generated by the address decoder
PLD U19.
Handpiece LED Control
The handpiece LED enable signals HPLED1-HPLED12,
CASLED1, and CASLED2 are generated by 8-bit
addressable latches U30 and U29. These LED control
signals are sent to the Handpiece LED PCB via connector
J7. The CASS_SW status signal from the Handpiece
LED PCB is read through Port C (Bit 7) of the PIO #2.
906-2020-501
 ®
FRONT PANEL MODULE
Voltage Detection and Monitor
The input voltage monitor circuitry is provided for +24V
and +12V supplies. R8 and R5 develop a voltage divider
for +24V and the scaled voltage is fed back to the ADC
input of the 80C196KC for monitoring. Likewise, R7 and
R6 develop a voltage divider for +12V and the scaled
voltage is fed back to the ADC input of the 80C196KC
for monitoring. These two supply voltages are also
visually monitored by DS3 (+24VOK) and DS4
(+12VOK).
The 5V supply is monitored by the watchdog timer IC
(LTC691) for low 5V condition. When the +5V supply
drops below 4.65V, the watchdog timer generates a reset
signal and causes the Misc. Logic PLD to issue a RST
signal.
LCD Inverter PCB
The LCD Inverter connects directly to the Front Panel
Controller PCB and provides power to the LCD
Backlight tubes.
SEVEN SEGMENT DISPLAY PCB
The 7-Segment Display PCB interfaces with the Front
Panel Controller PCB and is used to display the
parametric values of the global functions of the
Accurus®. This PCB contains the numeric LED displays,
backlight LEDs, and infrared receiver for remote control.
NOTE: For 202-1511-501 Front Panel Modules, the
backlight LEDs are located on the Keypad LED PCB.
Numeric LEDs
There are 15 numeric LED (Light Emitting Diode)
displays on the PCB. All numeric displays are green 7-
segment LEDs with right decimal point and are arranged
into five separate banks. Each bank consists of three
numeric LEDs. Following is the LED assignment for
each bank:
DS1, DS2, DS3 Gas Forced Infusion Setting
DS4, DS5, DS6 Fluid/Air Exchange Setting
DS7, DS8, DS9 Diathermy Power Setting
DS10, DS11, DS12 Illuminator #1 Intensity Setting
DS13, DS14, DS15 Illuminator #2 Intensity Setting
The numeric display data is transmitted by the Host to
the Front Panel Controller which performs ASCII to 7-
segment conversion and then displays the data. All
numeric LEDs are time-multiplexed on common segment
data lines. The segment data is sent through Port A of
906-2020-501
U14 (82C55) on the Controller PCB. This data is then fed
into high current driver circuit on the Controller PCB and
sent to the 7-segment Display PCB via cable W-26. The
segment data is then presented to the LEDs through
current limiting resistors R1-R8.
Since the LEDs share common data lines, only one LED
can be enabled at a given time. Each numeric LED is
addressable by DRV <0: 15> signals which are generated
through the 8-bit addressable latch (U1, U2). The Front
Panel module allows for ON, OFF , DIM, and BRIGHT
control of each numeric display through these "DRV"
signals. To toggle between dim (normal) and bright mode
of the numeric displays, the BRIGHT signal generated
from the controller is used. When BRIGHT is low,
PGND (PG1-PG4) connections to U1 & U2 are floating
and the numeric displays are dim. When BRIGHT is
high, PGNDs are connected to GND and the numeric
displays are bright.
Backlight LEDs
The 7-segment Display PCB contains 10 green LEDs for
the purpose of backlighting the up/down arrow keys. Five
sets of up/down arrow keys are provided on the Upper
Front Elastomer Keypad which is placed between the
Display Upper Panel and the Switch Layer Touch Screen.
Each set of up/down arrow keys are used for either
increasing or decreasing the respective power setting
indicated on the numeric displays. The LEDs illuminate
through the transparent touch screen panel with
membrane switches and remain on as long as +5V is
present on the PCB.
The intensity of the backlighting LEDs are set by the
current limiting resistor network RN1. Using a resistor
network allows easy replacement of the current limiting
resistors if the brightness of all LEDs needs changing at
the same time.
Remote Control Receiver
The infrared (IR) receiver circuitry for detecting infrared
signals from the remote control is provided on the
7-segment Display PCB. U3 is an IR light detector
photocell device and receives the infrared rays through its
photo-diode and performs all the necessary amplification,
filtering, and pulse detecting internally. This device
outputs a TTL compatible signal representing the envelop
of the infrared signal.
2-39

FRONT PANEL MODULE
Interface Connector and Test Points
20-pin PCB connector J1 is installed on the solder side of
the 7-segment Display PCB and provides a +5V power
connection and signal interface from the Front Panel
Controller to this PCB via cable W-26.
There are two test points available on the PCB. TP1 is
assigned for +5V measurement, and TP2 is for GND
connection.
HANDPIECE LED PCB
The Handpiece LED PCB interfaces with the Front Panel
Controller PCB. The PCB is used to indicate the in-use
status of the probes and handpieces. The PCB contains
the handpiece indicator LEDs and cassette eject switch.
Handpiece Indicator LEDs
There are twelve green LEDs for the purpose of
identifying the active handpieces and probes in-use and
two LEDs for the cassette usage status. All fourteen
LEDs are individually controlled by HPLED1-HPLED12
and CASLED1, CASLED2 signals received from the
front panel controller PCB. These LEDs are physically
positioned to match with the cut-outs in the lower front
panel gasket.
The intensity of the backlighting LEDs are set by the
current limiting resistor network R1. Using a resistor
network allows easy replacement of the current limiting
resistors if the brightness of the LEDs needs to be
changed all at the same time.
Cassette Eject Switch
The cassette eject switch which is used on the Handpiece
LED PCB is a momentary switch with normally open
contacts. The switch contains a green backlight LED
which is also current-limited by resistor R1. The switch
LED remains on as long as +5V power is available on the
PCB.
2-40
®
When the switch is depressed, the CASS_SW signal is
sent back to the Front Panel Controller PCB so that the
Host module can take an appropriate action with the Air/
Fluid module.
Interface Connector
20-pin PCB connector J1 is installed on the solder side of
the Handpiece LED PCB and provides +5V power
connection and signal interface from the Front Panel
Controller PCB to this PCB via cable W-27.
SWITCH LAYER TOUCH SCREEN
The touch screen is a 4-wire Analog Resistive Touch
Screen (ARTS). It consists of two thin sheets of plastic
(X and Y screens), each with a special coating of
transparent resistive material on one side. The sheets are
sandwiched together with the resistive coating in
between, but restrained from touching each other by a
matrix of small clear spacers. Static protection is made on
all four places of the ARTS through the grounding strap
to chassis.
The X and Y signals from ARTS are sent to the Front
Panel Controller PCB individually and digitized to
provide a resolution of 1024 points each. The Front Panel
module can scan the ARTS at programmable rate of 1 to
10 Hz. The Front Panel module processes the user inputs
and reports the X/Y coordinates of the point of touch to
the Host module via the serial communication.
There is a 2-by-5 membrane switch matrix residing on
the touch screen assembly. The module can scan all
switches at a programmable rate of 1 to 10 Hz through
ROW1-ROW5 and CLMN1-CLMN2 signals and report
the key codes to the Host module via the serial
communication link.
906-2020-501
 ®

SECTION THREE
PARTS LOCATION AND DISASSEMBLY

GENERAL INFORMATION The following procedures provide instructions on

disassembling the Accurus®. Refer to Figures 3-1 through
This section is written to instruct the service engineer on 3-5 throughout these procedures for reference to console
how to locate, gain access to, and remove various skins components.
and subassemblies from the Accurus®. In addition to
written instructions, several drawings and photos are TOOLS, SPARES, TEST SUPPLIES, AND
included to aid in disassembly. If further detail is required HARDWARE
than shown in this section, refer to the engineering
assembly drawings located in Section Seven. Refer to Tables 5-1 through 5-4 in Section Five for tools,
spares, test supplies, and hardware.
Replacement of the items removed in this section is
accomplished by performing the steps in reverse order
unless noted otherwise. When reconnecting cables, refer
to the interconnection diagram in Section Six.

Diathermy PCB U/S Diathermy Module

U/S Driver PCB

U/S Diathermy Controller PCB Power/Signal Distribution PCB

Upper Upper level tilts back to

Front allow access to Lower
Panel level. For an overhead
layout view of the Upper
and Lower levels, refer
to Figures 3-2 and 3-3.

Host Module

Power Supply

Lower Front Panel

Illuminator

Figure 3-1
Accurus® Parts Location Diagram of Front Panel and Upper Level

906-2020-501 3-1
 ®

U/S Diathermy Host

Module Module

PCMCIA
Drive

U/S Diathermy Controller PCB

Diathermy PCB
U/S Driver PCB
Power/Signal Distribution PCB

Front Panel Controller PCB

7-Segment Keypad
Display PCB LED PCB LCD & Touchscreen

on 202-1511-501 only

Figure 3-2
Upper Level Layout of Accurus® System

Main Air
Source
System Fan

Power
Supply
LPA/Illuminator Controller PCB
Air/Fluid Controller PCB

Transducer Air
PCB Pump

Illuminator
Interface
Bracket
Pressure/ LPAS Assembly
Vacuum Manifold
Manifold
Illuminator

Rcvr Mech PCB

Receiver
Mechanism Pneumatic
Assembly Connector
Handpiece
Manifold
Connector
Asembly

Figure 3-3
Lower Level Layout of Accurus® System
3-2 906-2020-501
906-2020-501

®
LEGEND ELECTRICAL TEST POINTS PNEUMATIC TEST POINTS
RG = Regulator TP1 = +15V TP8 = MT1* TP1 = see STP
J = Electrical Jack TP2 = -15V TP9 = MT6* TP2 = see STP
T = Tube TP3 = GND TP10 = MT5* TP3 = see STP
L = Solenoid TP4 = MT3* TP11 = 10V
MT = Transducer TP5 = 2.5V TP12 = 1.25V
RO = Restrictive Orifice TP6 = MT4* TP13 = MT2*
PV = Proportional Valve
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly with Tranducer PCB

*(refer to Transducer schematic

TP7 = 0.49V (940-0202-004) for transducer outputs)
24V
Solenoid
TP = Test Point
Valves STP = Service Test Procedure

T11 L2
L19 RG3 24V PV1

J16
J1 30psi Pressure
Solenoid
Regulator
T12 Valve
L18 (TP2)
J2
L3 J4
T3
L13 24V

J17
TP13
Receiver J3 Proportional
Solenoid
Figure 3-4

Mechanism Valve Valve

(Refer to T9
L12 RG2
assy drawing J9
57psi Pressure MT4 MT3 J3
in Section 7 T8 Regulator pressure pressure
for connections L11
J8 (TP3) xdcr xdcr
to Receiver MT6 MT2
Mechanism) pressure L5
T10 vac xdcr
U9 xdcr 24V
T2 TP12 Solenoid
TP10 TP9
T7 TP11 Valve
L16 J7 TP2 U5 U4 TP8 MT1 R02 R07 T1
pressure from RG1 (TP1)
U1 U2 xdcr
T6 TP7 TP6 MT5 located on
L14 TP4 Main Air
J6 vac xdcr
TP5 U3 TP3 Source
T5
L17 J2 J19 Muffler TP1
J5
TP1
T4 Muffler
L15 Transducer PCB TP2
J4
L4
24V
Pressure/Vacuum Solenoid
Valve
Manifold
Venturi Pump TP3 T15 T13 T14
to Pneumatic
Connector Assy
VFI
Scissors

to Receiver Mechanism
Cassette Vacuum Seal
3-3
 ®

LPAS Manifold R1
24V
30mmHg 24V
Solenoid
Pressure Solenoid
Valve
Regulator Valve T17
L2 L3 To Pneumatic
T22 T23 T16 Connector
Assembly
T24
RV1 PV1
Relief Single Stage
Valve PUMP Servo Valve Muffler
24V
Solenoid
Valve
Muffler T21
L1

To Transducers
MT1 and MT2 on
LPA/Illuminator
Controller PCB
Ambient Air Inlet
Figure 3-5
Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION
®
The Accurus contains electrostatic discharge (ESD)
sensitive devices. Always use care and wear a wrist
strap when working with or near these devices.

Prior to removal of any system component, turn off

system power using rear panel switch.

1 Removal of Top Cover

1.1 Remove four 3mm hex screws securing Top
Cover to rear of chassis.
1.2 Slide Top Cover back and up to remove from
system.

2 Removal of Illuminator Assembly Figure 3-6

Captive Screws Securing Front
2.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1. of Upper Level to Chassis

2.2 Loosen two captive screws (see Figure 3-6)

securing front of upper level to chassis. Tilt
upper level back until it rests in back position.

3-4 906-2020-501
 ®
2.3 Remove two 2mm hex screws securing
illuminator cover to chassis (see Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7
Screws Securing Illuminator Cover to Chassis
2.4 Loosen but do not remove nylon screw on
Illuminator Assembly (see Figure 3-8). When
tightened, this screw prevents Illuminator
Assembly from being pulled completely out of
system.
Nylon
Screw
Figure 3-8
Nylon Screw Restraining Illuminator Assembly
2.5 While holding front of Illuminator Assembly,
press Illuminator Release button on rear panel.
The assembly will spring forward as it is freed
from latch mechanism.
2.6 Carefully pull Illuminator Assembly from
system. Angle the assembly slightly as it exits the
system.
906-2020-501
3 Removal of Lower Front Panel
3.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
3.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis.
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the back
position.
3.3 Eject Illuminator drawer and leave it in the
extended position (do not remove).
Replacement: Be sure to slip grommet over
Illuminator drawer.
3.4 Loosen five captive screws securing Lower FP to
chassis. The fifth screw is located on upper middle
of Lower Front Panel and is accessed from inside
lower level (see Figure 3-9). Place Lower FP on
table top.
Front Panel
Fifth Screw
Figure 3-9
Fifth Captive Screw Securing Lower
Front Panel to Chassis
3.5 Disconnect A11P1 from Standby Switch PCB.
3.6 Loosen four captive screws securing U/S
Handpiece Connector Panel to Lower Front
Panel and remove Front Panel.
NOTE: To lay Front Panel flat in front of the
system without removing remaining cables,
rotate it 180 degrees.
3-5

4 Removal of Pneumatic Connector Assembly
4.1 Remove Lower FP per step 3.
4.2 Disconnect A3P7 from Air/Fluid Controller PCB.
4.3 Disconnect white luer fitting connecting green
tubing from T2 on Pressure/Vacuum Manifold to
T2 on Pneumatic Connector Assembly.
4.4 Disconnect white luer fitting connecting clear
tubing from Receiver Mechanism to VAC
connection on side header of Pressure/Vacuum
Manifold.
4.5 Loosen two flathead screws securing side header
to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold, and pull side
header away from manifold. Note: Be sure that
O-rings for side header remain in manifold. If
an O-ring sticks to side header, remove and
place in manifold prior to replacement.
4.6 Disconnect clear tubing from T16 and T17 on
LPAS manifold. Replacement: T16 connects to
T16 on Pneumatic Connector Assembly, and T17
connects to Pneumatic Connector Assembly.
4.7 Loosen three 3mm hex screws securing
Pneumatic Connector Assembly to chassis. Pull
assembly partially out of chassis then slide black
grommet on cable W28 out of its position in
chassis. Remove assembly from system.
5 Removal of Handpiece LED PCB
5.1 Remove Lower FP per step 3.
5.2 Disconnect A10P1 from Handpiece LED PCB.
5.3 Remove five 2.5mm hex screws securing PCB
Lower FP skin.
6 Removal of Upper Front Panel
(202-1329-501)
6.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
6.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis.
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the reclined
position (approximately 90°).
6.3 Remove 7mm nut securing ground strap to
chassis.
3-6
®
6.4 Disconnect A8P4 through A8P7.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop screws securing
connector A8P4. They are not captive screws.
6.5 Disconnect cable W22 from LCD Controller
PCB A22 (in Host Module) and route through
hole in bottom of upper level. The other end of
W22 is hardwired to LCD A13.
6.6 Loosen four captive screws securing Upper Front
Panel to chassis. Remove Upper Front Panel.
7 Removal of Front Panel Controller PCB
(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel)
7.1 Remove Upper Front Panel per step 6.
7.2 Disconnect A8P8 from FP Controller PCB.
7.3 Disconnect A8P3 from FP Controller PCB.
7.4 Disconnect ribbon cable connectors P1 and P2
from FP Controller PCB.
7.5 Remove four nuts and standoff securing FP
Controller PCB to upper FP (see Figure 3-10).
Remove FP Controller PCB.
8 Removal of LCD Backlight
(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel)
8.1 Remove FP Controller PCB per step 7.
8.2 Using a small screwdriver pull back on tabs
securing backlight cover to backlight assembly
(see Figure 3-11). The metal cover will spring up
as it releases.
8.3 Slide backlight cover out to remove from
backlight assembly. Replacement: Ensure that
white side of backlight cover faces bulb when
replacing.
8.4 Remove bulb connectors from retainer. Disconnect
connector from bulb that is being replaced.
8.5 Remove rubber retainer that secures bulb.
8.6 Carefully remove bulb (with connectors) from
assembly.
906-2020-501
 ®

Figure 3-10
Exploded View of 202-1329-501 Front Panel Assembly

Backlight Cover

Tabs securing
backlight covers
(two on each side).

Bulb Connectors

Cable ties for W22 (2) Bulb

Backlight cover slides out.

Rubber Retainer holding bulb in place.

Figure 3-11
View of Front Panel Assembly with Controller PCB Removed
(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel)

9 Removal of LCD 9.3 Remove two 2.5mm screws and washers

(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) securing W22 cable to upper front panel.
9.1 Remove FP Controller PCB per step 7. 9.4 Carefully disconnect W22 from LCD assembly
9.2 Remove four standoffs, starwashers, and braces 9.5 Remove LCD from upper FP
securing LCD to assembly (see Figure 3-10).

906-2020-501 3-7
 ®

10 Removal of 7 Segment Display PCB 12 Removal of Upper Front Panel (202-1511-501)

(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel)
12.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
10.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
12.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of
10.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis.
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis. Tilt upper level back until it rests in the reclined
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the back position (approximately 90°).
position.
12.3 Remove 7mm nut securing ground strap to
10.3 Disconnect A8J3. chassis.
10.4 Remove four 2.5mm hex screws securing 12.4 Disconnect A8P4 through A8P7.
7 Segment Display PCB to upper FP skin (see NOTE: Be careful not to drop screws securing
Figure 3-12). connector A8P4. They are not captive screws.
12.5 Disconnect cable W49 at CN2 on LCD.
12.6 Loosen four captive screws securing Upper Front
Panel to chassis. Remove Upper Front Panel.

13 Removal of Front Panel Controller PCB (for

202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)

Figure 3-12
Removing the 7 Segment Display PCB (for 202-1329-
501 Upper Front Panel)

Figure 3-13
11 Removal of Touch Screen Front Panel Controller PCB (for
(for 202-1329-501 Upper Front Panel) 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)

11.1 Remove LCD (per step 9) and 7 Segment

Display PCB (per step 10). 13.1 Remove Upper Front Panel per step 12.

11.2 Remove four standoffs and two 2.5mm hex 13.2 Disconnect A8P8 from FP Controller PCB.
screws securing Touch Screen to Upper FP skin. 13.3 Disconnect A8P3 from FP Controller PCB.
13.4 Disconnect ribbon cable connectors P1 and P2
from FP Controller PCB.
13.5 Disconnect LCD backlight connectors from CN2
and CN3 on LCD Inverter.
13.6 Carefully pull PCB from standoffs. Pull from one
standoff at a time starting with those located near
the edge of the PCB.
3-8 906-2020-501
 ®

14 Removal of LCD, Touch Screen, and Keypad

(for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)
14.1 Remove FP Controller PCB per step 13.
14.2 Remove six nuts and washers securing LCD and
bracket to assembly (see Figure 3-14). Remove
LCD and bracket from Upper FP. The Touch
Screen and Keypad can also be removed from the
Upper FP at this time.
14.3 Remove four 3mm hex screws securing LCD to
bracket. Remove LCD from bracket.

15 Removal of LCD Backlight

(for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)
15.1 Remove LCD per step 14.
15.2 Slide backlight out of LCD (see Figure 3-15).
Figure 3-15
Location of LCD Backlights
(for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)

Figure 3-14
Exploded View of 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel

906-2020-501 3-9
 ®

16 Removal of 7 Segment Display PCB 18 Removal of Receiver Mechanism Assembly

(for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)
18.1 Remove Lower Front Panel per step 3.
16.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
18.2 Remove hitch pin securing cassette release lever
16.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of to latch release coupler on Receiver Mechanism
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis. Assembly.
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the back
position. 18.3 Disconnect A3P3 and A3P5 through A3P7 from
Air/Fluid Controller PCB.
16.3 Disconnect A8J3.
18.4 Disconnect white luer fittings connecting tubing
16.4 Remove four 3mm hex screws securing from Receiver Mechanism Assembly to Side
7 Segment Display PCB to upper FP skin (see Header on Pressure/Vacuum Manifold (see
Figure 3-16). Figure 3-17 for location of Side Header).
18.5 Loosen two captive screws securing End Header
to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold (see Figure 3-17).

Side Header Captive Screws

Figure 3-16
Removing 7 Segment Display PCB End Header Captive Screws
(for 202-1511-501 Upper Front Panel)
Figure 3-17
17 Removal of Power Supply Captive Screws Securing End Header to
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold
17.1 Unplug power cord from rear panel.
17.2 Remove Lower Front Panel per step 3. 18.6 Remove two 3mm hex screws securing bottom of
Receiver Mechanism Assembly to chassis (see
17.3 Remove flexible air duct hose connecting Figure 3-18).
illuminator fan to rear panel.
17.4 Disconnect A16P1 through A16P4 from Power
Supply.
17.5 Loosen captive screw securing front of Power
Supply.
17.6 Remove four 2.5mm hex screws securing Power
Supply to rear panel.
17.7 Pull Power Supply out through front of system to
remove.

3-10 906-2020-501
 ®

20.4 Cut tie wraps as necessary to separate Pressure/

Vacuum Manifold cables from other cable
assemblies.
20.5 Disconnect white luer fittings connecting tubing
from Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly (T2)
Top Screw
to Pneumatic Connector Manifold (T2).
20.6 Loosen two captive screws securing side header
to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold and pull header
away from manifold (see Figure 3-17).
20.7 Disconnect A3P1, A3P2, and A3P4 from Air/
Fluid Controller PCB.
20.8 Loosen two 3/32 inch hex screws securing Air/
Fluid Controller PCB to chassis. Carefully pull
PCB up to remove from system.
Bottom 20.9 Loosen two 3mm hex screws securing Pressure/
Screws
Vacuum Manifold Assembly to chassis (see
Figure 3-18 Figure 3-19).
Screws Securing Receiver Mechanism
Assembly to Chassis

18.7 Remove 2.5mm hex screw securing top of

Receiver Mechanism Assembly to chassis.
18.8 Carefully pull Receiver Mechanism Assembly
out through front of system to remove.

19 Removal of Cassette Release Lever

19.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
19.2 Remove hitch pin securing Cassette Release
Lever to latch release coupler on Receiver
Manifold
Mechanism Assembly.
Screws
19.3 On rear panel, rotate release lever 90° to gain
access to screws securing Cassette Release Lever
to rear panel.
19.4 Remove two 2mm hex screws securing Cassette White
Muffler
Release Lever to rear panel.
19.5 Pull Cassette Release Lever out through rear of
system to remove.

20 Removal of Pressure/Vacuum Manifold

Assembly (see step 21 for alternate method)
20.1 Remove Cassette Release lever per step 19.
202 Remove Receiver Mechanism per step 18.
20.3 Disconnect tubing from water filter on Main Air
Source Assembly. Pull back on red fitting to
release tubing.
Figure 3-19
Screws Securing Pressure/Vacuum
Manifold Assembly to Chassis
20.10 Grasp large white muffler and carefully guide
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly up and out
of system.

906-2020-501 3-11
 ®

21 Removal of Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Solenoid Connections on Main Air Source

Assembly Without Removing Receiver Receiver Mechanism Assembly
Mechanism
21.1 Remove Cassette Release lever per step 19.
21.2 Disconnect green tubing from water filter on
Main Air Source Assembly. Pull back on red
fitting to release tubing.
21.3 Cut tie wraps as necessary to separate Pressure/
Vacuum Manifold cables from other cable
assemblies.
21.4 Disconnect white luer fittings connecting green
tubing from Pressure/Vacuum Manifold
Assembly (T2) to Pneumatic Connector
Manifold (T2). Low Pressure Pump
21.5 Loosen two captive screws securing side header Figure 3-20
to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold and pull header Interference Points Encountered When Removing
away from manifold. Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly from Chassis
21.6 Disconnect A3P1, A3P2, and A3P4 from Air/
Fluid Controller PCB.
21.7 Loosen two 3/32 inch hex screws securing Air/
Fluid Controller PCB to chassis. Carefully pull
PCB up to remove from system.
21.8 Loosen two 3mm hex screws securing Pressure/
Vacuum Manifold Assembly to chassis.
21.9 Grasp large white muffler and carefully guide
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly up and out
of system as shown in Figures 3-20 through 3-22.
NOTE: Figure 3-20 shows the main
interference points when removing the
manifold. Figure 3-21
Grasp Proportional Valve and Lift Rear Manifold Up
While Pushing Low Pressure Pump Back

Figure 3-22
Remove Manifold from System as Shown.

3-12 906-2020-501
 ®

22 Removal of Transducer PCB 23 Removal of Main Air Source Assembly

22.1 Remove Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly 23.1 Remove Lower Front Panel per step 3.
per step 20 or 21.
23.2 Remove Pressure/Vacuum Manifold per step 20
22.2 Disconnect A7P1, A7P3, and A7P4 from or 21.
Transducer PCB; and M2P16 and M2P17 from
solenoids L2 and L3. 23.3 Remove four 3mm hex screws securing Main Air
Source Assembly to rear panel.
22.3 Remove seven 2.5mm hex screws securing
Transducer PCB to Pressure/Vacuum Manifold 23.4 Remove Main Air Source Assembly from
Assembly. system.

CAUTION 24 Removal of Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS)

Do not touch exposed transducers (MT5 and MT6) as
this will affect their function and accuracy.
24.1
O-rings and spacers are not captive to PCB; slowly 24.2
remove PCB to avoid displacement of O-rings and
spacers.
24.3
22.4 Carefully pull Transducer PCB up to remove.
24.4
Replacement: Ensure that O-rings and spacers
are properly positioned in manifold when
replacing Transducer PCB (see Figure 3-23). 24.5
CAUTION: Do not touch exposed
transducers MT5 & MT6.
Assembly
Remove Top Cover per step 1.
Disconnect A14J1 through A14J10 from LPA/
Illuminator Controller PCB.
Disconnect tubing from T16 and T17 on LPAS.
Disconnect tubing from MT1 and MT2 on LPAS/
Illuminator Controller PCB.
Loosen two 3/32 inch screws securing LPA/
Illuminator Controller PCB to chassis. Lift PCB
up and out of system.

O-rings (4) 24.6 Loosen three 3mm hex screws securing LPAS to
chassis.
Spacers (4)
24.7 Lift LPAS out of system.

Transducer
PCB
Figure 3-23
Bottom of Transducer PCB Showing Installation of
Spacers and O-Rings

906-2020-501 3-13

25 General Procedure for Removal of Regulators
RG2 and RG3 (on Press/Vac Manifold), R1
and RV1 (on LPAS Manifold), and RV1 (on
Main Air Source).
25.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
25.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis.
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the back
position.
25.3 Remove four hex screws securing regulator to
manifold.
25.4 Carefully lift regulator from manifold. O-ring
will probably stick to regulator.
Replacement: Remove O-ring from regulator and
position in manifold. Replace with new O-ring if
necessary.
25.6 Place regulator in manifold and secure using four
hex screws. Alternately tighten each screw until
regulator is secure. Reference assembly drawing
in Section Seven for further information.
26 General Procedure for Replacement of
EPROMs on Controller PCBs
26.1 Ensure console is in "power off" state at Power
Supply rear panel switch.
26.2 Remove assemblies as necessary to gain access
to Controller PCB containing EPROM to be
replaced.
26.3 Using an EPROM removal tool, carefully
remove EPROM from socket on Controller PCB.
WARNING!
The EPROM socket is fragile. If EPROM is not
removed carefully, the socket may crack or break.
26.4 Install new EPROM into socket. Match beveled
edge with small dot on EPROM to beveled edge
on socket.
3-14
®
27 Removal of System (Host) Computer
27.1 Remove Top Cover per step 1.
27.2 Loosen two captive screws securing front of
upper level (contains Host Module) to chassis.
Tilt upper level back until it rests in the back
position.
26.3 Remove all cables connected to Host except for
the three connected to J4, J22, and J24 on the PC
Card.
27.4 Return upper level back to horizontal position.
27.5 Loosen four captive screws securing Host to
upper chassis.
27.6 Carefully remove Host from system.
Replacement Notes:
• When replacing the Host, use Field Service Host Assembly
PN 202-1616-501. This kit includes a new Host, a jumper,
and instructions for installing the new host.
For Model 600DS Systems:
• Transfer Sound PCB from old Host to new Host. The
Sound PCB contains the model type configuration and
doctor's memory settings, and will transfer this
information to the CPU upon boot-up.
For Model 400VS Systems:
• To transfer doctor's memory settings to a new Host
installed on a 400VS system (no upgrade), perform the
following steps:
a) Transfer Sound PCB from old Host to new Host.
b) Boot-up system.
c) Shut down system.
d) Reinstall new Sound PCB into new Host.
• Be sure to document serial numbers of any PCB's
exchanged.
906-2020-501
 ®

SECTION FOUR
SERVICE TEST PROCEDURE
INTRODUCTION

This section of the service manual is reserved for storage

of the Accurus® Service Test Procedure and Checklist.

Each time a field engineer visits a customer it is required

that he perform a system checkout on the customer's
Alcon equipment. The checkout is performed by
following instructions written in the Service Test
Procedure, then returning its associated Checklist to the
local service support center for filing.

The Service Test Procedure for the Accurus® is an

independent document, and can be ordered from the
local service support center by using the following part
number:
78.40.578

906-2020-501 4-1
 ®

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-2 906-2020-501
 ®
SECTION FIVE
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERAL INFORMATION
This section of the manual contains information to assist
the Field Engineer in maintenance and troubleshooting of
the Accurus®.
Tables 5-1 through 5-4 list tools, spares, test supplies,
and hardware which may be used when servicing the
Accurus®.
• Table 5-1. Recommended Tools ......................... 5-2
• Table 5-2. Recommended Spares ....................... 5-3
• Table 5-3. Recommended Test Supplies ............ 5-3
• Table 5-4. Recommended Hardware .................. 5-4
Maintenance procedures are provided for the following
items:
• Fuse and Voltage Selection ................................. 5-5
• Backup Low Pressure Adjustment ...................... 5-6
• Replacement of Filter on Main Air
Source Assembly ................................................ 5-6
• Illuminator Bulb Replacement ............................ 5-7
• Illuminator Optics Cleaning ................................ 5-7
• CPC Connector Replacement ............................. 5-8
• Receiver Latch Vacuum Seal Replacement ........ 5-8
• Diathermy Calibration ........................................ 5-9
• Adjustment of Regulators RG2 and RG3 on
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold ................................ 5-9
General troubleshooting information contained in Table
5-6 lists common problems found in the system and
actions necessary to correct the problems.
• Table 5-6. General Troubleshooting ................... 5-10
906-2020-501
The Accurus® performs "Self Check" diagnostics during
boot-up and continuously monitors all subsystems during
operation. If a problem occurs, the Front Panel displays a
message indicating the type of problem. These messages
are listed in Tables 5-7 through 5-13.
NOTE: Record all information displayed in the popup
window screen before recycling power.
• Table 5-7. System Information Messages for
Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Blue) ................. 5-11
• Table 5-8. System Information Messages for
Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue) ................. 5-13
• Table 5-9. Advisory Messages for
Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green) ............... 5-17
• Table 5-10. Advisory Messages for
Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green) ............... 5-23
• Table 5-11. Error Codes for Software
Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow) ............................ 5-30
• Table 5-12. Error Codes for Software
Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow) ............................ 5-37
• Table 5-13. Fault Codes for All Software
Versions (Red) .................................................... 5-44
Table 5-14 contains Power On Self Test (POST) codes
used by the CPU. If there is an error during the boot
cycle one of these codes is displayed on POST Code
Display located on the Power/Signal Distribution PCB.
• Table 5-14. POST Code Definitions ................... 5-46
5-1
 ®

Table 5-1. Recommended Tools

ITEM TOOL DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

1 Standard Service Tool kit Standard tools including:

• Slotted screwdriver (small and narrow)
• Metric Hex (Allen) Wrench set
• Standard Hex (Allen) Wrench set
• Static protection wrist strap (ESD)
• Hemostat
• 15/16 wrench for Schrader connector
removal

2 Oscilloscope or DVM Capable of measuring:

• 43 Vrms at a frequency up to 360 Khz.
• AC Volts: 0 to 150
• DC Volts: 0 to 150
• Resistance: 0 to infinite

3 Vacuum Pressure Meter Capable of measuring:

• 0 to 600 mmHg (vacuum)
• 0 to 100 psi (pressure)
• 0-120mmHg (pressure)

4 IC Extraction Tool Reference AMP PN 821981-1 or

generic PLCC extraction tool

5 Sensor Test Tools Tools used for cassette and fluid level Alcon P/N 995-2020-019
simulation - 2 required

6 Cautery Test Load 75 ohm +/- 1% (non-inductive) Alcon P/N 995-2000-047

7 Fragmentation Handpiece Alcon P/N 202-1479-501

Cleaning Agent: reagent For cleaning illuminator optics

8 grade alcohol, acetone, or
methanol

9 Lens Tissue For cleaning illuminator optics

5-2 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-2. Recommended Spares

ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1 202-1014-501E LPAS/ Illuminator Controller PCB 1

2 202-1015-501E Front Panel Controller PCB 1
3 202-1176-501E Receiver Mechanism 1
4 202-1243-501E Pressure/Vacuum Manifold 1
5 202-1247-501E Pneumatic Connector Assembly 1
6 202-1332-501E Air/Fluid Controller PCB 1
7 202-1457-501E LPAS/Standby Power PCB 1
8 202-1331-501E U/S Diathermy Controller 1
9 394-1100-501E Diathermy Driver 1
10 200-1546-501E U/S Driver 1
11 202-1275-501 HP LED PCB 1
12 202-1016-501 Receiver Mechanism PCB 1
13 202-1013-501E Transducer PCB 1
14 202-1334-001 Female CPC Connector 2
15 202-1333-001 Male CPC Connector 4
16 202-1230-001 Cassette Latch Seal 2
17 202-3103-501E LPAS Manifold Assy 1
18 774-075 O-ring 5

Table 5-3. Recommended Test Supplies

ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1 893-513 Male CPC Fitting 2

2 893-512 Female CPC Fitting 2
3 893-420 Male Luer Plug 2
4 893-499 Female Luer Plug 2
5 893-432 Female to Female Adapter 2
6 893-344 Male to Male Adapter 2
7 812-1417-001 Tubing Tri-Lumen 1
8 043-028 Test Tubing 2 feet
9 893-242 Male Luer Fitting 2
10 893-397 Female Luer Fitting 2
11 812-1499-601 Anterior Test Cassette 1
12 812-1465-603 Posterior Test Cassette 1
13 995-2020-019 Sensor Test Tool 2
14 043-004 Tubing 2 inches
15 403-025 Check Valve 2
16 202-1447-506 Software Flash Card, V1.11 1

906-2020-501 5-3
 ®

Table 5-4. Recommended Hardware

ITEM # WHERE PART
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
ON DWG USED NUMBER

004 Console 813-003 NUT,HEX,M5X0.8 W/LOCK WASHER 2

016 Console 809-010 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M5X10 SST 2
017 Console 809-002 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST 2
018 Console 809-007 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M4X10 SST 4
019 Console 825-016 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X16 SST 2
023 Console 825-019 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X30 SST 2
027 Console 026-030 CLAMP,CABLE,.312 DIA NYL WHT 1
032 Console 797-085 WASHER,INT LOCK.17X.34X.02 SST 2
046 Console 800-203 WASHER,INT LOCK,M3 SST 4
049 Console 813-002 WASHER,INT LOCK.17X.34X.02 SST 1
050 Console 797-063 WASHER,EXT LOCK.17X.38X.02 SST 1
053 Console 801-004 WASHER,FLAT,M4 SST 1
054 Console 027-002 CABLE TIE,1.25X5.50L,NYL 5
075 Console/Post Ops 825-020 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X35 SST 5

045 Footpedal 809-007 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M4X10 SST 3

018 Illuminator 026-029 CLAMP,CABLE,.250 DIA NYL WHT 1

021 Illuminator 784-190 SCREW,PH SLT,M4X16 NYLON 1
023 Illuminator 809-002 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST 2
024 Illuminator 807-014 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X10 SST 3

006 Lower Front Panel 825-001 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X5 SST 3

007 Lower Front Panel 801-003 WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST 3

015 LPAS 825-015 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X12 SST 2

010 Manifold 788-075 SPACER,ROUND,6MMX6MM AL 4

011 Manifold 825-004 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X10 SST 3
013 Manifold 825-008 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X25 SST 4
026 Manifold 774-073 O-RING,.125X.250X.062,NITRILE 4
N/A Manifold 774-075 O-RING,.145X.285X.070,BUNA-N 6

011 Pneumatic Conn. 774-135 O-RING,.158X.047,BUNA-N 2

006 Posterior Options 819-005 SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST BLK 1

008 Posterior Options 825-018 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X25 SST 2

017 Receiver Mech 202-1230-001 LATCH, SEAL 1

030 Receiver Mech 825-002 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST 2

008 Upper Front Panel 801-003 WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST 2

010 Upper Front Panel 825-006 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X16 SST 1
011 Upper Front Panel 800-203 WASHER,INT LOCK,M3 SST 2
017 Upper Front Panel 825-002 SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST 2
019 Upper Front Panel 026-074 CLAMP,CABLE,.25X.375 NYL BLK 1
024 Upper Front Panel 775-009 GASKET,.125X.30X.020,BUNA N 2
025 Upper Front Panel 813-001 NUT,HEX,M3X0.5 W/LOCK WASHER 2

5-4 906-2020-501
 ®

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

3 Push gently to the right until tab releases fuse drawer.

FUSE AND VOLTAGE SELECTION NOTE: This must be done gently to ensure the tab
does not break.
The Accurus® system is configured to 115 VAC with 10
amp fuses. Voltage and fuse/fuse drawer selection must 4 Ease the fuse drawer out of the Fuse Module as
be performed for systems using input power levels of shown in Figure 5-2.
100, 220, and 240 VAC. Table 5-5 lists the various FUSE FUSES FUSE
voltage selections and corresponding fuse ratings. DRAWER MODULE

Table 5-5. Fuse and Voltage Selection

LINE VOLTAGE FUSE RATING, ALCON
VOLTAGE SELECTION TYPE, SIZE P/N

100 VAC 100 VAC 10 AMP/250V, T, 130-023

1/4" x 1 1/4"

115 - 120 VAC* 120 VAC 10 AMP/250V, T, 130-023

1/4" x 1 1/4"

220 VAC 220 VAC 5 AMP/250V, T, 130-054

5 x 20 mm VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
230 - 240 VAC 240 VAC 5 AMP/250V, T, 130-054 JUMPER BOX
5 x 20 mm
Figure 5-2
* System is factory configured for 115 VAC Removal of the Fuse Drawer
NOTE: Use appropriate fuse drawer for 5 amp and 5 Gently remove and replace fuse(s).
10 amp fuses.
6 Reinsert fuse drawer; a snap is heard which indicates
CAUTION drawer is secured inside Fuse Module.
The Accurus® is shipped with a kit that contains the
7 Plug power cord back into Main Power Connector.
fuses and fuse drawer used for 220/240 VAC. Prior to
applying power levels of 220/240 VAC, the voltage
selector, fuses and fuse drawer must be changed or VOLTAGE SELECTION
damage may result.
1 Perform steps 1 through 4 of fuse replacement
FUSE REPLACEMENT procedure.

1 Unplug power cord from Main Power Connector on 2 Gently remove Voltage Selector Jumper Block,
Rear Panel. located in the far right section of the Fuse Module.

2 Insert a flat surfaced instrument into the Release Tab 3 Rotate Jumper Block to the preferred voltage (100,
opening located just to the left of the fuse drawer (see 120, 220, or 240).
Figure 5-1). 4 With selected voltage facing you, reinsert the Jumper
FUSE RELEASE

ON/OFF
MODULE TAB Block back into the Fuse Module.
SWITCH
5 Reinsert fuse drawer; a snap is heard which indicates
module is secured.
6 Plug power cord back into Main Power Connector.
FUSE
DRAWER

Figure 5-1
Fuse Module Location and Components
906-2020-501 5-5
 ®

BACKUP LOW PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT REPLACEMENT OF FILTER AND O-RING

ON MAIN AIR SOURCE ASSEMBLY
1 Remove Top Cover per procedure in Section Three.
1 Remove Main Air Source Assembly from system per
2 Loosen two screws securing front of upper level to
instructions in Section Three.
chassis and tilt upper level back to locked position.
2 Remove Housing from water filter assembly by
3 Power up the system.
turning the Housing counterclockwise.
4 For systems with software versions below 1.11:
3 Remove old O-ring and replace with new (see Figure
4.1 Turn on F/AX without any tubing connected. 5-3).
Advisory Error 318 appears.
4 Remove Filter and Filter Retainer by turning Retainer
4.2 Select “Yes” on the Advisory. Another message counterclockwise.
appears with “Backup” as an option.
5 Replace Filter and secure to water filter assembly
4.3 Select “Backup” and attach pressure meter to F/AX with Filter Retainer. The flat end of Filter faces up
connector. The pressure meter should read 30 mmHg. towards threads and rounded end is down, resting on
If not, proceed to the next step. the Filter Retainer.
4.4 Adjust R1 on the LPAS manifold (see Figure 3-5) 6 Replace Housing.
using a 9/64 inch hex wrench until backup pressure
7 Replace Main Air Source Assembly per instructions
reading is 30 ±5 mmHg.
in Section Three.
5 For systems with software versions 1.11 and above:
5.1 Turn on F/AX without any tubing connected. A
system advisory appears with the message "Check
VGFI/FAX Setup. Select 30 mmHg backup pressure,
or Ignore low pressure condition."
5.2 Select “30 mmHg” and attach pressure meter to
F/AX connector. The pressure meter should read 30
mmHg. If not, proceed to the next step.
5-3 Adjust R1 on the LPAS manifold (see Figure 3-5)
using a 9/64 inch hex wrench until backup pressure
reading is 30 ±5 mmHg.

Figure 5-3
Water Filter on Main Air Source

5-6 906-2020-501
 ®

ILLUMINATOR BULB REPLACEMENT ILLUMINATOR OPTICS CLEANING

To ensure secondary illuminator source availability at all The Illuminator optic elements (mirror and lenses) may
times, replace a burned out bulb immediately upon become dusty and/or spotted with use. In general, the
completion of surgery. optics can be cleaned using standard photographic lens
cleaning techniques as follows:

WARNING! Dusty Optics

The illuminator bulbs become extremely hot.
Never handle a bulb until it has cooled
considerably from its operating temperature.
Do not touch bulb directly with fingers at any
time!
1 Push the Illuminator release button on the rear panel
to eject illuminator drawer.
2 Pull the illuminator drawer out to full extension. Do
not attempt to remove the burned out bulb until it is
cool to the touch.
3 Using a soft cloth or protective glove, grip the bulb at
its base and pull out of socket. Discard bulb.
4 Using a soft cloth or glove, insert the new bulb's two
leads into the two holes of the socket. Press the bulb
down until it is fully inserted into the socket. Gently
clean any smudges or dirt from the bulb with a soft
cloth.
CAUTION
Handling bulb with bare hands can reduce brightness
and life of the bulb.
1 Gently blow or brush the dust off the optic using an
optics blower or canned air.
CAUTION
Do not use your breath to blow off the optics. Human
breath contains acids which can damage optical
coating.
Spotted Optics
Required Supplies:
• Cleaning agent such as reagent grade alcohol,
acetone, or methanol. Ensure cleaning agent does
not contain free (condensed) water in the solution
as it will spot optics.
• Lens tissue.
1 Place one or two drops of cleaning agent onto a
folded lens tissue.
2 Apply the wetted tissue to center of optic, and gently
drag tissue in an overlapping spiral pattern to the
perimeter. Repeat if streaks appear.

5 Ensure bulb is straight (see Figure 5-4).

To do this, look into the fiber optic
illuminator probe receptacle; the bulb ®

SURGICAL

filament should be centered within the

receptacle.
6 Gently push illuminator drawer back TM

into its receptacle. The illuminator is

now ready for use.

Filament is centered and level

within the receptacle

Figure 5-4
Bulb Alignment

906-2020-501 5-7
 ®

CPC CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT RECEIVER LATCH VACUUM SEAL

REPLACEMENT
This procedure tells how to replace the CPC connectors
on the top four pneumatic outputs located on the lower This procedure replaces the vacuum seal for the latch in
front panel. the Receiver Mechanism.

1 Place a 2 mm hex head wrench in the center of the
connector and turn counterclockwise until connector
separates from front panel.
2 Line up notch on new CPC connector with post on
front panel and tighten connector with 2 mm hex
head wrench (see Figure 5-5). Ensure that post rests
in notch so that plastic sleeve on connector does not
rotate.
CPC Connector
O-ring (PN 774-147)
Notch
1 Turn system power OFF.
2 Place a small allen wrench (approximately 3 mm)
next to system. This wrench will be used in step four.
3 Pull and hold manual cassette release lever on rear
panel. This will hold the latch in the up position.
4 Insert the small leg of allen wrench into latch seal
hole and pull down to remove latch seal (see Figure
5-6).
5 Push new seal into latch.

O-ring (PN 774-146)

Latch

Post

Figure 5-5 Latch

CPC Connector Alignment Seal

Replacement of the O-ring

3 Use a small needle-nose pliers to carefully remove/
cut the O-ring.
4 Place O-ring over face of connector, press over
connector and into groove.
Figure 5-6
Removal of Latch Seal from
Receiver Mechanism

5-8 906-2020-501
 ®
DIATHERMY CALIBRATION
1 Prior to using cautery test load (PN 995-2000-047)
verify load box resistance.
1.1 Ensure that the banana plugs of the cautery test load
are not connected to any jacks (open).
1.2 Verify the resistance across the two test points of
cautery test load is 75.0 +/- 4.0 ohms.
2 Turn system power on.
3 Insert cautery test load into Diathermy output jacks
on the front panel. Connect oscilloscope to output of
load box. Set Diathermy power to 100.
4 Press Left Vertical switch on footswitch. Verify
frequency is 323 to 357 KHz (nominal is 340). If not
within specifications, remove top cover and adjust
TP2 on Erbe Coag PCB (see Figure 5-7).
5 Verify Vrms is 38.8 to 42.4 (nominal is 40.6). If not
within specifications, Adjust TP1 on Erbe Coag PCB.
6 Set Diathermy power to 0. Verify amplitude is less
than 0.7 Vrms.
7 While continuing to depress footswitch, increase
power on front panel in increments of 10 up to 100.
Verify increase of 2.8 to 4.24 Vrms for each
increment of 10.
TP = Trim Pot
TP4 TP1
J2
L1
Figure 5-7
Erbe Coag PCB Layout
906-2020-501
8 Ensure Diathermy power is set to 100%. Set DMM to
read DC voltage and connect to MP9(+) and MP7(-)
on Erbe Coag PCB. Press Left vertical switch on
footswitch and verify that reading is 3.96 to 4.04
VDC (nominal is 4.00). If not within specifications,
adjust TP4 on Erbe Coag PCB.
9 Remove Diathermy load box and Scopemeter.
ADJUSTMENT OF REGULATORS RG2 AND RG3
ON PRESSURE/VACUUM MANIFOLD
Perform the following steps when regulator output does
not meet specification listed on Service Test Procedure.
NOTE: Be aware that a pressure leak elsewhere in the
system may be affecting the regulator output.
1 Using blue metric tubing, connect a pressure meter to
pneumatic test port TP2 (30psi) or TP3 (57psi) on
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold.
2 Locate regulator RG3 (30psi) or RG2 (57psi), and
use a 3/32 allen wrench to increase pressure to
specification listed on Service Test Procedure.
3 Remove tubing and pressure meter.
MP = Measure Point
TP2
MP7
MP9
ERBE
5-9
 ®

Table 5-6
General Troubleshooting

CONDITION OR POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

ERROR MESSAGE

System won’t turn ON. No electrical power supplied to system. Check electrical plug connection.
Check fuses on rear panel.
Check power source and fuses.

Bad power supply. Replace power supply.

Blank or logo screen only. System has detected a power on self test Cycle power. Check cables between host module and
error due to corrupted data or bad host power supply.
module.

Bad power supply. Check power supply voltages and replace power
supply if necessary.

Low pressure. Air pressure supply is less than 60 psi. Check air supply.
Set external regulator between 90-120 psi.
Check air supply hose and connections.

Internal pressure leak. Verify pressure at 85 psi test point on Main Air Source
Manifold.

Unable to acheive low Patient eye level setting incorrect. Check and, if necessary, correct the patient eye level
vacuum. setting.

Regurgitation or backflow. Vacuum too low. Check and, if necessary, increase vacuum level.

Cassette is above the patient eye level. Check and, if necessary, adjust the patient eye level in
the infusion setup screen.

Illuminator drawer will not Misalignment of electrical connector. Adjust lamp socket cable connector until illuminator
release. drawer properly releases.

5-10 906-2020-501
 ®
Table 5-7
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Blue)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
1 “Prime was not successfully
performed. Press Test to
prime.”
2 “Prime and tune were not
successfully performed.
Press Test to prime/tune.”
3 “Tune was not successfully
performed. Press Test to
prime/tune.”
4 “Press Continue to turn off the
air pump.”
5 “Press Continue to begin
Fluid/Air Exchange
(F/AX).”
6 “Press Continue to begin
infusion.”
7 “Priming is in progress.
Please wait.”
906-2020-501
CONDITION
The Surg key was pressed to enter
the surgery modes.
Prime was not successfully
performed.
Priming is considered successful
even if it was aborted.
The Surg key was pressed to enter
the surgery modes, and the Frag
handpiece is selected but it was not
primed or tuned successfully.
The Surg key was pressed to enter
the surgery modes, and the Frag
handpiece is selected, but it was
not tuned successfuly.
The F/AX key was pressed, the
BSS+ infusion type is GFI, and
F/AX is currently in use.
The BSS+ Infusion key was
pressed, the infusion type is GFI,
and GFI is currently in use.
The F/A key was pressed, and
BSS+ Infusion is currently in use.
The BSS+ Infusion key was
pressed, and F/AX is currently in
use.
The F/A key was pressed, the Auto
stopcock is selected, Manual
infusion is selected, and F/A is
currently in use.
Either cassette port is being primed.
ACTIONS
A Continue key is on the popup to
remove the popup and go to the
Surgery modes.
A Test key is on the popup to start the
prime cycle if a handpiece is selected.
Otherwise, pressing this key just
removes the popup.
An OK key is on the popup to remain in
Setup mode.
A Test key is on the popup to start the
prime/tune cycle.
An OK key is on the popup to remain in
Setup mode.
A Test key is on the popup to start the
prime/tune cycle.
A Continue key is on the popup to turn
the pump off and deselect and dim both
the F/AX and BSS+ Infusion keys and
their LEDs.
A Cancel key is on the popup to remain
in the current state.
A Continue key is on the popup to
enable F/AX.
A Cancel key is on the popup to remain
in the current state.
A Continue key is on the popup to
enable infusion.
A Cancel key is on the popup to remain
in the current state.
A Stop key is on the popup to abort
priming.
A Skip key is on the popup to begin the
probe test or tuning.
The popup is automatically removed
when priming is complete.
5-11
 ®

Table 5-7
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Blue)

NUMBER POPUP TEXT CONDITION ACTIONS

8 “Tuning is in progress. The Frag handpiece is being tuned. A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” tuning.

The popup is automatically removed

when tuning is complete.

9 “Testing is in progress. A Vit probe is being tested. A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” testing.

The popup is automatically removed

when testing is complete.

10 “Cleaning is in progress. The cassette is being purged. A Stop key is on the popup to abort
Please wait.” purging.

The popup is automatically removed

when purging is complete.

11 “Use footswitch to control The global Diathermy key was A Continue key is on the popup to
diathermy on/off.” pressed. remove it.

12 “Please select a handpiece The Test key was pressed and a An OK key is on the popup to remove
for Test.” handpiece key is not selected for it.
test.

13 For software versions below
version 1.11:
"A Fault Has Been Detected!
Press BACK-UP to set the
GFI, F/AX (BSS) to 30
mmHg.”
The Yes key was pressed on error
318 popup indicating that the GFI
line is connected.
A BACK-UP key is on the popup to put
the module into mechanical default.
An Ignore key is on the popup to return
to the error 318 popup.

14 For software versions 1.11
and above:
"Check VGFI/FAX Setup or
choose 30 mmHg non-
adjustable backup pressure."
VGFI or FAX is on but nothing is A BACK-UP key is on the popup to put
connected to port. the module into mechanical default.
An OK key is on the popup allowing
you to connect a fitting.

5-12 906-2020-501
 ®
Table 5-8
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
1 “Prime was not successfully
performed. Press Test to
prime.”
2 “Prime and tune were not
successfully performed.
Press Test to prime/tune.”
3 “Tune was not successfully
performed. Press Test to
prime/tune.”
4 “Press Continue to turn off the
air pump.”
5 “Priming is in progress.
Please wait.”
6 “Tuning is in progress.
Please wait.”
7 “Testing is in progress.
Please wait.”
8 “Cleaning is in progress.
Please wait.”
906-2020-501
CONDITION
The Surg key was pressed to enter
the surgery modes and prime was
not successfully performed.
Priming is considered successful
even if it was aborted.
The Surg key was pressed to enter
the surgery modes, and a U/S
handpiece is selected but it was not
primed or tuned successfully.
The Surg key was pressed to enter
the surgery modes, and a U/S
handpiece is selected, but it was
not tuned successfully.
• The F/AX key was pressed, the
BSS+ infusion type is VGFI or
Gravity, and F/AX is currently in
use.
• The BSS+ Infusion key was
pressed, the infusion type is
VGFI, and VGFI is currently in
use.
Either cassette port is being primed.
A U/S handpiece is being tuned.
A Vit probe is being tested.
The cassette is being purged.
ACTIONS
• A Continue key is on the popup to
remove the popup and go to the
Surgery modes.
• A Test key is on the popup to start
the prime cycle if a handpiece is
selected. Otherwise, pressing this
key just removes the popup.
• An OK key is on the popup to remain
in Setup mode.
• A Test key is on the popup to start
the prime/tune cycle.
• An OK key is on the popup to remain
in Setup mode.
• A Test key is on the popup to start
the prime/tune cycle.
• A Continue key is on the popup to
turn the pump off and deselect and
dim both the F/AX and BSS+
Infusion keys and their LEDs.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
remain in the current state.
• A Stop key is on the popup to abort
priming.
• A Skip key is on the popup to begin
the probe test or tuning.
• The popup is automatically removed
when priming is complete.
• A Stop key is on the popup to abort
tuning.
• The popup is automatically removed
when tuning is complete.
• A Stop key is on the popup to abort
testing.
• The popup is automatically removed
when testing is complete.
• A Stop key is on the popup to abort
purging.
• The popup is automatically removed
when purging is complete.
5-13

Table 5-8
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT CONDITION
9 “Use footswitch to control The global Diathermy key was
diathermy on/off.” pressed.
10 “Please select a handpiece The Test key was pressed and a
for Test.” handpiece key is not selected for
test.
11 “Do you want to apply the The Exit key was pressed in the
Presets values to the Doctor Presets screen after
system?” 1) modifications have been made to
values in the current domain or the
common presets, or 2) a new doctor
or memory was retrieved.
12 “Press Continue to save The Save key was pressed on the
Presets values.” Presets screen or on the Quick
Save popup and the current doctor
has no PIN protection.
13 “Press Continue to delete The Delete key was pressed on the
doctor.” Presets screen and the current
doctor has no PIN protection.
14 “Invalid PIN. Please re-enter.” The Enter key was pressed
following a PIN entry and the PIN is
invalid.
15 “PINs do not match. Re- The Enter key was pressed
enter.” following a PIN confirmation entry
and the entry does not match the
first PIN entry.
16 “Insert Alcon PC card to The PIN Override key was pressed
override the PIN, then press on the PIN entry popup.
Continue.”
17 “The PC Card is invalid or is The PIN Override popup is
not inserted correctly.” displayed, the Continue key was
pressed, and an Alcon PC card was
not detected.
5-14
®
ACTIONS
• A “Continue” key is on the popup to
remove it.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
• A Yes key is on the popup to apply
the presets.
• A No key is on the popup to exit
without applying the presets.
• A Continue key is on the popup to
save the presets.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
cancel the save request.
• A Continue key is on the popup to
delete the doctor.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
cancel the delete request.
• The current PIN entry is cleared so
the user can re-enter the PIN.
• The current PIN entry is cleared so
that the user can re-enter the PIN.
• An invalid key tone is emitted.
• A Continue key is on the popup to
remove it and detect the PC card. If
an Alcon PC card is detected, the
PIN entry requirement is overridden
and the PIN entry screen is removed.
If an Alcon PC card is not detected, a
popup is displayed indicating this to
the user.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
cancel PIN Override.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
it and display the PIN Override
popup.
906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-8
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue)

NUMBER POPUP TEXT CONDITION ACTIONS

18 “The system is at the The New key was pressed on the • An OK key is on the popup to
maximum number of doctors Presets screen and the system is at remove it.
available.” the maximum number of doctors
allowed.

19 “Duplicate entry. Please enter The Enter key was pressed on the • An OK key is on the popup to
a different name.” Keyboard screen to enter a new remove it.
doctor name and the doctor name
currently exists.

20 “Do you want to protect your The Enter key was pressed on the • A Yes key is on the popup to display
Presets with a PIN?” Keyboard screen to enter a new the PIN entry popup.
doctor and the entry is valid. • A No key is on the popup to skip PIN
entry.

21 “Select PIN request.” The PIN key was pressed on the • An Add key is on the popup to enter
Presets screen. a PIN.
• A Modify key is on the popup to
change the existing PIN.
• A Remove key is on the popup to
remove PIN protection.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
cancel the PIN request.
• The popup is removed regardless of
which key is pressed.
• The PIN entry popup is displayed if
the Add, Modify, or Remove keys are
pressed.

22 “Continuing will disable all
footswitch and global function
controls.”
The Memories key was pressed to
enter the Presets screens.
• A popup is displayed indicating
“Continuing will disable all footswitch
and global function controls.”
• A Continue is on the popup to enter
the Presets screen of the current
domain. The illuminators, irrigation,
infusion, and LPA are left in their
current state of on or off. The
Continue is disabled as long as the
footswitch treadle is depressed, or
the left horizontal, right horizontal,
left vertical, or heel switches are
depressed, or micro-reflux is active.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
remove it and remain in the current
mode.

23 “Do you want to restore the
system’s previous settings
and mode?”
The system is powered on following
a power failure or after the system
is powered down using the main
power switch (located on the rear
panel).
• A Yes key is on the popup for full
system recovery.
• A No key is on the popup to bring up
the system defaults.

906-2020-501 5-15

Table 5-8
System Information Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Blue)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
24 “Updating memory…”
25 “Please disable write
protection on PC card, then
press Continue.”
26 “Continuing will disable all
active functions.”
27 “Installation card has been
used. Please insert a new
card to perform upgrade.”
28 “Installation card is write
protected. Please remove
protection and press OK.”
29 “Installation card not detected.
Please insert card and
press OK.”
5-16
CONDITION
• Doctor presets are being saved
or deleted.
• A doctor is being added, edited or
deleted.
The system is executing from a
software installation PC card and it
is write protected.
The Exit key was pressed to go to
the Procedure Select screen and a
global function is active
The Install key was pressed in the
System Configuration screen, and
the PC card has been previously
used to install software.
Installation card is write protected
and a install is attempted.
Installation card is removed before
install key is pressed. Install key is
pressed with card missing.
®
ACTIONS
• The popup is removed when the
memory operation is complete.
• A Continue key is on the popup to
remove it, check the write protection,
and proceed with the s/w installation.
If write protection is still enabled, the
popup remains displayed.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
cancel the s/w installation
• A Continue key is on the popup to
enter the Procedure Select screen.
All active functions are turned off,
including the global functions.
• A Cancel key is on the popup to
remove it and remain in the current
mode.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
the popup.
• Pressing OK removes the popup.
• Pressing OK removes the popup.
906-2020-501
 ®
Table 5-9
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
1 “Footswitch not detected.
Please check for proper
connection.”
2 “Alcon Ultrasonic h/p not
detected. Check for proper
installation.”
3 “Please install an Alcon
Ultrasonic handpiece.”
4 “Ultrasonic handpiece is not
tuned. Press Test to prime/
tune.”
906-2020-501
CONDITION
The footswitch is not connected.
The installed U/S handpiece ID
does not match the Frag handpiece
ID.
The Test key was pressed when the
Frag handpiece is selected but not
connected.
Frag mode was entered and the
Frag handpiece is not connected.
The system is in Frag mode and the
Frag handpiece was removed.
The treadle is depressed in Frag
mode when the Frag handpiece is
not connected.
Frag handpiece was just connected
(so it is not tuned) and system is in
Frag mode.
Treadle is depressed in Frag mode
and Frag handpiece is connected
but not tuned.
Error occurred (U/S h/p current out of
range or U/S frequency error too
large), causing h/p to lose tuning and
system is in Frag mode.
ACTIONS
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
Any function not requiring the
footswitch is still available.
The popup is removed if the footswitch
is connected.
The popup is only redisplayed if the
footswitch is connected, then
disconnected again.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
No attempt will be made to tune this
handpiece if the Test key is pressed.
The popup is removed if all
unrecognized handpieces are
disconnected.
The popup is only redisplayed if the
unrecognized handpiece is removed,
then reconnected.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
If the popup was displayed because the
Test key was pressed, prime is not
started.
The popup is removed if the Frag
handpiece is connected. If the popup
was displayed because the Test key
was pressed, prime is started.
In Frag mode, frag and vac are not
available at the footswitch.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
A Test key is on the popup to start
prime/tune.
The popup is redisplayed each time
Frag mode is entered, or when the
treadle is again depressed in Frag
mode.
5-17

Table 5-9
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
5 “Ultrasonic handpiece tune
failure. Check tip for proper
installation.”
6 “Priming unsuccessful. Fluid
not detected in cassette.
Please attempt re-prime.”
7 “Bulb failure detected.
Please replace bulb.”
8 “Cassette is not ready.
Please check cassette for
proper installation.”
9 “Drainbag may be full.
PLEASE REPLACE
CASSETTE.”
10 “Cassette failed vacuum test.
Please eject and reinsert, or
replace cassette.”
5-18
CONDITION
Frag tuning failed.
No fluid intake was detected during
the prime sequence.
Either bulb is burned out.
The Bulb key of a burned out bulb
was pressed.
The cassette is not installed or did
not pass the vacuum test and the
Test key pressed.
The cassette is not installed or did
not pass the vacuum test, the Vit
key, Frag key, or Extrude key is
pressed, and the system enters the
mode.
Approximately 500 cc of fluid have
been drained into the bag. The fluid
cc count is reset whenever the
cassette is ejected.
The cassette failed the vacuum test
and the cassette ID is valid. The
vacuum test will be executed when
a cassette is installed and the
system is in a Setup mode or a
mode that uses vacuum. The
vacuum test is executed once for
each cassette insertion.
®
ACTIONS
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
In Frag mode, frag and vacuum are not
available.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
If the Surg key is pressed, the
Information popup indicating prime was
not performed will still be displayed.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
The bulb icon is greyed and covered
with a red “x”.
If the burned out bulb is replaced, the
popup is removed and the normal bulb
icon is displayed.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
If the popup was triggered because the
Test key was pressed, prime is not
started.
The popup is removed if the cassette is
installed and passes the vacuum test.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
The popup is removed if the cassette is
removed.
The popup is redisplayed the next time
the bag is full after a new cassette is
installed.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
Vit, Frag, and Extrude Vac functions
are not available at the footswitch.
Pressing the Test key will cause no
action.
906-2020-501
 ®
Table 5-9
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
11 “Cassette type is incorrect.
Ensure appropriate cassette
is installed.”
12 “Please adjust supply source
pressure from 90 to 120 psi.”
13 “Vacuum surges detected.
Check aspiration lines and
connections for leaks.”
14 “Pressure surges detected.
Check VFC/Scissors lines
and connections for leaks.”
906-2020-501
CONDITION
The cassette failed the vacuum test
and cassette ID is invalid.
The detected internal A/F module
source pressure is less than 80 psi.
The vacuum level exceeds its upper
tolerance.
Proportional pressure exceeds its
upper tolerance.
ACTIONS
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
Vit, Frag, and Extrude Vac functions
are not available at the footswitch.
Pressing the Test key will cause no
action.
Vac, vit, frag, scisr, Extrude vac, and
VFC are all turned off.
No keys are displayed on the popup.
The popup is removed when a certain
location on the poup is pressed. This
location will be only be known to Alcon
personnel to allow demonstration of the
system without air.
The popup is removed once pressure is
within its valid range.
The popup will only be redisplayed if
pressure is put within its valid range,
then drops below it again.
Vit, Frag, Scisr, Extrude, and VFC
modes can be entered, but these
functions are not provided at the
footswitch.
Vac, frag, and vit are turned off.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
Once the popup is removed, all
functions are available again.
The submodule processes new set
points after it has received a zero set
point from the Host.
VFC and proportional scissors are
turned off.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
Once the popup is removed, all
functions are available again.
The submodule processes new set
points after it has received a zero set
point from the Host.
5-19

Table 5-9
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
15 “Pressure surges detected.
Check Scissors/VFC lines
and connections for leaks.”
16 “Draining cassette. Please
wait.”
17 If the cassette is loaded:
“Cassette detected full.
PLEASE REPLACE
CASSETTE.”
If the cassette is not loaded:
A popup is displayed
indicating “Please check
cassette receiver mechanism
for blockage.”
18 “Please check cassette.”
19 “Please check cassette.”
20 “Apply vacuum to enable
additional Reflux pulses.”
5-20
CONDITION
Proportional pressure transducer
discrepancy (this may be a real
problem or it may be that the
handpiece is just not connected).
The cassette top fluid sensor
triggers.
Cassette pump failure
Cassette loading problem (cannot
rotate pump when loading the
cassette).
Cassette unloading problem.
The operator has requested more
than 10 consecutive reflux pulses
on a cassette port without
requesting vacuum. Each cassette
port has its own reflux count.
®
ACTIONS
VFC and proportional scissors are
turned off.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
Once the popup is removed, all
functions are available again.
The submodule processes new set
points after it has received a zero set
point from the Host.
No keys are displayed on the popup.
Vacuum, vit, and frag are turned off.
The popup is removed when cassette
draining is complete.
If cassette draining is not complete
within TBD seconds, the A/F module
sends a Cassette Pump Failure
Advisory to the Host.
If the cassette is loaded:
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
Vacuum, vit, prime and frag are turned
off.
If the cassette is not loaded:
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
The cassette is not loaded.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
The cassette is considered to be
unloaded.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
The popup is removed when vacuum is
applied on that cassette port.
906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-9
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green)

NUMBER POPUP TEXT CONDITION ACTIONS

21 “Light Sensor Triggered” Top fluid level sensor detects light VFI, Vit, Frag, & Extrude functions are
“Remove Flashlight and when transmitter LED is off. disabled.
Release Footswitch Treadle”
A timer is started.

If the timer expires, the popup is

displayed.

An OK key is on the popup to remove

it.

Popup is removed and functions are

restored when light is no longer
detected when the transmitting LED is
off. A pedal up condition is required
before cutting and/or vacuum is
resumed.

If the condition is cleared before timer

expiration, functions are restored and
cutting and/or vacuum continue without
requiring a pedal up.

22 “Check VGFI FAX Setup or LPA output out of lower tolerance The VGFI and F/AX up arrow
Choose 30mmHg Non- for 5 seconds. membrane keys and the footswitch
Adjustable Backup Pressure” infusion toggle key are unavailable.

The popup is displayed.

The advisory tone is emitted every 5

seconds until a key on the popup is
pressed.

If the condition goes away and the

mechanical default has not been
activated, the popup is removed and
the keys are available again. The
popup is redisplayed if the condition
occurs again.

The popup has an OK key to remove

the popup, and a 30mmHg key to
activate mechanical default.

If the mechanical output is activated,

the error is latched and the elevated
infusion keys, F/AX and VGFI
membrane arrow keys, and footswitch
infusion toggle are unavailable. The
icon representing the function that was
active (VGFI or F/AX) is turned off.

Adjustable pressure mode can be

reentered and the condition cleared if
either the VGFI or F/AX icon is
pressed.

906-2020-501 5-21
 ®

Table 5-9
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Green)

NUMBER POPUP TEXT CONDITION ACTIONS

23 “Diathermy output exceeded Diathermy voltage exceeds upper The submodule turns diathermy off.
upper tolerance. Press OK tolerance.
to continue.” The popup is displayed.

Unavailable keys: Diathermy key,

Diathermy membrane arrow keys,
Footswitch Diathermy keys, Diathermy
Handpiece key.

An OK key is on the popup to remove it

and reenable keys. Diathermy
capability is available after pressing the
OK key and releasing the diathermy
footswitch.

24 “Please check cassette Pump roller hub rotation not The submodule attempts to put the
receiver mechanism for detected during draining of the roller hub in the home position.
possible blockage” cassette
The popup is displayed.

An OK key is on the popup to remove

it.

The cassette must be removed and

reinserted before cassette functions are
enabled.

5-22 906-2020-501
 ®
Table 5-10
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
1 “Footswitch not detected.
Please check for proper
connection.”
2 “Alcon Ultrasonic h/p not
detected. Check for proper
installation.”
3 “Please install an Ultrasonic
handpiece for the current
mode.”
4 “Ultrasonic handpiece is not
tuned. Press Test to prime/
tune.”
906-2020-501
CONDITION
The footswitch is not connected.
The installed U/S handpiece ID
does not match the Frag, Mackool,
or 375/40 handpiece ID.
• The Test key was pressed when
the appropriate U/S handpiece is
selected but not connected.
• Frag or U/S mode was entered
and the appropriate U/S
handpiece is not connected.
• The system is in Frag or U/S
mode and the appropriate U/S
handpiece was removed.
• The treadle is depressed in Frag
or U/S mode when the
appropriate U/S handpiece is not
connected.
• An inappropriate U/S handpiece
was just installed for the current
domain, and an appropriate U/S
handpiece is not already installed
in the remaining port.
• The U/S or Frag handpiece was
just connected (so it is not tuned)
and the system is in the
corresponding U/S or Frag mode.
• The treadle is depressed in a U/S
or Frag mode and the
corresponding U/S handpiece is
connected but not tuned.
• An error occurred causing the
handpiece to lose tuning and the
system is in a U/S or Frag mode.
ACTIONS
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Any function not requiring the
footswitch is still available.
• The popup is removed if the
footswitch is connected.
• The popup is only redisplayed if the
footswitch is connected, then
disconnected again.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
• No attempt will be made to tune this
handpiece if the Test key is pressed.
• The popup is removed if all
unrecognized handpieces are
disconnected.
• The popup is only redisplayed if the
unrecognized handpiece is removed,
then reconnected.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• If the popup was displayed because
the Test key was pressed, prime is
not started.
• The popup is removed if the
appropriate U/S handpiece is
connected. If the popup was
displayed because the Test key was
pressed, prime is started.
• In U/S or Frag modes, U/S and
vacuum are not available at the
footswitch if the appropriate U/S
handpiece is not installed and tuned.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• A Test key is on the popup to start
prime/tune.
• The popup is redisplayed each time
U/S or Frag mode is entered, or
when the treadle is again depressed
in U/S or Frag mode, and the
corresponding U/S handpiece is
connected but not tuned.
5-23

Table 5-10
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
5 “Ultrasonic handpiece tune
failure. Check tip for proper
installation.”
6 “Priming unsuccessful. Fluid
not detected in cassette.
Please attempt re-prime.”
7 “Bulb failure detected.
Please replace bulb.”
8 “Cassette is not ready.
Please check cassette for
proper installation.”
9 “Drainbag may be full.
PLEASE REPLACE
CASSETTE.”
10 “Cassette failed vacuum test.
Please eject and reinsert, or
replace cassette.”
11 “Please adjust supply source
pressure from 90 to 120 psi.”
5-24
CONDITION
U/S or Frag tuning failed.
No fluid intake was detected during
the prime sequence.
• Either bulb burns out when it is
on.
• The Bulb key of a burned out bulb
was pressed.
The cassette is not installed and the
Vit (anterior or posterior) key, Frag
key, Extrude key, U/S key, or I/A
key was pressed, and the system
enters the mode.
Approximately 500 cc of fluid have
been drained into the bag. The fluid
cc count is reset whenever the
cassette is ejected.
The cassette failed the vacuum test.
The vacuum test will be executed
when a cassette is installed, the
cassette ID is valid for the current
domain, and the system is in a
Setup mode or a mode that uses
vacuum. The vacuum test is
executed once for each cassette
insertion.
The detected internal A/F module
source pressure is less than 78 psi
and the pressure source has been
set to “Standard” or the A/F module
source pressure is less than 68 psi
and the pressure source has not
been explicitly selected.
®
ACTIONS
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• In U/S and Frag modes, U/S and
vacuum are not available.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• If the Surg key is pressed, the
Information popup indicating prime
was not performed will still be
displayed.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• The bulb icon is grayed and covered
with a red circle with a slash.
• If the burned out bulb is replaced, the
popup is removed and the normal
bulb icon is displayed.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• The popup is removed if the cassette
is installed and passes the vacuum
test.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• The popup is removed if the cassette
is removed.
• The popup is redisplayed the next
time the bag is full after a new
cassette is installed.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
• Vit (anterior and posterior), Frag,
Extrude, U/S and I/A functions are
not available at the footswitch.
Pressing the Test key will cause no
action.
• Vacuum, Vit (anterior and posterior),
Frag, Scissors, VFC, U/S, and I/A are
turned off.
• No keys are displayed on the popup.
• The popup is removed when a certain
location on the popup is pressed. This
location will only be known to Alcon
personnel to allow demonstration of
the system without air.
• The popup is removed once pressure
is within its valid range.
continued on next page...
906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-10
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green)

NUMBER POPUP TEXT CONDITION ACTIONS

...continued from previous page

• The popup will only be redisplayed if

pressure is put within its valid range,
then drops below it again.
• Vit (anterior and posterior), Frag,
Scisr, Extrude, VFC, U/S and I/A
modes can be entered, but these
functions are not provided at the
footswitch.

12 “Press 5 Bar for low pressure
operation or press Standard
and increase air pressure.”
The detected internal A/F module
source pressure is less than 78 psi
and the module source pressure
has not been selected or has been
set to “Select”.
• Vacuum, Vit (anterior and posterior),
Frag, Scissors, VFC, U/S, and I/A are
turned off.
• A “5 Bar” key is for selecting 5 bar
mode (68 – 120 psi supply pressure)
and a “Standard” key is for selecting
standard mode (80 – 120 psi supply
pressure).
• The popup is removed when the 5
Bar key is pressed and the system
now is in 5 bar operation mode. The
popup can also be removed by
pressing the “Standard” key. After
which the popup is replaced with
advisory popup #11.
• The popup is also removed once
pressure is within its valid range.
• The popup will only be redisplayed if
no keys were pressed and the
pressure is put within its valid range,
then drops below it again.
• Vit (anterior and posterior), Frag,
Scisr, Extrude, VFC, U/S and I/A
modes can be entered, but these
functions are not provided at the
footswitch.

13 “Please adjust supply source
air pressure from 5 to 8 bar.”
The detected internal A/F module
source pressure is less than 68 psi
and the module source pressure
has been set to “5 Bar”.
• Vacuum, Vit (anterior and posterior),
Frag, Scissors, VFC, U/S, and I/A are
turned off.
• No keys are displayed on the popup.
• The popup is removed when a
certain location on the popup is
pressed. This location will only be
known to Alcon personnel to allow
demonstration of the system without
air.
• The popup is removed once pressure
is within its valid range.
• The popup will only be redisplayed if
pressure is put within its valid range,
then drops below it again.
• Vit (anterior and posterior), Frag,
Scisr, Extrude, VFC, U/S and I/A
modes can be entered, but these
functions are not provided at the
footswitch.

906-2020-501 5-25

Table 5-10
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
14 “Vacuum surges detected.
Check aspiration lines and
connections for leaks.”
15 “Pressure surges detected.
Check VFC/Scissors lines
and connections for leaks.”
16 “Pressure surges detected.
Check Scissors/VFC lines
and connections for leaks.”
17 “Draining cassette. Please
wait.”
18 If the cassette is loaded:
“Cassette detected full.
PLEASE REPLACE
CASSETTE.”
If the cassette is not loaded:
“Please check cassette
receiver mechanism for
blockage.”
19 “Please check cassette.”
20 “Please check cassette.”
5-26
CONDITION
The vacuum level exceeds its upper
tolerance.
Proportional pressure exceeds its
upper tolerance.
Proportional pressure transducer
discrepancy (this may be a real
problem or it may be that the
handpiece is just not connected).
The cassette top fluid sensor
triggers.
Cassette pump failure
Cassette loading problem (cannot
rotate pump when loading the
cassette).
Cassette unloading problem.
®
ACTIONS
• Vacuum, frag, vit (anterior and
posterior), U/S and I/A are turned off.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Once the popup is removed, all
functions are available again.
• The sub-module processes new set
points after it has received a zero set
point from the Host.
• VFC and proportional scissors are
turned off.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Once the popup is removed, all
functions are available again.
• The sub-module processes new set
points after it has received a zero set
point from the Host.
• VFC and proportional scissors are
turned off.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Once the popup is removed, all
functions are available again.
• The sub-module processes new set
points after it has received a zero set
point from the Host.
• No keys are displayed on the popup.
• Vacuum, vit (anterior and posterior),
prime, frag and U/S are turned off.
• The popup is removed when cassette
draining is complete.
• If cassette draining is not complete
within 12 seconds, the A/F module
sends a Cassette Pump Failure
Advisory to the Host.
If the cassette is loaded:
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Vacuum, vit (anterior and posterior),
prime, frag, U/S and I/A are turned
off.
If the cassette is not loaded:
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• The cassette is not loaded.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• The cassette is considered to be
unloaded.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
906-2020-501
 ®
Table 5-10
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
21 “Apply vacuum to enable
additional Reflux pulses.”
22 “Cassette type does not
match surgical mode. Please
insert the correct cassette.”
23 “Memory error, capabilities
may be limited.”
24 “Low battery condition.
Please replace the battery on
the remote control.”
25 “Doctor memories do not
match backup copy. Which
copy do you want to
overwrite?”
26 “Light sensor triggered
remove flashlight and release
treadle if vacuum was on.”
906-2020-501
CONDITION
The operator has requested more
than 10 consecutive micro-reflux
pulses in the posterior domain or 20
consecutive micro-reflux pulses in
the anterior domain on a cassette
port without requesting vacuum.
Each cassette port has its own
micro-reflux count.
• The cassette was just installed or
a new domain was entered and
the cassette is the wrong type for
the current surgical domain.
• The cassette is the wrong type for
the current surgical domain, and
a key to enter a mode that uses
vacuum was pressed.
At power-up, the CRC of the system
version number and model is
invalid.
• A remote control key was
pressed and a low battery
condition exists.
• A new domain was just entered
and a remote low battery
condition exists.
At power-up, the SRAM doctor
memories CRC is valid and the
Sound board doctor memories CRC
is valid, but the two CRCs do not
match.
The cassette top fluid sensor
detects light when the transmitter
LED is off.
ACTIONS
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
• The popup is removed when vacuum
is applied on that cassette port.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
it and the system provides functions
at the 400VS level.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove
it.
• The popup is only displayed once per
domain entry.
• A CPU Bd key is on the popup to
overwrite the SRAM doctor memories.
• A Snd Bd key is on the popup to
overwrite the Sound board doctor
memories.
• An Ignore key is on the popup to use
the SRAM doctor memories, and skip
all writes to the sound board
memory.
• VFI, Vit (Anterior and Posterior),
Frag, Extrude, Prime, Phaco and I/A
functions are disabled.
• A Timer is started.
• If the timer expires, the popup is
displayed.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
• Popup is removed and functions are
restored when light is no longer
detected when the transmitting LED
is off. A pedal up is required before
cutting and/or vacuum is resumed.
• If the condition is cleared before the
timer expiration, functions are
restored and cutting and/or vacuum
continue without requiring a pedal up.
5-27

Table 5-10
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green)
NUMBER POPUP TEXT
27 In the posterior domain: a
popup is displayed indicating
“Check VGFI F/AX setup.
Select 30 mmHg backup
pressure, or Ignore low
pressure condition.”
In the anterior domain:
a popup is displayed
indicating “Check AVGFI
setup. Select Gravity
irrigation, or Ignore low
pressure condition.”
5-28
®
CONDITION ACTIONS
LPA output out of lower tolerance • The VGFI, AVGFI and F/AX up arrow
for 5 seconds. membrane keys, Alternate infusion/
irrigation up keys and the footswitch
infusion/irrigation toggle keys are
unavailable.
• The advisory tone is emitted every 5
seconds until a key on the popup is
pressed.
• The popup is removed and the keys
are available again if the condition
goes away and the fixed backup
pressure has not been activated.
The popup is redisplayed if the
condition occurs again.
• Both popups have an Ignore key to
remove the popup and ignore the
condition until it has been corrected.
If the Ignore key is pressed, the
VGFI, AVGFI and F/AX up arrow
membrane keys, Alternate infusion/
irrigation up keys and the footswitch
infusion/irrigation toggle keys are
unavailable until the condition has
been corrected.
• If an unavailable key is pressed while
ignoring the condition, the popup for
the current domain is displayed.
• If an unavailable key is pressed while
in fixed backup pressure, an invalid
key tone is emitted and no popup is
displayed.
• The posterior popup has a 30 mmHg
key to turn the LPA pump on at its
fixed backup pressure. The VGFI
and F/AX arrow membrane keys,
Alternate infusion keys and the
footswitch infusion toggle keys are
unavailable. The F/AX and Infusion
keys are off but still available, so that
if one is pressed the condition is
cleared and the LPA pump is turned
on. If the anterior domain is entered,
gravity irrigation is selected and the
LPA pump is turned off.
• The anterior popup has a Gravity key
to switch to gravity irrigation. If the
Gravity key is pressed, all keys are
available in the anterior domain. A
popup is displayed indicating
“Disconnect AVGFI lines and raise
the bottle.” When the OK is key is
pressed to acknowledge this popup,
the system is switched to gravity
mode. If the posterior domain is
entered, the LPA pump is turned on
at its fixed backup pressure.
906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-10
Advisory Messages for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Green)

NUMBER POPUP TEXT CONDITION ACTIONS

28 “Doctor memories backup
copy must be replaced.
Please call Field Service.”
Sound Board Flash memory has a
problem during a Flash write.
• The popup is removed by pressing
the “OK” popup key.
• This popup is displayed any time a
write is attempted to the Flash
memories.

29 “The CPU board battery must CPU SRAM battery is getting low or • The popup is removed by pressing
be replaced. Please call is dead the “OK” popup key.
Field Service.” • This popup is displayed once after
each power up.

906-2020-501 5-29
 ®

Table 5-11
Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR ACTIONS
CHECKED

“Vit, Frag, Vacuum, 101
Scissor and VFI are
not available.”
• A/F communication line
failure.
• A/F RAM failure.
• A/F EPROM failure.
• A/F WDT test failure.
• A/F WDT reset.
• A/F invalid interrupt.
• Critical data discrepancy.
Init, run time. • The Air/Fluid module lets its WDT
reset it and the Host gets a Service
Init. Request interrupt.
Init. • The Host times out on the
Init. communication interface. This
Run-time. makes each of these failures appear
Run-time. to the Host as a communication
Run-time. failure.
• The Host resets the A/F module.
• Remaining actions are the same as
for error code 103.

“Vit, Frag, Vacuum, 102 • A/F I/O readback error. Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 103,
Scissor and VFI are except Host resets the A/F module.
not available.”

“Vit, Frag, Vacuum, 103 • A/F ADC out of tolerance.
Scissor and VFI are 104 • A/F ±15V out of tolerance.
not available.” 105 • A/F 12V out of tolerance.
106 • A/F 24V out of tolerance.
107 • A/F reference voltages out
of tolerance.
108 • Vac source pressure out of
tolerance (SP55) p < 50 or
p > 65. Checked only if
SP85 is OK. (or SP55
transducer offset is out of
tolerance).
109 • A/F module source
pressure > 100 psi. (SP85).
(or SP85 transducer offset
is out of tolerance).
110 • Proportional valve drive
(knee) voltage failure.
Init, run time. • All A/F module functions are
Init, run time. disabled.
Init, run time. • Vacuum, frag, vit, scissors, extrude,
Init, run time. VFC, and Test functions are all
Init. turned off.
• An OK key is on the popup to
Init, run time. remove it.
• If in any of the above modes, the
system enters the Surgery Setup
mode.
• Unavailable keys: Vit, Frag, Scisr,
Extrude, VFC mode keys, Test key,
Init, run time. Clean key, Surg key, footswitch
Reflux key, and Innovit, Accurus,
MicroPort, Frag, Scisr, VFC and
Extrude handpiece keys.
Init.

“Vit, Frag, VFI 111 • Vac transducers Init, run time. • All functions using vacuum are
(Extract), and discrepancy. disabled.
Vacuum are not 112 • Vac transducers range Init, run time. • Vacuum, frag, and vit are all turned
available.” invalid. off.
113 • Fluid level optical receiver Init • An OK key is on the popup to
fault. remove it.
114 • Solenoid valve current error Vac is on. • If in Vit, Frag, VFC extract or Extrude
status - vacuum. mode, the system enters the Surgery
115 • Cassette ID sensor failure. Cassette is not Setup mode.
present. • Unavailable keys: Vit, Frag, Extrude
mode keys, VFC extract submode
key, Test key, Clean key, footswitch
Reflux key, Innovit, Accurus,
MicroPort, Frag and Extrude
handpiece keys.

5-30 906-2020-501
 ®
Table 5-11
Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow)
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR
“VFI (Inject) and 116 • Proportional pressure
Prop Scissors are transducers range invalid.
not available.” • Solenoid valve current error
117 status - proportional
pressure.
“Vit, Single Cut and 118 • Solenoid valve current error
Multi-Cut Scissors status - pulse pressure.
are not available.”
“Ultrasonic power 201 • U/S Diathermy
and Diathermy are communication line failure.
not available.” • U/S Diathermy RAM failure.
• U/S Diathermy EPROM
failure.
• U/S Diathermy WDT test
failure.
• U/S Diathermy WDT reset.
• U/S Diathermy invalid
interrupt.
• Critical data discrepancy.
906-2020-501
WHEN
CHECKED ACTIONS
Init, run time. • Proportional pressure functions are
disabled.
Proportional • An OK key is on the popup to
pressure is on. remove it.
• If in VFC Inject or Prop Scissors
mode, the system enters the Surgery
Setup mode.
• Unavailable keys: VFC Inject, Prop
Scisr submode keys.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, an
invalid key click is emitted and the
popup is redisplayed.
Pulse pressure • Pulse pressure functions are
is on. disabled.
• Vit, Single Cut and Multi-Cut
Scissors are turned off. Vac is
turned off if current mode is a Vit
mode.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in Vit or Single Cut or Multi-Cut
Scissors modes, the system enters
the Surgery Setup mode.
• Unavailable keys: Vit mode key,
Single and Multi Scisr submode
keys, Innovit, Accurus, MicroPort
handpiece keys.
Init, run time. • The U/S Diathermy module lets its
WDT reset it and the Host gets a
Init. Service Request interrupt.
Init. • The Host times out on the
communication interface. This
Init. makes each of these failures appear
to the Host as a communication
Run-time. failure.
Run-time. • The Host resets the U/S Diathermy
module.
Run-time. • If U/S was on, vacuum is also turned
off.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in a Frag mode, the Surgery Setup
mode is entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag mode key,
Frag and Diathermy handpiece keys
in Setup mode, Diathermy key,
Diathermy membrane arrow keys,
footswitch diathermy keys, footswitch
U/S power keys.
5-31
 ®

Table 5-11
Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR ACTIONS
CHECKED

202 • U/S Diathermy I/O Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 201,
readback error. except the submodule reports the
error to the Host.

203 • U/S Diathermy ADC out of Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 201,
tolerance. except the submodule does not let
204 • U/S Diathermy +/-15V out Init, run time. the WDT reset it, and the Host does
of tolerance. not reset the submodule.
205 • U/S Diathermy 12V out of Init, run time.
tolerance (fan).
207 • U/S Diathermy 85V out of Init, run time.
tolerance.

For software 208 • Diathermy voltage exceeds Diathermy is on. • The submodule turns diathermy off.
versions below 1.11: upper tolerance. • An OK key is on the popup to
“Diathermy is not 209 • Diathermy compliance fault. Diathermy is on. remove it.
available.” • Unavailable keys: Diathermy key,
Diathermy membrane arrow keys,
footswitch diathermy keys,
Diathermy handpiece key.

“Ultrasonic power 210 • U/S power level adjustment Frag is on. • The submodule turns U/S power off
error Press OK to out of range (control loop until next zero power set point is
resume.” error). received from the Host.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.

“Ultrasonic power is 211 • U/S Diathermy 10V out of Init, run time. • The submodule turns U/S power off.
not available.” tolerance (affects • An OK key is on the popup to
handpiece readings). remove it.
• If in a Frag mode, the Surgery Setup
mode is entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag mode key,
Frag hdpc key, footswitch Frag keys.

“Ultrasonic h/p 212 • U/S h/p ground fault Run-time • The submodule turns U/S power off.
ground fault. Please • The U/S handpiece must be retuned.
replace handpiece.” • An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.

5-32 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-11
Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR CHECKED ACTIONS

“Illuminator and Air 301 • LPA/Illum communication
Pump settings are line failure.
fixed.” • LPA/Illum RAM failure.1
• LPA/Illum EPROM failure.
• LPA/Illum WDT test
failure.2
• LPA/Illum WDT reset.
• LPA/Illum invalid interrupt.
• Critical data discrepancy
Init, run time. • The LPA/Illum module lets its WDT
reset it and the Host gets a Service
Init. Request interrupt.
Init. • The Host times out on the
Init. communication interface. This
makes each of these failures appear
Run-time. to the Host as a communication
Run-time. failure.
Run-time. • The Host resets the LPA/Illum
module.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• Unavailable keys: F/A key, Infusion
key, VGFI key and Manual Infusion
key in Setup mode, elevated infusion
keys, F/A, VGFI and illuminator
membrane arrow keys, footswitch
infusion toggle, illuminator keys.

302 • LPA/Illum I/O readback Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 301,
error. except the submodule reports the
error to the Host and does not let its
WDT reset it.

303 • LPA/Illum ADC out of Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 301,
tolerance. (no effect on except the submodule does not let its
illuminator). WDT reset it, and the Host does not
304 • LPA/Illum +/-15V out of reset the submodule.
tolerance.

“Air pressure is in 306 • LPA/Illum 24V out of Init, run time. • The LPA mechanical output is
BACK-UP mode set tolerance. (affects LPA). activated.
at 30 mmHg.” 309 • LPA transducers Init, run time. • An OK key is on the popup to
discrepancy. remove it.
310 • LPA output out of upper LPA is on. • Unavailable keys: F/A key, Infusion
tolerance for 5 seconds. key, VGFI key and Manual Infusion
311 • LPA transducer invalid. LPA is on. key in Setup mode, elevated infusion
312 • LPA output ripple level Init. keys, F/A and VGFI membrane
error. LPA is on. arrow keys, footswitch infusion
313 • LPA dynamic pressure Init. toggle.
range failure.

906-2020-501 5-33
 ®

Table 5-11
Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR ACTIONS
CHECKED

“Possible Air Pump 307 • LPA directional solenoid Init, Run-time. If the error occurs at run-time:
error. Press Default valve status feedback error. • An Ignore key is to continue and
for 30mmHg.” ignore the error.
• A Default key is on the popup to
activate the mechanical output.
• The error tone is emitted every 5
seconds until a key on the popup is
pressed.
• If the mechanical output is activated,
the F/A key, Infusion key, VGFI key
and Manual Infusion key in Setup
mode, elevated infusion keys, F/A
and VGFI membrane arrow keys,
and footswitch infusion toggle are
unavailable.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, a
popup indicating air pressure is not
available is displayed.
If the error occurs at initialization, the
actions are the same as those for error
code 306.

“Air pressure is not 314 • LPA output solenoid valve Init, run time. • Same actions as error code 306,
available.” status feedback error. except different popup.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.

If the error occurs at 315
initialization:
“Illuminator is not
available.”
If error occurs at run-
time:
“Overtemp detected.
Illuminator will turn
off in 3 minutes.”
• Bulb temperature fault.
Init, Bulb is on If the error occurs at initialization:
• An OK key is on the popup to it.
• The illuminator is left off.
• The illuminator icon keys and
membrane arrow keys are
unavailable.
If error occurs at run-time:
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• The illuminator is turned off after the
elapsed time.
• The illuminator icon keys and
membrane arrow keys are
unavailable.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, an
invalid key click is emitted and a
popup is displayed indicating the
illuminator is not available.

5-34 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-11
Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR CHECKED ACTIONS

“Illuminator power 316 • LPA/Illum 17V out of Init. If the error occurs at initialization:
fault. Illumination tolerance. • An OK key is on the popup to
may be dim.” remove it.
• All functions are still available.

If the error occurs at run-time, no

action will be taken.

“Auto stopcock 317 • LPA auto stopcock solenoid Init, run time. • An OK key is on the popup to
failure. Switch (Future) valve status feedback error. remove it.
stopcock manually.” • Unavailable key: Auto stopcock.

For software • LPA output out of lower LPA is on. • The VGFI and F/AX up arrow
versions below 1.11: 318 tolerance for 5 seconds. membrane keys and the footswitch
“VGFI, F/AX (BSS) infusion toggle key are unavailable.
Pressure Low. Is • The error tone is emitted every 5
Infusion Line seconds until a key on the popup is
Connected?” pressed.
• Both popups are removed and the
keys are available again if the
condition goes away and the
mechanical default has not been
activated. The popup is redisplayed
if the condition occurs again.
• The popup has a No key to remove
the popup.
• The popup has a Yes key to activate
a secondary popup indicating “A
Fault Has Been Detected! Press
BACK-UP to set the VGFI, F/AX
(BSS) to 30 mmHg”. The Popup has
a BACK-UP key that will place the
module into mechanical default. The
popup also has an Ignore key that
will remove the popup and redisplay
the previous popup stating “Is
Infusion Line Connected?”.
• If the mechanical output is activated,
the error is latched and the F/AX key,
Infusion key, VGFI key and Manual
Infusion key in Setup mode, elevated
infusion keys, F/AX and VGFI
membrane arrow keys, and
footswitch infusion toggle are
unavailable.
• Once the error is latched, if an
unavailable key is pressed, a popup
indicating air pressure is fixed is
displayed.

906-2020-501 5-35
 ®

Table 5-11
Error Codes for Software Rel. 1.11 and Below (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR ACTIONS
CHECKED

“Air Pressure is not
available”.
319 • LPA 115V failure LPA is on • An O.K. key is available to remove
the popup.
• The F/AX key, Infusion key, VGFI
key and Manual Infusion key in
Setup mode, elevated infusion keys,
F/AX and VGFI membrane arrow
keys, and footswitch infusion toggle
are unavailable.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, the
popup is redisplayed.

“Footswitch detents 906 • Host 24V out of tolerance Init, run time. • An OK key is on the popup to
may be irregular.” (footswitch detents invalid). remove it.

1
RAM, EPROM, invalid interrupt, and critical data discrepancy errors are not specifically reported to the Host because their
occurrence indicates operation of the submodule is marginal, at best.

2
The WDT test failure is not specifically reported to the Host since some failure modes prevent the ability to do so. These failure
modes include if the WDT circuits hold the PIO’s in the reset state, preventing the generation of a Service Request.

5-36 906-2020-501
 ®
Table 5-12
Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow)
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR
“All surgical modes 101 • A/F communication line
are not available.” failure.
• A/F RAM failure.
• A/F EPROM failure.
• A/F WDT test failure.
• A/F WDT reset.
• A/F invalid interrupt.
• Critical data discrepancy.
“All surgical modes 102 • A/F I/O read back error.
are not available.”
“All surgical modes 103 • A/F ADC out of tolerance.
are not available.” 104 • A/F +/-15V out of
tolerance.
105 • A/F 12V out of tolerance.
106 • A/F 24V out of tolerance.
107 • A/F reference voltages out
of tolerance.
108 • Vac source pressure out of
tolerance (SP55) p < 50 or
p > 65. Checked only if
SP85 is OK. (or SP55
transducer offset is out of
tolerance).
109 • A/F module source
pressure > 100 psi.
(SP85). (or SP85
transducer offset is out of
tolerance).
110 • Proportional valve drive
(knee) voltage failure.
“Modes using 111 • Vac transducers
vacuum are not discrepancy.
available.” 112 • Vac transducers range
invalid.
113 • Fluid level optical receiver
fault.
114 • Solenoid valve current
error status – vacuum.
115 • Cassette ID sensor failure.
906-2020-501
WHEN
CHECKED ACTIONS
Init, Run-time. • The Air/Fluid module lets its WDT
reset it and the Host gets a Service
Init. Request interrupt.
Init. • The Host times out on the
Init. communication interface. This
Run-time. makes each of these failures appear
Run-time. to the Host as a communication
Run-time. failure.
• The Host resets the A/F module.
• Remaining actions are the same as
for error code 103.
Init, Run-time. • Same actions as error code 103,
except Host resets the A/F module.
Init, Run-time. • All A/F module functions are disabled.
Init, Run-time. • The A/F module reports the error
then lets its WDT reset it.
Init, Run-time. • Vacuum, frag, vit, scissors, extrude,
Init, Run-time. VFC, U/S, I/A, and Test functions
Init. are all turned off.
• An OK key is on the popup to
Init, Run-time. remove it.
• If in any of the above modes, the
system enters the current domain
Surgery Setup mode.
• Unavailable keys: Vit (Posterior),
Frag, Scissor, Extrude, VFC, Vit
Init, Run-time. (Anterior), U/S, I/A mode keys, Test
key, Clean key, Surg key, footswitch
Micro Reflux key, Continuous Reflux
key, Irrigation key, and Innovit,
Accurus, Frag, Scisr, VFC, Extrude,
Init. Phaco, I/A, Ant. Vit handpiece keys.
Init, Run-time. • All functions using vacuum are
Init, Run-time. disabled.
• Vacuum, frag, vit, U/S, and I/A are
Init. all turned off.
• An OK key is on the popup to remove it.
Vac is on. • If in Vit (Posterior), Frag, VFC
extract, Extrude, Vit (Anterior), U/S
Cassette is not or I/A mode, the system enters the
present. current domain Surgery Setup
mode.
• Unavailable keys: Vit (Posterior),
Frag, Extrude, Surg (Anterior), Vit
(Anterior), U/S, I/A mode keys, VFC
extract submode key, Test key,
Clean key, footswitch Micro Reflux
key, Continuos Reflux key, Innovit,
Accurus, Frag, Extrude, Phaco, I/A
and Ant. Vit handpiece keys.
5-37
 ®

Table 5-12
Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR ACTIONS
CHECKED

“VFC (Inject) and 116 • Proportional pressure Init, Run-time. • Proportional pressure functions are
Prop Scissors are transducers range invalid. disabled.
not available.” 117 • Solenoid valve current Proportion-al • VFC inject and proportional scissors
error status – proportional pressure is on. are turned off.
pressure. • An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in VFC Inject Prop or Calib
Scissors mode, the system enters
the Vitreoretinal Surgery Setup
mode.
• Unavailable keys: VFC Inject, Prop
Scissor, and Calib Scissor submode
keys.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, an
invalid key click is emitted and the
popup is redisplayed.

“Vit and Multi-Cut 118 • Solenoid valve current Pulse pressure • Pulse pressure functions are
Scissors are not error status – pulse is on. disabled.
available.” pressure. • Vit (Anterior, Posterior) and Multi-Cut
Scissors are turned off. Vacuum is
turned off if current mode is a Vit
(Anterior, Posterior) mode.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in Vit (Anterior, Posterior), or Multi-
Cut Scissors modes, the system
enters the current domain Surgery
Setup mode.
• Unavailable keys: Vit (Anterior,
Posterior), mode key, Multi Scissor
submode key, Innovit, Accurus, and
Ant. Vit handpiece keys.

“Anterior surgical 119 • Continuous reflux valve Run-time • Anterior functions using vacuum are
modes are not stuck open error. (anterior) disabled.
available.” • Vit (Anterior), Phaco, I/A and Test
(Anterior) functions are turned off.
• To prevent cassette flooding, the
lower cassette valves will be closed
while an Anterior cassette is present.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in Vit (Anterior), Phaco or I/A
mode, the Cataract Surgery Setup
mode is entered.
• Unavailable keys: Vit (Anterior),
Phaco, and I/A mode keys, Test key
(Anterior), Surg key (Anterior),
Continuous reflux, Micro-reflux
(Anterior), Phaco, I/A and Vit
(Anterior) handpiece keys.

5-38 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-12
Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR CHECKED ACTIONS

“Some surgical 120 • Irrigation valve stuck Run-time • U/S, I/A, Wet Vit (Anterior), Test
modes are not closed error. (anterior) (Anterior), and Extrude functions are
available.” turned off.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in Wet Vit (Anterior), Phaco or I/A
mode, the Cataract Surgery Setup
mode is entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag, U/S, I/A,
Wet Vit (Anterior), and Extrude
mode keys, Test key (Anterior),
Continuous irrigation (footswitch and
touch key), Frag, Phaco, I/A, and
Extrude handpiece keys.

“Continuous reflux is 121 • Continuous reflux valve Run-time • Continuous reflux is disabled.
not available.” stuck closed error. (anterior) • An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• Unavailable key: Continuous reflux
footswitch.

“Irrigation must be 122
turned off manually.”
• Irrigation valve stuck open
error.
Run-time • Irrigation is turned on. If a valid
(anterior) cassette is present and AVGFI is
selected, the AVGFI pump will be
turned on.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• Unavailable keys: Continuous
irrigation (footswitch and touch key).
The continuous irrigation key is
turned on (highlighted in blue) as
long as a cassette is inserted and
has passed the vacuum test.
• The Gravity key in the Irrigation
Setup screen will be available to
allow switching to Gravity even
though irrigation and AVGFI may be
on.

“Ultrasonic power 201 • U/S Diathermy Init, Run-time. • The U/S Diathermy module lets its
and Diathermy are communication line failure. WDT reset it and the Host gets a
not available.” • U/S Diathermy RAM Init. Service Request interrupt.
failure.5 • The Host times out on the
• U/S Diathermy EPROM Init. communication interface. This
failure. makes each of these failures appear
• U/S Diathermy WDT test Init. to the Host as a communication
failure.6 failure.
• U/S Diathermy WDT reset. Run-time. • The Host resets the U/S Diathermy
• U/S Diathermy invalid Run-time. module.
interrupt. • If U/S was on, vacuum is also turned
• Critical data discrepancy. Run-time. off.
• U/S Diathermy I/O Init, Run-time. • An OK key is on the popup to
readback error. remove it.

continued on next page...

906-2020-501 5-39
 ®

Table 5-12
Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR ACTIONS
CHECKED

...continued from previous page

• If in a Frag or U/S mode, the current

domain Surgery Setup mode is
entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag, U/S mode
keys, Frag, Phaco and Diathermy
handpiece keys in Setup mode,
Diathermy key, Diathermy
membrane arrow keys, footswitch
diathermy keys, footswitch U/S
power keys.

203 • U/S Diathermy ADC out of Init, Run-time. • Same actions as error code 201,
tolerance. except the submodule reports the
204 • U/S Diathermy +/-15V out Init, Run-time. error to the Host.
of tolerance.
205 • U/S Diathermy 12V out of Init, Run-time.
tolerance (fan).
207 • U/S Diathermy 85V out of Init, Run-time.
tolerance.

“Diathermy is not 208 • Diathermy voltage exceeds Diathermy is • The submodule turns diathermy off.
available.” upper tolerance. on. • An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• Unavailable keys: Diathermy key,
Diathermy membrane arrow keys,
footswitch diathermy keys,
Diathermy handpiece key.

“Ultrasonic power is 211 • U/S Diathermy 10V out of
not available.” tolerance (affects
handpiece readings).
Init, Run-time. • The submodule turns U/S power off.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.
• If in a Frag or U/S mode, the current
domain Surgery Setup mode is
entered.
• Unavailable keys: Frag and U/S
mode keys, Frag and Phaco
handpiece keys, and footswitch Frag
keys.

“Ultrasonic h/p 212
ground fault. Please
replace handpiece.”
• U/S h/p ground fault
Run-time • The submodule turns U/S power off.
• The Frag, Phaco, Mackool
handpieces must be retuned.
• An OK key is on the popup to
remove it.

5-40 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-12
Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR CHECKED ACTIONS

In posterior domain: 301 • LPA/Illum communication
“Illuminator and Air line failure.
Pump settings are • LPA/Illum RAM failure.1
fixed.” • LPA/Illum EPROM failure.
• LPA/Illum WDT test
In anterior domain: failure.2
“Illuminators and • LPA/Illum WDT reset.
AVGFI are not • LPA/Illum invalid interrupt.
available. • Critical data discrepancy
Disconnect AVGFI.” • LPA/Illum I/O readback
error.
Init, Run-time. • The LPA/Illum module lets its WDT
reset it and the Host gets a Service
Init. Request interrupt.
Init. • The Host times out on the
Init. communication interface. This makes
each of these failures appear to the
Run-time. Host as a communication failure.
Run-time. • The Host resets the LPA/Illum module.
Run-time. • The LPA pump is on at its fixed
Init, Run-time. backup pressure.
• If the error occurs during run-time,
the illuminators are on, otherwise,
they are off.
• In anterior domain: Vacuum is
disabled until the OK key is pressed.
• Both popups have an OK key to
remove the popup.
• Unavailable keys: F/AX key, Infusion
key, VGFI key, AVGFI key, Gravity
Infusion key, Gravity Irrigation key in
Setup mode, Alternate infusion/irrigation
keys, F/AX, Infusion, Irrigation, and
illuminator membrane arrow keys,
footswitch alternate infusion/irrigation
toggle, illuminator keys.

304 • LPA/Illum +/-15V out of Init, Run-time. • Same actions as error code 301,
tolerance. except the submodule reports the
error to the Host and then lets its
WDT reset it.

In posterior domain: 303 • LPA/Illum ADC out of Init, r-time • In the posterior domain: LPA pump
“Air pressure in non- tolerance. (no effect on is on at its fixed backup pressure.
adjustable backup illuminator). • In the anterior domain: Vacuum is
mode set at 30 306 • LPA/Illum 24V out of Init, Run-time. disabled and the LPA pump remains
mmHg.” tolerance. (affects LPA). on until the OK key is pressed.
309 • LPA transducers Init, Run-time. • Both popups have an OK key to
In anterior domain: discrepancy. remove the popup.
“Disconnect AVGFI 310 • LPA output out of upper LPA is on. • Unavailable keys: F/AX key, Infusion
and use gravity tolerance for 5 seconds. key, VGFI key, AVGFI key, Gravity
irrigation.” Vacuum 311 • LPA transducer invalid for LPA is on. Infusion, and Gravity Irrigation keys in
is disabled until the 3 seconds. Setup mode, Alternate Infusion keys,
OK key is pressed. 312 • LPA output ripple level LPA is on. Alternate Irrigation keys, F/AX, Infusion,
error. and Irrigation membrane arrow keys,
313 • LPA dynamic pressure Init. footswitch infusion/irrigation toggle,
range failure. VGFI-F/AX and AVGFI handpiece
keys.

In posterior domain: 307
“Possible Air Pump
error. Press 30 mmHg
backup or ignore.”
In anterior domain:
“Possible Air Pump
error. Press Gravity
irrigation, or Ignore.”
• LPA directional solenoid
valve status feedback
error.
Init, Run-time. If the error occurs at run-time:
• In posterior domain: the error tone
is emitted every 5 seconds until a
key on the popup is pressed.
• In anterior domain: Vacuum is
disabled until one of the popup keys
is pressed.
continued on next page...

906-2020-501 5-41
 ®

Table 5-12
Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR ACTIONS
CHECKED

...continued from previous page

• Both popups have an Ignore key to

continue and ignore the error.
• A 30 mmHg key is on the posterior
domain popup to turn the LPA pump
on at its fixed backup pressure.
• A Gravity key is on the anterior
domain popup to select gravity
irrigation. If the Gravity key is
pressed, the “Disconnect AVGFI lines
and raise the bottle.” Advisory popup
is displayed. The pump remains on
until the OK key is pressed and then
the pump is turned off.
• If the LPA pump is on at its fixed
backup pressure, or the Gravity key is
pressed and the advisory is
acknowledged, the F/AX key, Infusion
key, VGFI key, AVGFI key, Gravity
Infusion key and Gravity Irrigation key
in Setup mode, Alternate Infusion
keys, Alternate Irrigation keys, F/AX,
Infusion, and Irrigation membrane
arrow keys, and footswitch infusion/
irrigation toggle keys are unavailable.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, a
popup indicating “Air pressure is not
available.” is displayed.
• If the error occurs at initialization, the
actions are the same as those for
error code 306.

Same actions as 314 • LPA output solenoid valve • An OK key is on the popup to
error code 306, status feedback error. Init, Run-time. remove it.
except in the
posterior domain, the
popup indicates “Air
pressure is not
available.”

If error occurs at 315 • Bulb temperature fault. Init, If the error occurs at initialization:
initialization: Bulb is on • An OK key is on the popup to
“Illuminator is not remove it.
available.” • The illuminator is left off.
• The illuminator icon keys and
If error occurs at run- membrane arrow keys are unavailable.
time: “Overtemp If error occurs at run-time:
detected. Illuminator • An OK key is on the popup to
will turn off in 3 remove it.
minutes.” • The illuminator is turned off after the
elapsed time.
• The illuminator icon keys and
membrane arrow keys are unavailable.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, an
invalid key click is emitted and a
popup is displayed indicating the
illuminator is not available.

5-42 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-12
Error Codes for Software Rel. 2.07 and Above (Yellow)
WHEN
POPUP TEXT ERROR # ERROR CHECKED ACTIONS

If the error occurs at 316 • LPA/Illum 17V out of Init. If the error occurs at initialization:
initialization: tolerance. • An OK key is on the popup to
“Illuminator power remove it.
fault. Illumination • All functions are still available.
may be dim.”
If the error occurs at run-time:
no action will be taken.

“Auto stopcock 317 • LPA auto stopcock Init, Run-time. • An OK key is on the popup to
failure. Switch solenoid valve status remove it.
stopcock manually.” feedback error. • Unavailable key: Auto stopcock.
• No action is taken for this error until
the auto stopcock function is
implemented.

In the posterior 319 • LPA 115V failure LPA is on • In the anterior domain: Vacuum is
domain: “Air disabled until the OK key is pressed.
pressure is not • Both popups have an OK key to
available”. remove the popup.
• The F/AX key, Infusion key, VGFI
In the anterior key, AVGFI key, Gravity Infusion
domain: “Disconnect key, Gravity Irrigation key in Setup
AVGFI and use mode, Alternate infusion keys,
gravity irrigation.” Alternate Irrigation keys, F/AX,
infusion, and irrigation membrane
arrow keys, and footswitch infusion/
irrigation toggle keys are
unavailable.
• If an unavailable key is pressed, a
popup stating “Air pressure is not
available.” is displayed.

“Footswitch detents 906 • Host 24V out of tolerance Init, Run-time. • An OK key is on the popup to
may be irregular.” (footswitch detents invalid). remove it.

1
RAM, EPROM, invalid interrupt, and critical data discrepancy errors are not specifically reported to the Host because their
occurrence indicates operation of the submodule is marginal, at best.
2
The WDT test failure is not specifically reported to the Host since some failure modes prevent the ability to do so. These failure
modes include if the WDT circuits hold the PIO’s in the reset state, preventing the generation of a Service Request.

906-2020-501 5-43
 ®

Table 5-13
Fault Codes for All Software Versions (Red)
WHEN
FAULT # POPUP TEXT FAULT CHECKED ACTIONS

401 "Please Note • Front Panel
System Fault 401 communication line
Call Field Service" failure.
• Front Panel RAM failure.
• Front Panel EPROM
failure.
• Front Panel WDT test
failure.
• Front Panel WDT reset.
• Front Panel invalid
interrupt.
Init, run time. • The Front Panel Submodule lets its
WDT reset it and the Host gets a
Service Request interrupt.
Init. • The Host times out on the
Init. communication interface. This
makes each of these failures appear
Init. to the Host as a communication
failure.
Init, run time. • The Host puts all modules in Reset.
Init, run time. • The Fault screen is displayed with
the error code.
• The operator must cycle power.

402 • Front Panel I/O readback Run-time. • The Host puts all modules in Reset.
error. • The Fault screen is displayed with
903 • Host ADC ref voltage out Init, run time. the error code.
of tolerance. • The operator must cycle power.
904 • Host +/-15V out of Init, run time.
tolerance.
905 • Host 12V out of tolerance Init, run time.
(affects CPU).
907 • Host 5V out of tolerance. Init, run time.
908 • Host WDT test failure. Init, run time.
909 • Host WDT triggered. Init, run time.
910 • Host AC power failure. Init, run time.
911 • Host Critical Data Init, run time.
discrepancy.
912 • Host software error. Init, run time.
913 • Host AMX call error. Init, run time.
914 • Host Fatal AMX error. Init, run time.
915 • Host file open error (font Init.
or icon file).
916 • Host memory allocation Init.
error.
917 • Host graphics init failure. Init.
918 • Host invalid opcode Init, run time.
exception.
919 • Host coprocessor not Init, run time.
available exception.
920 • Host double fault Init, run time.
exception.
921 • Host coprocessor Init, run time.
segment overrun
exception.
922 • Host invalid TSS Init, run time.
exception.
923 • Host segment not present Init, run time.
exception.
924 • Host stack fault Init, run time.
exception.
925 • Host general protection Init, run time.
fault.
926 • Host page fault Init, run time.
exception.
927 • Host DOS critical error. Init, run time.
928 • Host CRC of RFA error. Init.
929 • Host EOC for ADC error. Init, run time.
930 • Module version Init.
mismatch.

5-44 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 5-13
Fault Codes for All Software Versions (Red)
WHEN
FAULT # POPUP TEXT FAULT CHECKED ACTIONS

NA • Host POST failure (see Init. • The system does not complete boot-
HSIS for a list of the up.
tests). • The Alcon logo remains displayed.
• The POST code is displayed on the
POST LEDs on the Power Signal
Distribution board inside the unit.
• The operator must cycle power.

• The EEPROM is not used on any of the submodules so it is not tested.

• The Front Panel 24V signal only affects the flash, it does not affect the module’s function. No action is taken if this signal
is out of tolerance.
• The LPA/Illum 12V out of tolerance signal (affects illuminator fan) is not available to the software. If this signal should fail,
it would eventually result in a bulb temperature fault.
• The U/S Diathermy 24V out of tolerance signal is not used.

906-2020-501 5-45
 ®

Table 5-14
POST Code Definitions
CODE DEFINITION CODE DEFINITION
02 VERIFY REAL MODE 74 TEST REAL TIME CLK
04 GET CPU TYPE 76 CHECK FOR KEYBD ERROR
06 INIT SYSTEM HARDWARE 7C SET-UP H/W INTRPR VECTORS
08 INIT CHIPSET REGS W/POST VALUES 7E TEST CO-PROC IF PRESENT
09 SET IN POST FLAG 80 DISABLE ONBD l/O PORTS
OA INIT CPU REGS 82 DET/ INST EXT RS232 PORTS
0C INIT CACHE TO POST VALUES 84 DET/ INST EXT PARA PORTS
OE INIT l/O 86 RE-INIT ONBD l/O PORTS
10 INIT POWER MGMT 88 INIT BIOS DATA AREA
11 LOAD ALT REGS W/POST CODES 8A INIT EXTND BIOS DATA AREA
12 JUMP TO USER PATCH0 8C INIT FLOPPY CTLR
14 INIT KEYBD CTLR 90 INIT HARD DISK CTLR
16 BIOS ROM CHKSUM 91 INIT LOCAL BUS HD CTLR
18 8254 TIMER INIT 92 JUMP TO USER PATCH2
1A 8237 DMA CTLR INIT 94 DISAB A20 ADDR LINE
1C RESET PROG INTRPT CTLR 96 CLR HUGE ES SEG REG
20 TEST DRAM REFRESH 98 SEARCH FOR OPT ROMS
22 TEST 8274 KEYBD CTLR 9A SHADOW OPT ROMS
24 SET ES SEG REG TO 4 GBYTES 9C SET-UP POWER MGMT
28 AUTOSIZE DRAM 9E ENAB H/W INTRPTS
2A CLEAR 512K BASE MEM A0 SET TIME OF DAY
2C TEST 512K BASE ADDR LINES A2 CHECK KEY LOCK
2E TEST 512K BASE MEM A4 INIT TYPEMATIC RATE
32 TEST CPU BUS-CLK FREQ A8 ERASE F2 PROMPT
34 TEST CMOS RAM AA SCAN FOR F2 KEY STROKE
37 RE-INIT CHIPSET AC ENTER SETUP
38 SHADOW SYST BIOS ROM AE CLEAR IN-POST FLAG
39 RE-INIT CACHE B0 CHECK FOR ERRORS
3A AUTOSIZE CACHE B2 PREP TO BOOT OP SYST
3C CONFIG ADV CHIPSET REGS B4 ONE BEEP
3D LOAD ALT REGS WITH CMOS VALUES B6 CHECK PASSWORD (OPT)
40 SET INIT CPU SPEED B8 CLR GLOBAL DESC TABLE
42 INIT INTRPT VECTORS BC CLR PARITY CHECKERS
44 INIT BIOS INTRPTS BE CLEAR SCREEN (OPT)
46 CHECK ROM COPYRIGHT NOTICE BF CHK VIRUS & B/U REMINDE
47 INIT MGR FOR PCI OPTION ROMS C0 TRY TO BOOT W/ INT9
48 CHECK VIDEO CONFIG VS CMOS D0 INTRPT HANDLER ERROR
49 INIT PCI BUS & DEVICES D2 UNK INTRPT ERROR (Normal code displayed
4A INIT ALL VIDEO ADAPT IN SYST at end of initialization)
4C SHADOW VIDEO BIOS ROM D4 PENDING INTRPT ERROR
4E DISPLAY COPYRIGHT NOTICE D6 INIT OPT ROM ERROR
50 DISPLAY CPU TYPE & SPEED D8 SHUTDOWN ERROR
52 TEST KEYBD DA EXTENDED BLK MOVE
54 SET KEY CLICK IF ENAB DC SHUTDOWN 10 ERROR
56 ENAB KEYBD E2 INIT CHIPSET
58 TEST FOR UNEXPECT INTRPTS E3 INIT REFRESH COUNTER
5A DISPLAY PROMPT "PRESS F2" E4 CHK FOR FORCED FLASH
5C TEST RAM BETWEEN 512K & 640K E5 CHK H/W STATUS OF ROM
60 TEST EXTENDED MEM E6 BIOS ROM IS OK
62 TEST EXTENDED MEM LINES E7 DO COMPLETE RAM TEST
64 JUMP TO USER PATCH1 E8 DO OEM INIT
66 CONFIG ADV CACHE REGS E9 INIT INTRPT CTLR
68 ENAB EXT & CPU CACHES EA READ BOOTSTRAP CODE
6A DISPLAY EXT CACHE SIZE EB INIT ALL VECTORS
6C DISPLAY SHADOW MSG EC BOOT FLASH PROG
6E DISPLAY NON-DISP SEGS ED INIT BOOT DEVICE
70 DISPLAY ERROR MSGS EE BOOT CODE READ OK
72 CHECK FOR CONFIG ERROR

5-46 906-2020-501
 ®

SECTION SIX
SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER PAGE #

System Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-801 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Air/Fluid Module Pneumatic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-804 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
LPAS Assembly Pneumatic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-805 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
U/S Diathermy Controller (A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
U/S Driver (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2000-042 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Air Fluid Controller (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Phaco Backplane (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2000-014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Coag PCB (A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-3940-014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Receiver Mech. PCB (A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Transducer PCB (A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Front Panel Controller (A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Front Panel Controller (A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
7 Segment Display (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
7 Segment Display (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Handpiece LED PCB (A10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Stand-by Switch PCB (A11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
LPAS/Illuminator Controller (A14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Power Supply (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
LPAS/Standby (A16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940-2020-016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69

Cables
DESCRIPTION FIGURE PAGE #

W1 (202-1270-501) - DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

W2 (202-1241-XXX) - 110VAC Internal Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W3 (202-1259-501) - Illumination Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W4 (202-1271-501) - 85VDC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W5, W7, W9, W11 (202-1119-XXX) Common Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W6, W8, W10, W12 (202-1118-XXX) Common Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
W16 (202-1490-501) PCMCIA Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
W17 (202-1473-501) PCMCIA Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
W19 (202-1340-001) F/S-IV Pole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
W20 (202-1267-501) F/S-IV Pole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

906-2020-501 6-1
 ®

Cables - continued
DESCRIPTION FIGURE PAGE #

W21 (202-1269-501) Speaker Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

W22 (202-1330-001) Video Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
W23 (202-1366-501) Remote Serial Communications Cable . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
W24 (202-1272-501) Standby/Sound Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
W25 (202-1128-501) LCD Backlight Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
W26 (202-1425-501) 7 Segment Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
W27 (202-1426-501) Handpiece LED Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
W28 (202-1361-501) Pneumatic Connector Valve Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
W29 (202-1342-501) Receiver Mechanism Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
W30, W31 (202-1327-XXX) Opto Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
W32 (202-1345-001) Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
W33 (202-1253-501) Cylinder Valve-A Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
W34 (202-1254-501) Cylinder Valve-B Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
W35 (202-1263-501) Solenoid Valve PCM Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
W36 (202-1264-501) A/F Control Valve PVM Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W37 (202-1262-501) Main Air Source Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W38 (202-1341-501) LPAS Valves Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W39 (202-1274-501) LPAS Pump Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W40 (202-1255-501) Switch/Sensor Illumination Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W41 (202-1256-501) Illumination Fan Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
W43 (202-1265-501) Handpiece Connection Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
W44 (202-1463-501) Phaco Fan Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
W45 (202-1268-501) Transducer Signal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
W46 (202-1459-501) Power Control Cable (PS 2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
W47 (202-1458-501) 5V Enable Cable (PS 2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
W48 (202-1515-501) LCD Inverter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
W49 (202-1517-001) Video Cable for 421 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

6-2 906-2020-501
 ®

Figure 6-3
W3 (202-1259-501) - Illumination Power Cable

Figure 6-4
W4 (202-1271-501) - 85VDC Power Cable

Figure 6-1
W1 (202-1270-501) - DC Power Cable

Figure 6-5
W5, W7, W9, W11 (202-1119-XXX)
Common Signal Cable

Figure 6-2
W2 (202-1241-XXX) - 110VAC Internal Power
Cable

Figure 6-6
W6, W8, W10, W12 (202-1118-XXX)
Common Signal Cable

906-2020-501 6-7
 ®

Figure 6-7
W16 (202-1490-501) PCMCIA Signal Cable

Figure 6-8
W17 (202-1473-501) PCMCIA Power Cable

6-8 906-2020-501
 ®

Figure 6-9
W19 (202-1340-001) F/S-IV Pole Cable

Figure 6-10
W20 (202-1267-501) F/S-IV Pole Cable

Figure 6-11
W21 (202-1269-501) Speaker Cable

906-2020-501 6-9
 ®

Figure 6-12
W22 (202-1330-001) Video Cable

Figure 6-13
W23 (202-1366-501) Remote Serial Communications Cable

Figure 6-14
W24 (202-1272-501) Standby/Sound Cable
6-10 906-2020-501
 ®

Figure 6-15
W25 (202-1128-501) LCD Backlight Cable
Figure 6-17
W27 (202-1426-501) Handpiece LED Cable

Figure 6-18
W28 (202-1361-501) Pneumatic Connector Valve
Cable

Figure 6-16
W26 (202-1425-501) 7 Segment Cable

906-2020-501 6-11
 ®

Figure 6-19
W29 (202-1342-501) Receiver Mechanism Signal Cable

Figure 6-20
W30, W31 (202-1327-XXX) Opto Sensor Cable

Figure 6-21
W32 (202-1345-001) Motor Cable

6-12 906-2020-501
 ®

Figure 6-22
W33 (202-1253-501) Cylinder Valve-A Cable

Figure 6-23
W34 (202-1254-501) Cylinder Valve-B Cable

Figure 6-24
W35 (202-1263-501) Solenoid Valve PCM Cable

906-2020-501 6-13
 ®

Figure 6-28
Figure 6-25 W39 (202-1274-501) LPAS Pump Cable
W36 (202-1264-501) A/F Control Valve PVM
Cable

Figure 6-26
W37 (202-1262-501) Main Air Source Cable

Figure 6-29
W40 (202-1255-501) Switch/Sensor Illumination
Cable

Figure 6-27
W38 (202-1341-501) LPAS Valves Cable

Figure 6-30
W41 (202-1256-501) Illumination Fan Cable

6-14 906-2020-501
 ®

Figure 6-31
W43 (202-1265-501) Handpiece Connection Cable

Figure 6-32
W44 (202-1463-501) Phaco Fan Cable

906-2020-501 6-15
 ®

Figure 6-33
W45 (202-1268-501) Transducer Signal Cable

Figure 6-34
W46 (202-1459-501) Power Control Cable (PS 2 only)

Figure 6-35
W47 (202-1458-501) 5V Enable Cable (PS 2 only)

6-16 906-2020-501
 ®

Figure 6-36
W48 (202-1515-501) LCD Inverter Cable

Figure 6-37
W49 (202-1517-001) Video Cable for 421 LCD

906-2020-501 6-17
 ®

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-18 906-2020-501
 ®

SECTION SEVEN
PARTS LISTS AND DRAWINGS
CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER PAGE #

Table 7-1. Accurus® Console Dash Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Table 7-2. Parts Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

PARTS LISTING
Accurus Console Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-501,-502,-503,-504 . . . . . . 7-3
Power Supply II Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1460-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Main Air Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1435-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1243-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Pneumatic Connector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1247-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Posterior Options Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1362-501,-502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-3103-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Upper Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1329-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Upper Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1511-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Front Lower Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1304-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Receiver Mechanism Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1554-501* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Illuminator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1449-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Footpedal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1311-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

ASSEMBLIES
Console Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-0000-XXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Power Supply II Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1460-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Main Air Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1435-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Pressure/Vacuum Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1243-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Pneumatic Connector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1247-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Posterior Options Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1362-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Low Pressure Air Source (LPAS) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-3103-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Upper Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1329-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Upper Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1511-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Lower Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1304-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Receiver Mechanism Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1554-501* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Illuminator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1449-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Footpedal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-1311-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63

* Receiver Mechanism Assembly 202-1176-501 was replaced by 202-1554-501.

906-2020-501 7-1
 ®

Table 7-1. Accurus® Console Dash Number Descriptions

Console Dash Serial Number Range Description
Number

-501 IACL001006 - IACL001377 Model 400VS with Original Hardware configuration.

-502 IACL001378 - IACL001435 Model 400VS with the following hardware changes: New Upper
Front Panel Assembly* with 421 LCD (PN 202-1511-501,), New
Receiver Mechanism (PN 202-1554-501, required for model
600ds), and new Host (PN 202-1382-003, required for voice
confirmation and new LCD).

-503 IACL001436 and above Model 600DS(includes anterior modes) with same hardware
configuration as -502 console.

-504 IACL001436 and above Model 400VS enhanced with Voice Confirmation, adjustable tones,
(IACL001422 also included) Doctor Presets (programmable memory) and remote control
capability. Same hardware configuration as -502 console.

* The Upper Front Panel Assembly consists of: the Front Panel Controller PCB, 421 LCD, LCD Inverter, Keypad LED PCB, 7
Segment Display PCB, Switch Layer Touch Panel (touchscreen) and associated cables and hardware.

7-2 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

ACCURUS CONSOLE ASSEMBLY

202-0000-501, -502, -503, -504
001 ...... 202-1377-001 . . . . . . CHASSIS,CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1202-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 653-023 . . . . . . . . . . . FOOT,ROUND,1.88X.66 RUBBER BLK . . . . . . 4.0 EA
004 ...... 813-003 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M5X0.8 W/LOCK WASHER . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1267-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM FAN W20 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1435-501 . . . . . . ASSY,AIR SOURCE,MAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1440-001 . . . . . . LEVEL,RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 202-1438-001 . . . . . . PLATE,RELEASE LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 278-016 . . . . . . . . . . . FAN,GUARD-KIT,4.65X4.65 PLSTC . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 202-1340-001 . . . . . . CABLE ASSY,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 202-1428-001 . . . . . . BUSHING,PANEL,ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 278-015 . . . . . . . . . . . FAN,GUARD,2.36X2.36 PLASTIC . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
013 ...... 773-077 . . . . . . . . . . . RING,RETAINING,EXTERNAL .925 . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 773-073 . . . . . . . . . . . RING,RETAINING,.250X.027 EXT . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 691-233 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,COMP,3X1.34X.042 SST . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
016 ...... 809-010 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M5X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
017 ...... 809-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
018 ...... 809-007 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M4X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 17.0 EA
019 ...... 825-016 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X16 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
020 ...... 202-1429-001 . . . . . . ROD,PUSH,RELEASE ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 202-1414-501 . . . . . . ASSY,BRACKET,INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 202-1256-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,ILLUMINATOR FAN W41 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
023 ...... 825-019 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X30 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
024 ...... 202-1460-501 . . . . . . ASSY,POWER SUPPLY II,ACCURUS . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
025 ...... 202-1469-001 . . . . . . HOSE,2.25ID,FLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
026 ...... 200-1450-001 . . . . . . CORD,POWER,AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
027 ...... 026-030 . . . . . . . . . . . CLAMP,CABLE,.312 DIA NYL WHT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
028 ...... 202-1362-501 . . . . . . ASSY,POSTERIOR OPTIONS,ACCURUS . . . . 1.0 EA *for –501, -502
202-1362-502 . . . . . . ASSY,POSTERIOR OPTIONS,ACCURUS . . . . 1.0 EA *for –503, -504
029 ...... 202-1332-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,AIR/FLUID CONTROLLER . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
030 ...... 202-1014-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,LPA ILLUM CONTROLLER . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
031 ...... 771-624 . . . . . . . . . . . PIN,HITCH,.094 DIA SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
032 ...... 797-085 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,INT LOCK.17X.34X.02 SST . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
033 ...... 200-1016-502 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,BACKPLANE U/S-DIATH . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
034 ...... 394-1100-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,ERBE COAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
035 ...... 200-1546-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,U/S DRIVER SOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
036 ...... 202-1331-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,U/S-DIATHERMY CONT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
037 ...... 202-1422-001 . . . . . . CLAMP,PCB,DIATHERMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
038 ...... 202-1463-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,U/S-DIATHERMY W44 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
039 ...... 202-1465-001 . . . . . . LABEL,NAMEPLATE,ACCURUS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
040 ...... 276-275 . . . . . . . . . . . DRIVE,SOLID STATE,PCMCIA CARD . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
041 ...... 202-1430-001 . . . . . . BRACKET,MOUNTING,PCMC1A . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
042 ...... 202-1462-001 . . . . . . PLATE,COVER,SERIAL EXPANSION . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
043 ...... 202-1382-001 . . . . . . SYSTEM,COMPUTER,486DX2 50MHZ . . . . . . 1.0 EA *for -501
202-1382-003 . . . . . . SYSTEM,COMPUTER,486DX2 50MHZ . . . . . . 1.0 EA *for –502, -503, -504
044 ...... 825-012 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
045 ...... 825-004 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
046 ...... 800-203 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,INT LOCK,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
047 ...... 202-1329-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PANEL,FRONT UPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA *for -501
202-1511-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PANEL,FRONT UPPER 421 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA *for –502, -503, -504
048 ...... 202-1304-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PANEL,FRONT LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
049 ...... 813-002 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M4X0.7 W/LOCK WASHER . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
050 ...... 797-063 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,EXT LOCK.17X.38X.02 SST . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
051 ...... 202-1449-501 . . . . . . ASSY,ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
052 ...... 202-1439-001 . . . . . . COVER,ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
053 ...... 801-004 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
054 ...... 027-002 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,1.25X5.50L,NYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
055 ...... 202-1118-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM COM PWR W6 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
056 ...... 202-1118-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM COM PWR W8 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
057 ...... 202-1118-503 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM COM PWR W10 . . . . . 1.0 EA
058 ...... 202-1118-504 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SYSTEM COM PWR W12 . . . . . 1.0 EA
059 ...... 202-1119-001 . . . . . . CABLE,SYSTEM,COM SIGNAL 34IN . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
060 ...... 202-1119-002 . . . . . . CABLE,SYSTEM,COM SIGNAL 24IN . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
061 ...... 202-1119-003 . . . . . . CABLE,SYSTEM,COM SIGNAL 14IN . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
062 ...... 202-1119-004 . . . . . . CABLE,SYSTEM,COM SIGNAL 34IN . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
063 ...... 202-1241-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,PWR 110VAC INTL W2B . . . . . . 1.0 EA
064 ...... 202-1259-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,ILLUM POWER W3 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
065 ...... 202-1270-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,DC POWER W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
066 ...... 202-1271-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,85VDC POWER W4 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

906-2020-501 7-3
 ®

Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS
...ACCURUS CONSOLE ASSEMBLY CONTINUED.
067 . . . . . . 202-1366-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,REMOTE SERIAL W23 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
068 . . . . . . 202-1473-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,POWER PCMCIA W17 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
069 . . . . . . 202-1490-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,PCMCIA SIGNAL W16 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
070 . . . . . . 202-1447-506 . . . . . . ASSY,FLASH CARD,PRGMD V1.11 . . . . . . . . . A/R EA SYSTEM SOFTWARE for –501, -502
202-1555-504 . . . . . . ASSY,FLASH CARD,PRGMD 600DS 2.10 . . . . A/R EA SYSTEM SOFTWARE for -503
202-1578-502 . . . . . . ASSY,FLASH CARD,PRG 400VS V2.10 . . . . . . A/R EA SYSTEM SOFTWARE for -504
071 . . . . . . 202-1389-504 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG U/S/DIATH V1.06 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA US DIA CNTL PCB: U27 for –501, -502
202-1558-504 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG U/S/DIATH V2.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA US DIA CNTL PCB: U27 for -503
202-1558-503 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG U/S/DIATH V2.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA US DIA CNTL PCB: U27 for -504
072 . . . . . . 202-1209-503 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG LPA/ILLUM V1.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA LPA/ILL CNTL PCB: U33 for –501, -502
202-1556-503 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG LPA/ILLUM V2.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA LPA/ILL CNTL PCB: U33 for –503, -504
073 . . . . . . 202-1392-501 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG FP CTRL X1.00.05 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA FRONT PANEL CNTL PCB:U9 for –501, -502
202-1559-501 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG FP CTRL V2.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA FRONT PANEL CNTL PCB:U9 for –503, -504
074 . . . . . . 202-1386-506 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG AIR/FL CTRL V1.06 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA AIR/FLUID CNTL PCB:U14 for –501, -502
202-1557-504 . . . . . . ASSY,IC,PRG AIR/FL CTRL V2.08 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA AIR/FLUID CNTL PCB:U14 for –503, -504
075 . . . . . . 825-020 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X35 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA

POWER SUPPLY II ASSEMBLY

202-1460-501
001 ...... 202-1466-501 . . . . . . ASSY,MODULE,AC ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1441-001 . . . . . . POWER SUPPLY,ACCURUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1457-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,LPAS/STANDBY POWER . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1458-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,5V ENABLE W47 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1459-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,POWER CONTROL W46 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 072-026 . . . . . . . . . . . TERMINAL LUG,22-18 AWG,NO.6 . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
007 ...... 072-186 . . . . . . . . . . . TERMINAL,LUG,.250 TO PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
008 ...... 037-149 . . . . . . . . . . . WIRE,STR,INS 18 AWG WHT 1 COND . . . . . . . .50 FT
009 ...... 796-100 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,.171X.500X.096 NKL . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 807-012 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
011 ...... 807-001 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X5 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
012 ...... 821-164 . . . . . . . . . . . SPACER,5.2X8.0X5MM,SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 027-026 . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNT,CABLE,ANCHOR TIE #10 SCR . . . . . . 2.0 EA
014 ...... 027-003 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,.625X3.50L,NYLON . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
015 ...... 807-015 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X12 SST . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
016 ...... 807-003 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X8 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
017 ...... 796-010 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO.4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 072-188 . . . . . . . . . . . TERMINAL,LUG,.168 TO PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 EA
019 ...... 202-1464-001 . . . . . . COVER,TERMINAL,POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
020 ...... 811-001 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,FLAT HD SKT,M3X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
021 ...... 130-023 . . . . . . . . . . . FUSE,10A,250V 3AB/SFE SLO BLO . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
024 ...... 202-1488-001 . . . . . . LABEL,SYSTEM GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
025 ...... 796-011 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO.6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

MAIN AIR SOURCE ASSEMBLY

202-1435-501
001 ...... 202-1433-001 . . . . . . MANIFOLD,AIR SOURCE,MAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1416-001 . . . . . . COUPLER,MALE,ADAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 895-324 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,SOLENOID,24V 2POS 5 PORT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 886-014 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,RELIEF,.125 MNPT 100 PSI . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 886-016 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,RELIEF,.125 MNPT 150 PSI . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 895-321 . . . . . . . . . . . REGULATOR,PRESSURE,90 PSI . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 825-008 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X25 SST . . . . . . . . . . 7.0 EA
008 ...... 895-320 . . . . . . . . . . . FILTER,5 MICRON,12 NPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 893-526 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,ELBOW,.13FTO .187M BRS . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 893-364 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,NIPPLE,HEX .12NPT BRS . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 893-486 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,ELBOW,.12NPT X.25 TUBE . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 593-012 . . . . . . . . . . . TAPE,TEFLON,.50IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/R FT
013 ...... 202-1262-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,AIR SOURCE W37 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 646-023 . . . . . . . . . . . SLEEVE,CAP,.406 DIA X 1.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

7-4 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

PRESSURE/VACUUM MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

202-1243-501
001 ...... 202-1013-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,TRANSDUCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1253-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,CYL VALVE-A W33 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1254-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,CYL VALVE-B W34 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1263-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SOLENOID VALVE PVM . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1264-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,A/F CONT VITON W36 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1268-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,TRANSDUCER SIG W-45 . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1240-001 . . . . . . MANIFOLD,PRESSURE-VAC ASSY . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 202-1403-001 . . . . . . CHIP,VACUUM,X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 202-1427-001 . . . . . . MUFFLER,POLYSINTERED,.5 NPT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 788-075 . . . . . . . . . . . SPACER,ROUND,6MMX6MM AL . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
011 ...... 825-004 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 7.0 EA
012 ...... 825-007 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X20 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
013 ...... 825-008 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X25 SST . . . . . . . . . . 12.0 EA
014 ...... 825-150 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M2.5X10 SST . . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
015 ...... 825-156 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M2X20 SST . . . . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
017 ...... 886-012 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,CHECK,.5 DIA .15 PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 895-313 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,SOLENOID,24V 2POS 5 PORT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 895-314 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,SOLENOID,24V 2POS 3 PORT . . . . . . 8.0 EA
020 ...... 895-315 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,SOLENOID,24V 2POS 2 PORT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 895-316 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,SOLENOID,24V 1POS 7 PORT . . . . . . 3.0 EA
023 ...... 895-312 . . . . . . . . . . . MUFFLER,.62 ODX1.55,.25-18 NPT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
024 ...... 895-317 . . . . . . . . . . . REGULATOR,PRESSURE,57 PSI . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
025 ...... 895-318 . . . . . . . . . . . REGULATOR,PRESSURE,25 PSI . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
026 ...... 774-073 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.125X.250X.062,NITRILE . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
027 ...... 891-007 . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICANT,GREASE,HI-TEMP WHITE . . . . . . A/R OZ
028 ...... 202-1024-001 . . . . . . SCREW,SKT HD,M1.6X18 ND STRIP . . . . . . . . 18.0 EA
029 ...... 893-533 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,BLEED PLUG,10-32X.012 . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
030 ...... 043-009 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,POLYUR,.125X.250 GREEN . . . . . . . . .33 FT

PNEUMATIC CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY

202-1247-501
001 ...... 202-1339-001 . . . . . . MANIFOLD,PNEUMATIC CONN ASSY . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 895-316 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,SOLENOID,24V 1POS 7 PORT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 886-018 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,RELIEF,.125 MNPT 65 PSI . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1334-001 . . . . . . CONNECTOR,PNEUMATIC,FEM 10-32 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 895-312 . . . . . . . . . . . MUFFLER,.62 ODX1.55,.25-18 NPT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 893-424 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,10-32MX.12H,BRS OSEAL . . . . . . . . . 8.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1361-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,PNEU CONN VALVE W28 . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 784-191 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CHEESE HD,M2X25 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
009 ...... 893-411 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,LUER-LOK,MALE 10-32 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 893-520 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,LUER,FEM TO 10-32 M SS . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 774-135 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.158X.047,BUNA-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
012 ...... 202-1333-001 . . . . . . CONNECTOR,PNEUMATIC,MALE 10-32 . . . . . 3.0 EA
013 ...... 893-524 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,.13MNPT X.12,BRASS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 202-1406-001 . . . . . . HEADER,SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 043-009 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,POLYUR,.125X.250 GREEN . . . . . . . . 2.58 FT
016 ...... 699-010 . . . . . . . . . . . FILTER,MECH,2.4X.82,25 MICRON . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
017 ...... 040-073 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,SILICONE,.125X.250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 FT
018 ...... 202-1509-001 . . . . . . FITTING,BARBED,10-32X.09 BRASS . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 043-027 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,PU,.16 OD X .09 ID CLR . . . . . . . . . . . .50 FT
020 ...... 893-529 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,STR,M5X0.8 6MM TUBE . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 893-334 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,BARBED,QC .12X.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 593-012 . . . . . . . . . . . TAPE,TEFLON,.50IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/R FT
023 ...... 892-110 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,262 RED . . . . . . A/R EA
024 ...... 798-322 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO 10 .031 THK NYL . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

906-2020-501 7-5
 ®

Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

POSTERIER OPTIONS ASSEMBLY

202-1362-501, 502
001 . . . . . . 202-1423-001 . . . . . . TRAY,POSTERIOR OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 . . . . . . 202-1243-501 . . . . . . ASSY,MANIFOLD,PRESSURE VACUUM . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 . . . . . . 202-3103-501 . . . . . . ASSY,LPAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 . . . . . . 202-1176-501 . . . . . . ASSY,MECHANISM,RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA for -501
......... 202-1554-501 . . . . . . ASSY,MECHANISM,RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA for -502
005 . . . . . . 202-1247-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PNEUMATIC CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 . . . . . . 819-005 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST BLK . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 . . . . . . 825-020 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X35 SST . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 EA
008 . . . . . . 825-018 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X25 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA

LOW PRESSURE AIR SOURCE (LPAS) ASSEMBLY

202-3103-501
001 ...... 202-3100-001 . . . . . . MANIFOLD ASSY,LPAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1341-501 . . . . . . ASSY,KIT,VALVE LPAS W-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 050-807 . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR,HSG,9S LKG RAMP PL2D . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 886-009 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,RELIEF,3.8 PSI MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 403-029 . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE,CHECK,.12SCFM .06 TUBING . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1274-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,PUMP LPAS W39 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1505-001 . . . . . . REGULATOR,PRESS,30MMHG . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 895-312 . . . . . . . . . . . MUFFLER,.62 ODX1.55,.25-18 NPT . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
009 ...... 893-528 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,PLUG,10-32 BRASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 893-425 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,PLUG,10-32M BRS OSEAL . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 027-003 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,.625X3.50L,NYLON . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
012 ...... 893-498 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,10-32M X.12 TUBE,NYLON . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 774-103 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.070X.210X.070,SIL 60D . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 040-073 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,SILICONE,.125X.250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 FT
015 ...... 825-015 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X12 SST . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 EA
016 ...... 825-008 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X25 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
017 ...... 826-038 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,4-40X1.00 LKG . . . . . . . 4.0 EA

FRONT UPPER PANEL ASSEMBLY

202-1329-501
001 ...... 202-1203-001 . . . . . . PANEL,UPPER,DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1228-001 . . . . . . KEYPAD,ELASTOMER,UPPER FRONT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1226-001 . . . . . . TOUCH SCREEN,SWITCH LAYER . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 088-031 . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY,LCD,10.4 DIAGONAL RGB . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1015-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,CONTROLLER FRONT PNL . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1328-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,DISPLAY 7 SEGMENT . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1393-001 . . . . . . STANDOFF,FRONT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 801-003 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 EA
009 ...... 816-016 . . . . . . . . . . . STANDOFF,M/F,M3.0X6MMX30 SST . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
010 ...... 825-006 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X16 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
011 ...... 800-203 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,INT LOCK,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 EA
012 ...... 200-1582-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,GROUND CT 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 202-1402-001 . . . . . . CLAMP,SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 892-042 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,242 BLUE . . . . . A/R ML
016 ...... 202-1478-001 . . . . . . SPACER,PCB,7-SEG FRONT DISPLAY . . . . . . 1.0 EA
017 ...... 825-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
018 ...... 202-1330-001 . . . . . . CABLE,VIDEO,W22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 026-074 . . . . . . . . . . . CLAMP,CABLE,.25X.375 NYL BLK . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
020 ...... 202-1425-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,7-SEGMENT W-26 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 200-1128-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,LCD DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 202-1476-001 . . . . . . STANDOFF,SHOULDER,FR DISPLAY . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
023 ...... 202-1477-001 . . . . . . BRACE,LCD,FRONT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
024 ...... 775-009 . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET,.125X.30X.020,BUNA N . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
025 ...... 813-001 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M3X0.5 W/LOCK WASHER . . . . . . . 4.0 EA

7-6 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

FRONT UPPER PANEL ASSEMBLY

202-1511-501

001 ...... 202-1203-001 . . . . . . PANEL,UPPER,DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

002 ...... 202-1228-001 . . . . . . KEYPAD,ELASTOMER,UPPER FRONT . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1519-001 . . . . . . TOUCH SCREEN,SWITCH LAYER . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 200-1836-001 . . . . . . LCD,COLOR TFT,10.4 DIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1512-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,CONTROL FR PANEL 421 . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1514-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,DISPLAY 7 SEGMENT 421 . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1513-001 . . . . . . BRACKET,MOUNTING,421 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 801-003 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.0 EA
009 ...... 202-1516-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,LED KEYPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 041-020 . . . . . . . . . . . SHIELDING,INSULATED GRND STRAP . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 825-153 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
012 ...... 202-1515-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,LCD INVERTER W-48 . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 817-033 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SCH,FP M3X16 SST BLK . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
014 ...... 200-1829-001 . . . . . . LCD,INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 026-030 . . . . . . . . . . . CLAMP,CABLE,.312 DIA NYL WHT . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
016 ...... 809-001 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
017 ...... 825-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
018 ...... 202-1517-001 . . . . . . CABLE,VIDEO,421 W49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 202-1518-001 . . . . . . GASKET,REAR,TOUCH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
020 ...... 202-1425-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,7-SEGMENT W-26 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 813-002 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M4X0.7 W/LOCK WASHER . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 800-203 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,INT LOCK,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
024 ...... 796-010 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO.4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
025 ...... 813-001 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M3X0.5 W/LOCK WASHER . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
026 ...... 892-042 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,242 BLUE . . . . . A/R ML
027 ...... 040-345 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,HT SHRINK,.120 CLR TFL . . . . . . . . . .10 FT
028 ...... 892-037 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,271 RED . . . . . . A/R ML

FRONT LOWER PANEL ASSEMBLY

202-1304-501
001 ...... 202-1204-001 . . . . . . PANEL,FRONT,LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1252-001 . . . . . . GASKET,PANEL,FRONT LOWER . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1275-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,HANDPIECE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1269-501 . . . . . . ASSY,SPEAKER,W21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1276-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,STAND-BY SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 825-001 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X5 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0 EA
007 ...... 801-003 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0 EA
008 ...... 202-1535-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,HP CONN STR RLF W43 . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 202-1426-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,HANDPIECE LED W-27 . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 202-1272-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,SOUND/STAND-BY W24 . . . . . . 1.0 EA

RECEIVER MECHANISM ASSEMBLY

202-1554-501
001 ...... 202-1211-001 . . . . . . BEZEL,RECEIVER MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1373-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,EJECTOR,RECEIVER MECH . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1525-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,PINCHER,LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1524-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,PINCHER,RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 771-625 . . . . . . . . . . . PIN, COILED, .125 X .625 CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 EA
006 ...... 202-1527-001 . . . . . . PINCHER,DUAL FLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
007 ...... 202-1528-001 . . . . . . HAMMER, OFFSET, DUAL FLAT . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
008 ...... 202-1526-001 . . . . . . PINCHER, FLAG,DUAL FLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
009 ...... 202-1244-001 . . . . . . TIP,TUBE UNLOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 202-1372-001 . . . . . . LATCH ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 202-1198-001 . . . . . . PIN,PIVOT,LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 202-1346-001 . . . . . . SCREW,HEX,UNLOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 202-1363-001 . . . . . . CYLINDER,SPECIAL,7/16 BORE RET . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
014 ...... 202-1549-001 . . . . . . CYLINDER,SPECIAL,9/16 RETR . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 202-1550-001 . . . . . . CYLINDER,SPECIAL,9/16 EXTENDED . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
016 ...... 202-1368-001 . . . . . . CYLINDER,LATCH,MODIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
017 ...... 202-1230-001 . . . . . . LATCH,SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 202-1345-001 . . . . . . MOTOR,STEP,12V 2PH W32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 202-1205-501 . . . . . . ASSY,HUB ROLLER,4X1.8 DIA . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

906-2020-501 7-7
 ®

Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS
...RECEIVER MECHANISM ASSEMBLY CONTINUED
020 . . . . . . 202-1016-501 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,RECEIVER MECHANISM . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 . . . . . . 202-1327-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,OPTO-SENSOR W30 . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 . . . . . . 895-319 . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER,AIR,.36 DIA .5 STRK . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
023 . . . . . . 893-521 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,ELBOW,10-32 .09DIA PBT . . . . . . . . . 5.0 EA
024 . . . . . . 893-522 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,CONNECTOR,M INTER HEX . . . . . . . 11.0 EA
025 . . . . . . 202-1509-001 . . . . . . FITTING,BARBED,10-32X.09 BRASS . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
026 . . . . . . 811-011 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,FLAT HD SKT,M4X12 SST . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
028 . . . . . . 825-015 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X12 SST . . . . . . . . . . 6.0 EA
029 . . . . . . 825-014 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
030 . . . . . . 825-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
031 . . . . . . 825-004 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
032 . . . . . . 824-309 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SKT HD,M3X5 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
033 . . . . . . 797-017 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,SPLT LK,.19X.33X.05 SST . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
034 . . . . . . 800-004 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,SPLITLOCK,M4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
035 . . . . . . 801-003 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
036 . . . . . . 892-042 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,242 BLUE . . . . . A/R ML
037 . . . . . . 824-041 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SKT HD,M4X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
038 . . . . . . 202-1342-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,RCVR MECH SIG W-29 . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
039 . . . . . . 202-1327-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,OPTO-SENSOR W31 . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
040 . . . . . . 202-1405-001 . . . . . . HEADER,END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
041 . . . . . . 202-1475-001 . . . . . . FITTING,SWIVEL,.016IN GRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
042 . . . . . . 202-1475-002 . . . . . . FITTING,SWIVEL,.020IN BLUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
043 . . . . . . 043-027 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,PU,.16 OD X .09 ID CLR . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 FT
044 . . . . . . 893-534 . . . . . . . . . . . FITTING,QD,SC BARB 3MM CPLG . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
045 . . . . . . 202-1437-001 . . . . . . COUPLER,LATCH RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
046 . . . . . . 202-1506-001 . . . . . . COLLET,TUBING,.156 OD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
047 . . . . . . 798-322 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO 10 .031 THK NYL . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

ILLUMINATOR MODULE
202-1449-501
001 ...... 202-1450-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,ILLUMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 202-1495-001 . . . . . . CHANNEL,OPTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 202-1352-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,FIBEROPTIC,INTRALUX . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
004 ...... 807-1154-001 . . . . . . HOLDER,FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 807-1148-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
006 ...... 807-1142-001 . . . . . . BRACKET,CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 807-1143-001 . . . . . . BLOCK,CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 807-1194-001 . . . . . . OVERLAY,ILLUMINATOR,INTRALUX . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 301-339 . . . . . . . . . . . LENS,24MM DIA,18MM FL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
011 ...... 807-1145-001 . . . . . . FILTER,HEAT REJECTION,SHT WAVE . . . . . . 2.0 EA
012 ...... 807-1177-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,LAMP SOCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
013 ...... 807-1169-001 . . . . . . LABEL,NAMEPLATE,MVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 143-088 . . . . . . . . . . . LAMP,PROJECTION,12V 50W . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
015 ...... 807-1187-001 . . . . . . MIRROR,35MM DIA,34.6MM ROC . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
017 ...... 805-146 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,M4X0.7,BBRG END SST . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
018 ...... 026-029 . . . . . . . . . . . CLAMP,CABLE,.250 DIA NYL WHT . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
019 ...... 892-302 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,EPOXY,WHITE 2 PARTS . . . . . . . . A/R EA
021 ...... 784-190 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,PH SLT,M4X16 NYLON . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
023 ...... 809-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
024 ...... 807-014 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 EA
025 ...... 811-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,FLAT HD SKT,M3X8 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
026 ...... 813-001 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M3X0.5 W/LOCK WASHER . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
027 ...... 807-1176-001 . . . . . . LABEL,BULB SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
028 ...... 807-1144-001 . . . . . . LENS,ASPHERIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
029 ...... 807-1178-001 . . . . . . ADAPTER,INTRALUX TO ACMI . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
030 ...... 807-1195-001 . . . . . . RETAINER,TETHER ADAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
034 ...... 702-008 . . . . . . . . . . . CHAIN,BEAD,NO.3 .092 DIA SST . . . . . . . . . . . .442 FT 2X2.65"
035 ...... 674-126 . . . . . . . . . . . PLUNGER,SPRING,4-48X.115 SST . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
036 ...... 202-1491-001 . . . . . . CLAMP,CABLE,DUAL .19 DIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
037 ...... 892-042 . . . . . . . . . . . ADHESIVE,THREADLOCKER,242 BLUE . . . . . A/R ML

7-8 906-2020-501
 ®

Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS

FOOTPEDAL ASSEMBLY
202-1311-501
001 ...... 200-1034-502 . . . . . . ASSY,PCB,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
002 ...... 200-3149-001 . . . . . . CABLE ASSY,SHLD,15 COND 24 AWG . . . . . . 1.0 EA
003 ...... 200-1334-501 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,GEARMOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
004 ...... 202-1309-502 . . . . . . ASSY,CABLE,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
005 ...... 202-1496-001 . . . . . . HOUSING,FOOTSWITCH,RIGHT SIDE . . . . . . 1.0 EA
007 ...... 200-3153-001 . . . . . . MOTOR ASSY,GEARHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
008 ...... 200-3035-001 . . . . . . PLUNGER,SPRING RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
009 ...... 200-3036-001 . . . . . . BLOCK,TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
010 ...... 200-3034-001 . . . . . . SHAFT,TENSION,ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
011 ...... 200-1595-001 . . . . . . LEVER/SHAFT ASSY,PINNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
012 ...... 200-1391-001 . . . . . . GEAR,ACTUATOR,ENCODER MODIFIED . . . . 1.0 EA
014 ...... 200-1393-001 . . . . . . GEAR,MOTOR/TREADLE,MODIFIED . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
015 ...... 200-3060-001 . . . . . . HANDLE,FOOTPEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
017 ...... 200-3168-001 . . . . . . SUPPORT,WIRE,FOOTPEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
018 ...... 200-3029-001 . . . . . . ARM,LEVER,SWITCH ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
019 ...... 200-1735-001 . . . . . . COVER,SWITCH,L DIE CAST MACH . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
020 ...... 200-1733-001 . . . . . . COVER,SWITCH,R DIE CAST MACH . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
021 ...... 200-1664-001 . . . . . . TREADLE,CASTING,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
022 ...... 200-3066-001 . . . . . . PAD,HEEL,FOOTPEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
023 ...... 202-1494-001 . . . . . . GASKET,BASEPLATE,.093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
024 ...... 202-1493-001 . . . . . . PLATE,BASE,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
025 ...... 200-3043-001 . . . . . . PAD,RUBBER,BASEPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
026 ...... 200-1662-001 . . . . . . COVER,SIDE,RIGHT FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
027 ...... 200-1663-001 . . . . . . COVER,SIDE,LEFT FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
028 ...... 202-1499-001 . . . . . . LABEL,ID,FOOTSWITCH ACCURUS . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
029 ...... 280-003 . . . . . . . . . . . ENCODER,OPTICAL,PNL 500 CPR . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
030 ...... 263-122 . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH,PUSHBUTTON,SPST WTRPRF . . . . . 4.0 EA S3-6
031 ...... 711-025 . . . . . . . . . . . GEAR,SPUR,32T 64 PITCH SST . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
032 ...... 774-032 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.239X.070,NITRILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
033 ...... 774-122 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.176X.31X.070,NITRILE . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
034 ...... 691-191 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,.58X.75X2.75,EXT MW . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
035 ...... 691-137 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,CPRSN,.75X.360 DIA SST . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
036 ...... 691-207 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,COMP,.59X.72X.75 MW . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
037 ...... 691-193 . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING,M5X.56X1.25,HELIX MACH . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
040 ...... 773-034 . . . . . . . . . . . RING,RETAINING,.303 SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
041 ...... 807-143 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M2.0X8 SST . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
042 ...... 807-003 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X8 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 EA
043 ...... 811-009 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,FLAT HD SKT,M4X8 SST . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
044 ...... 807-012 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M4X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 EA
045 ...... 809-007 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M4X10 SST . . . . . . . . . . 12.0 EA
046 ...... 805-041 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SKT HD,FLT M4X6 SST . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
047 ...... 814-019 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,SHLDR,SKT HD M5X6.013 SS . . . . . . 5.0 EA
049 ...... 807-028 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M5X16 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
050 ...... 801-003 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M3 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
051 ...... 775-012 . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET,M5,.20X.39X.12 NYLON . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
052 ...... 672-024 . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNT,CABLE,FLAT NO.8 NYLON . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
053 ...... 027-019 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,BLACK,HT STABILIZED . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
054 ...... 800-004 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,SPLITLOCK,M4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 EA
055 ...... 200-1368-001 . . . . . . PLATE,BACKUP,COVER FOOTSWITCH . . . . . 2.0 EA
056 ...... 202-1492-001 . . . . . . GASKET,COVER,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
057 ...... 801-004 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,M4 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
058 ...... 803-004 . . . . . . . . . . . NUT,HEX,M4X0.7 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 EA
059 ...... 200-1339-001 . . . . . . PAD,SOLE,FOOTPEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
060 ...... 200-1380-001 . . . . . . SUPPORT,ENCODER,FOOTSWITCH . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
061 ...... 798-014 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,FLAT,NO.10 .062 THK NYL . . . . . . . 3.0 EA
063 ...... 797-085 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,INT LOCK.17X.34X.02 SST . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
064 ...... 807-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M3X6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 EA
065 ...... 200-1337-001 . . . . . . GEAR,SPUR,GEARMOTOR MODIFIED . . . . . . 1.0 EA
066 ...... 200-1401-001 . . . . . . PLATE,SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
067 ...... 200-1402-001 . . . . . . BEARING,SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
071 ...... 200-1419-001 . . . . . . BRACKET,INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
072 ...... 200-1494-001 . . . . . . PLATE,CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
073 ...... 200-1495-001 . . . . . . PLATE,STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
075 ...... 262-069 . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH,PROBE & RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
076 ...... 891-013 . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICANT,GREASE,MULTI-PURPOSE . . . . . A/R ML
077 ...... 040-049 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,HEAT SHRINK,.063 ID BLK . . . . . . . . A/R FT 2 X .70" LONG
078 ...... 797-083 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,INT LOCK.12X.27X.02 SST . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
079 ...... 809-002 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,BTN HD SKT,M3X8 SST . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
083 ...... 891-019 . . . . . . . . . . . LUBRICANT,SEALANT,VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/R OZ
085 ...... 805-045 . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW,SKT HD,FLT M4X16 SST . . . . . . . 2.0 EA

906-2020-501 7-9
 ®

Table 7-2. Parts Listing

DWG PART
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY REMARKS
...FOOTPEDAL ASSEMBLY CONTINUED
086 . . . . . . 200-1668-001 . . . . . . BODY,HEEL SWITCH,RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
087 . . . . . . 202-1381-001 . . . . . . SWITCH,PUSHBUTTON,WATERPROOF . . . . . 1.0 EA
088 . . . . . . 200-1669-001 . . . . . . CAP,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
089 . . . . . . 200-1701-001 . . . . . . PLATE,BOTTOM,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
090 . . . . . . 771-622 . . . . . . . . . . . PIN,DOWEL,.0939X.875 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
091 . . . . . . 774-133 . . . . . . . . . . . O-RING,.614X.754X.07,EPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
092 . . . . . . 200-1671-001 . . . . . . GASKET,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
093 . . . . . . 200-1673-001 . . . . . . PAD,BOTTOM,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
094 . . . . . . 200-1702-001 . . . . . . GASKET,BOTTOM,HEEL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA
095 . . . . . . 807-043 . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW,CAP HD SKT,M6X16 SST . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
096 . . . . . . 800-107 . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER,EXT LOCK,M6 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 EA
097 . . . . . . 043-004 . . . . . . . . . . . TUBING,POLYUR,.125X.250 CLEAR . . . . . . . . 1.042FT 12.5"
098 . . . . . . 027-002 . . . . . . . . . . . CABLE TIE,1.25X5.50L,NYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 EA

7-10 906-2020-501
 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

7-68 906-2020-501
 ®

SECTION EIGHT
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

This section is reserved for future enhancements and

accessories that may be developed for the Accurus®.

906-2020-501 8-1
 ®

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

8-2 906-2020-501